Home

R&S FSV-K84/-K85 1xEV-DO Analysis

1. 341 SENG CDP SMOtDe eee 12172 STATus QUEStionable SYNG CONDIOR 2 rre enr er nnt ER eri tr patr Pn rns 313 S TAT s QUEStionable S deM CU KEE 313 GH RER UE NET RE 342 TRAGe NEEN ENEE 314 TRIGger n SEQuence BBPower FIOLDOlf 2 un cane eere pta eene er tht a erri TEATE reas 335 TRiIGger n gt ESEQuence HOLD On TIME sessi satt epo opor no pente UPS deren Y TE tp inet etae rre rne 336 TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HODLBoOf e ttti rrt trennen een teer 336 TRIGger n SEQuerice IFPower HYS Teresis 1t tron rer t eterno tnn cis 336 TRiGger n gt ESEQuence EVel EE E 335 TRIGger n SEQuence E EVel lEXTernal rrr tn tmr e neret tenes 336 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce Index A ACLR absolute limlt ctor o c taxa cq EO auc 130 adjacent channel name remote control 300 alternate channel name remote control 300 Channel Bandwidth 126 channel name remote control 300 channel names scio ER OCURRE REC 129 Channel Spacing s oce i IRSE HIS ERE 127 limit check 129 Limit Checking site 129 number of channels wee 125 reference cues wile relative limit s 190 te luchen 129 ACER MGASUFEME NE cesso rtt eoe S ER NUR EE 124 c 66 Add Channel Wo a a
2. x Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 293 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 293 x RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as a percentage 96 of the resolution bandwidth Values between 1 96 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 96 Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 293 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 293 Center CF Stepsize Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic Marker CF Stepsize Sets the step size to the value of the current marker and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics In
3. eee 18 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO MS Analysis K85 20 Measuring the Signal Channel Power eene 20 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask eee enn 21 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error 22 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 24 Measuring the Composite EVM eeeeeeeeneeennennennen nennen nnne nnn rient 25 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error seen 26 Test Setup for Base Station and Mobile Station Tests 29 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 31 Measurements and Result Displays eese nennen 32 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements 69 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements eeeeeeeenn n 121 Further Information 2 scccccccicscccectsaasccecestascccessctsveceeeteassdentecsesscteneseavsceseteaveueecestaacees 172 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis 199 kul ee Emm 201 CALCulate Subsystem neret pinnae terna ENEE 203 Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 3 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 CONFigure SUDSYSteIMis ii isiccsicccecccectencevccdscccesseie socde eevee ieesscees aac ca sated ce sseavessdniee
4. Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand WeightingFilter Only if Referen cePower method is TX Channel Power and the range is the ref erence range Type RRC CFilter Type of the weighting filter Yes Roll Off Factor 0 1 Excess bandwidth of the fil Only if the filter ter type is RRC Bandwidth bandwidth in Hz Filter bandwidth Only if the filter type is RRC FrequencyRange Yes Start frequency in Hz Start value of the range Yes Stop frequency in Hz Stop value of the range Yes Limit dBm Hz dBm A Range must contain Yes dBc dBr dB exactly two limit nodes one of the limit nodes has to have a relative unit e g dBc the other one must have an absolute unit e g dBm Start Value lt numeric_value gt Power limit at start fre Yes quency Unit dBm Hz dBm Sets the unit of the start dBc dBr dB value Stop Value lt numeric_value gt Power limit at stop fre quency Unit dBm Hz dBm Sets the unit of the stop dBc dBr dB value LimitFailMode Absolute Relative If used it has to be identical No Absolute and Rel to DefaultLimitFailMode ative Absolute or Relative RBW Bandwidth bandwidth in Hz gt RBW on page 135 Yes Type NORM PULS No CFIL RRC VBW Bandwidth bandwidth in Hz VBW on page 135 Yes Detector NEG POS If used it has to be identical No SAMP RMS in all ranges AVER QUAS Sweep Mode Manual Auto Sweep Time Mode
5. are ChannelType MAC Walsh Ch SF 2 64 Sym Rate ksps 19 2 ksps automatically calculated Modulation BPSK I Power dB 0 dB automatically calculated State Off DomainConflict No automatically calculated To change the channel type use the dropdown menu that opens when selecting high lighting the Channel Type field that should be changed modulation settings are changed in the same way To change the channel number type another channel number in the form Channel Number SpreadingFactor or just the code number in the respective field Confirm the change with the ENTER key To activate or deactivate a channel select the State field and confirm with the ENTER key The R amp S FSV automatically checks for conflicts between two active channels Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 245 Delete Channel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Deletes the selected channel without further notice Meas New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Initiates a measurement in Auto Search mode see Channel Search Mode on page 77 The measurement results are applied to the active channel table The active channel table is overwritten without further notice The softkey is only available if you have selected the Auto Search mode in the Chan nel Table Settings dialog box Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Sort New Copy Edit Channel Table Setting
6. ssssusss 73 91 109 158 R R amp S Digital UO Interface B17 118 329 R amp S Support SOMKECY aciei s re obti Da Pee tu Oe EE EDI oe 120 reference value channel power Sissin manian na 132 reference level channel POWER tetendit 124 133 151 offset 73 91 109 160 Reference level ssssssssssee 72 90 108 156 Reference Level Digital QU 2 ccce rei t rti tte nih 118 Reference Manual is K84 remote command s ssesssseieeeeeereieisererrenereee 215 Reference Mean Power sssssssssnssesssrinsesseesrrnnnensrrrrnnnnent 150 K84 remote command s ssesseseeeeeereerereierrereneeen 214 Reload Channel Table KBM EERS Resolution bandwidth Restart on Fail ids K84 remote command s ssssssseieseeesreieisrrerreneeee 253 Restore Default Channel Tables C 81 101 Restore STD Lines i i sc ca aho rna 151 K84 remote command sssssseeeeeeeerereisrrereneeee 214 Result Display Bitstream PT 59 Channel Bitstream Channel Results K84 E 38 Channel Results K84 85 remote 917 318 Channel Table KA sese 41 Channel Table K84 85 remote 321 323 Channel Table K85 ire eee tte tcs 56 Code Domain Error Power K84 44 Code Domain Error Power K84 85 remote 920 Code Domain Error
7. 101 Select Channel Settings K84 m Settings Overview K84 vil Settings Overview K85 Synch Multicarrier Settings K85 Settings IQ Capture Settings 73 91 signal channel power EE 66 Signal Channel Power nentes 123 Signal Source ef TT 117 Remote control sts art mM Slot K84 remote command see 272 Slot selection of G4 Ee 87 106 softkey 131 144 EE 148 149 OF Adj Chan erento rentes 125 of Adj Chan remote control 296 of Samples uiii eme we 145 of Samples remote control 236 Of TX Chalr etr terrere ke niis 125 of TX Chan remote control 304 Power Bandwidth 143 Power Bandwidth remote control Center 3 ee etes Marker sre 14 0 1 RBW i cett tede eee tbt 153 0 1 RBW remote control 293 294 0 1 SPAN eere terrre itte tenet d enhn 153 0 1 Span remote control 294 0 1 Demod BW K7 wi 199 0 5 RBW iecore i eaa 153 0 5 RBW remote control is 294 0 5 Spalt neret terree er nere e reos 153 0 5 Span remote control 293 294 0 5 Demod BW K7 AGURADS ROI iere ete decine Deine ACLR Abs Rel remote control s ACLR Ref Setti
8. seen 284 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LlIMit source ABSolute STOP see 285 IGENZGe EGbechumRANGe zangez UMit zsourcez RE L ative GTAbRt 285 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STOP cece eee een eeeeeeeeseeeeeteneeneeeees 286 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LlIMit source STATe sse nennen enne 286 SENSe ESPectrum RANGexrange RL EVel errato oen tion rt theta riae nra te Fair SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO 287 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt TRANsducer cece eens cess ariera daenna nSeries i raTa 288 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FREQuency STARt essent ennt 282 SENSe ESPectrum RANGesrange FREQuency STOP 2 eren tenth tnr rne nua 282 SENSe ESPeetr m RRANge i i teer entree rra rhe ie n REY FERME FE SEENEN E ERE CER EYE A SENSe ESPecthurm IT de SENSe FREQUuency GENTSt iro eter re rere terere i re de PIRE ee e T TER SENSe FREQuency GENTet STED tror rrt ree pe i rere e e E e e Ra ER EXE id E KE eelere BE HN AUTO E SENSe FREQUuency CGENTerSTEP LINK 1 t trt i rn ren rct rene pee SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor SENSE FREQUENCYZOFF SC e SENSe FREQ uehcy SPAN ttt rer a ai t Aaile SENSe FREQuSncy SPAN FU LE inei pce ie oz pb e Po ic
9. Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 35 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 1 Code Domain Power BTS mode on page 315 6 1 3 2 General Results The General Results show the data of various measurements in numerical form for all channels Fig 6 2 General Results result display Results for all channels The General Results in the upper part of the table show results for all channels and over all slots of a specific set e Carrier Frequency Error absolute and relative Shows the frequency error referred to the center frequency of the R amp S FSV The absolute frequency error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSV and that of the device under test Differences of more than 4 0 kHz between transmitter and receiver frequency impair the synchronization of the Code Domain Power measurement If at all possi ble the transmitter and the receiver should be synchronized The unit of the frequency error is either Hz or ppm referred to the carrier frequency e Chip Rate Error Shows the chip rate error 1 2288 Mcps in ppm A large chip rate error results in symbol errors and therefore in possible synchro nization errors for Code Domain Power measurements This measurement result is also valid if the analyzer could not synchronize to the 1xEV DO signal e Trigger to Frame Reflects the timing
10. ences 289 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATiO eecccncnttntn tentent 290 SENSe Subsystem SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE c csscscsscsssssssesesseseescssescsssstsaesceaesteaeeseas 290 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VlDeo eccentric 291 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO eeccccntnttn tette tentent tents 291 ISENSeBANDuwthlBWIDOh VlDeo R Tlo ttt 291 IGENSeBANDuwithlBulIDghVilDeoTebk tette tenta 292 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth This command defines the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to chapter 6 4 6 Select ing the Appropriate Filter Type on page 181 Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Example BAND 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz Manual operation See Res BW on page 144 See Res BW Manual on page 162 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO State This command couples and decouples the resolution bandwidth to the span The automatic coupling adapts the resolution bandwidth to the current frequency span according to the relationship between frequency span and resolution bandwidth The 6 dB bandwidths 200 Hz 9 kHz and 120 kHz and the channel filters available are not set by the automatic coupling Use SENSe BANDwi
11. essent nnne DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet essen nenne 260 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition eeesssseeeeeeeeee nenne 261 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue esses nennen nennt ennemis 261 DISPlayEWINDBowsr TRAGCe t ERR KE 258 FORMatDEXPort DSEParalor 1 rotate tre rire ere ge RE nr ER crar dE 338 INiTiate nA CONME S c 339 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous Jl REI En GE 340 IN ciate lt i BETEN EE 340 INPUGAT TOMUAUON m ia 328 INPut ATTenuation AUTO VIN PUG OU Olne GE 329 IST bie Ver EIN 329 INPUU DIQIRANGEIAUT O DEE 331 INPUt DIQ RANGE COUPIO EE 331 INPut DIQ RANGe UPBer EE 331 INPUEDIG RANGE UPR OR EK 332 INPut DIQ SRATe INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO IEN INPUEEAT UTC EEN EEN 333 IST GARE KEE 334 esse Henr 334 leg Ee 334 INPut SELect INS TIRUMENENS EEG EE 263 INSTr tment SE Lect 2 ener tr e ier nr tp cer e n i a o a e P FER E Ea 263 MMEM STORES LIS Tied dete i reete reiecta ete rere teer pnr eb ted uU ES TAE EAT 340 MMEMON STORESN gt TRAC 341 QUTPUEIFESOURGE e 341 eU auamieeri C
12. x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode Values 592 Number of results values List of results 6 4 9 ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask The first part of the file lists information about the signal analyzer and the general setup For a detailed description refer to chapter 6 4 8 ASCII File Export Format on page 183 File contents Description RefType CPOWER TxBandwidth 9540000 Hz Filter State ON Alpha 0 22 PeaksPerRange 1 Values 4 reference range setup for details see Edit Reference Range on page 138 evaluation list information 0 22500000 9270000 1000000 2986455000 74 762840 270996094 10 576210021972656 45 762840270996094 PASS 1 9270000 4770000 100000 2991405000 100 1769561 7675781 35 990325927734375 1 490325927734375 PASS 3 4770000 9270000 100000 3005445000 100 17695617 675781 35 990325927734375 1 490325927734375 PASS 4 9270000 22500000 1000000 3018225000 74 7628402 70996094 10 576210021972656 45 762840270996094 PASS information about each peak range number start frequency stop frequency resolution bandwidth of range frequency of peak absolute power in dBm of peak relative power in dBc of peak related to the channel power distance to the limit line in dB positive value means above the limit gt
13. MP asm 6 4 13 Sweep points Reference level e Attenuator settings Limit values Via the sweep list you define the ranges and their settings For details on settings refer to Sweep List dialog box on page 134 For details on defining the limits masks see the base unit description Working with Lines in SEM The following rules apply to ranges e The minimum span of a range is 20 Hz The individual ranges must not overlap but need not directly follow one another The maximum number of ranges is 20 e Aminimum of three ranges is mandatory The reference range cannot be deleted it is marked in blue color The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency e The minimum span of the reference range is given by the current TX Bandwidth Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center fre quency In order to change the start frequency of the first range or the stop frequency of the last range select the appropriate span with the SPAN key If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz The first and last ranges are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated Symmetrical ranges You can easily define a sweep list with symmetrical range settings i e the ranges to the left and right of th
14. Full Span Sets the span to the full frequency range of the R amp S FSV specified in the data sheet This setting is useful for overview measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL on page 295 6 3 4 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Last Span Sets the span to the previous value With this function e g a fast change between overview measurement and detailed measurement is possible Remote command Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu for RF Measurements The following table shows all softkeys available in the Amplitude menu for RF meas urements except for Power vs Time measurements The softkeys in the Amplitude menu for CDA and Power vs Time measurements are described in chapter 6 2 4 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu for CDA Measurements on page 108 REN CV DE 156 ET 156 E Range Log 100 EE 157 L Rande Log S0 dB RII TENE 157 L Range Log 0 BB obest itte Uti topless Eta etsi abate sis 157 L Range Log isto MN m UM 157 ER 158 L Range L g Mantal seneo ran Edert 158 Fa aN EE 158 L Range ELM ERE UE S 158 Preamp ello MN 158 RF Atten Manual MechiAtt Matual acne redatto ene 159 RF Atten Auto Mech Att AUO EE 159 El Eer ONO ege gester T 159 El Atten Mode AutoiMan nennen ennt entries 160 Rer SVS ei EE 160 Ee Le DEE 160 ER 160 Mpu ACDC EE 161 Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc
15. KGS R O occupied bandwidth eem iem nentes 143 offset e UC Te 72 90 108 154 reference level sssssssssssss 73 91 109 160 Offset del e 75 93 113 Online help Ve leie EI ec aec et etcetera 8 Options FSV B25 ciis peata d HEN SR 109 159 333 RF Preamplifier B22 73 91 109 158 Overwrite mode eren nae eo tii canh nas 114 179 P Peak Code Domain Error GL M X 43 325 GM 62 Peak List K84 remote command see 314 Ph Noise Auto Peak Search remote control dires cene eic sas 217 Phase Error vs Chip 84 EEE 328 Pilot Channel C 76 PN Offset E BEE 83 K84 remote Command siririca irira 270 polarity external tigge ctore 75 92 112 trigger edge 79 92 112 Positive Peak detector ssssssssseee 178 power bandwidth percentage rre 143 Power Classes SEM ER power measurement MAC Em Power Measurement e M 66 Power Reference P M 104 Power vs Chip D M Ae 39 320 p ts 54 Power vs Symbol ER ees E ee 40 320 WRG E 55 Power vs Time K84 uk pre tHlgger rre tm rre rh tnt Preamble Channel K84 uico eec ual bes i ud 76 Preamplifier B22
16. limit fail pass 0 fail 21 6 4 10 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files The files for importing range settings are in XML format and therefore obey the rules of the XML standard Below the child nodes attributes and structure defined for the data import is described Build your own XML files according to these conventions because the R amp S FSV can only interpret XML files of a known structure For example files look inthe C Nr sNVinstrNsem std directory R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Spectrum Emission Mask Standard W CDMA 3GPP 39 43 dBm DL Tx Power 47 93 dBm Tx Bandwidth 3 840 MHz RBW 30 000 kHz Range Low Range Up RBW Frequency Power Abs Power Rel ALimit 0 MHz 8 000 MHz 1 000 MHz 98 GHz dBm E dBm 55 dBm 91 dBm dBm dBm dBm Fig 6 29 Example Spectrum emission mask standard file PowerClass 39 43 xml Be sure to follow the structure exactly as shown below or else the R amp S FSV is not able to interpret the XML file and error messages are shown on the screen Therefore we recommend you make a copy of an existing file see Save As Standard softkey and edit the copy of the file Alternatively edit the settings using the Spectrum Emission Mask softkey and the Sweep List dialog box and save the XML file with the Save As Standard softkey after wards This way no modifications have to be done in the XML file itself
17. 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 SWEEP POMS enii criin br retra terra Ree epis Sweep Points remote control EE Sweeptime Auto remote control is Synch Multicarrier K85 sess Threshold remote control ssssssss Trace 1234 5 6 remote control Trace Mode remote control ssse Trg Gate Polarity Pos Neg remote control 308 337 Trg Gate Source remote control Trigger Holdoff remote control Trigger Out Low High remote control Trigger Polarity one Unit remote control AAA Video BW Auto remote control Video BW Manual remote control E Video OUtp l or ette eee tene rr Weight ADJ On Off remote control Weight TX On Off remote control s Weighting Filter remote control X BBW zai tene Ner tette e reda X RBW remote control X Span remote control x Axis Range x Axis Range remote control XAxis Ref Level et etr tre dene x Axis Ref Level remote control ra X Demod BW I7 rente cr tt tds ysAxis Max Valle eee eti ret y Axis Max Value remote control i y Axis Mini Valie Ce rn tef treten rn y Unit EE y Unit Abs remote control Zero Span remote control siirinsesi 145
18. Further Information Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand LinkDirection Name Downlink Uplink Yes None ShortName DL UL No Reference Yes Power Method TX Channel Power Yes TX Channel Peak Power Reference lt string gt No Channel Table 6 13 Attributes and child nodes of the PowerClass element Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand StartPower Value lt power in dBm gt The start power must be equal Yes to the stop power of the previ ous power class The Start Power value of the first range is 200 Unit dBm Yes InclusiveFlag true Yes StopPower Value lt power in dBm gt The stop power must be equal Yes to the start power of the next power class The StopPower value of the last range is 200 Unit dBm InclusiveFlag false Yes DefaultLimitFailMode Absolute Relative Yes Absolute and Rel ative Absolute or Relative Table 6 14 Attributes and child nodes of the Range element normal ranges Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand Index 0 19 Inde XE s are continuous Yes and have to start with 0 Name lt string gt Name of the range Only if Referen ceChannel con tains a name and the range is the reference range Short lt string gt Short name of the range No Name ChannelType TX Adjacent Yes Further Information
19. weet DD Symbol Magnitude Error K84 85 remote 328 Symbol Phase Error K84 85 remote 328 Result Settings Kb neg aay eerste Eege 81 EE 101 Result Summary remote command E 206 Revision 0 A K84 remote command essesss 254 255 RF Slot K84 remote command ssssssss 254 RF Preamplifier B22 73 91 109 158 RE Slot Full Idle EE 150 RMS KEE RMS detector Roll off factor G4 och Edert SEENEN 84 Ebene aed e eed o rtt NS 97 RRC Filter RX Settings SONKEY M 120 S Sample E 178 SAMPIS MUMBO secci n ct ciui tio teeth xen ote endete 145 Sample rate Digital UO Interface remote control 332 333 Digital IQ creo itae seni cr tie engen ep e 118 Save Channel Table D 81 101 e 108 scaling EE 160 x and y axis signal statistic ssssss 145 SCPI Conformity information sissen aininn s 201 Select Channel Settings LEE 15 sensitivity APD measurement atn CCDF measurement SOL GOUDL iicet boc erret ditus K84 remote command Set Mean to Manual 00aaaae K84 remote command Set to Analyze K84 remote Command sss 271 settings Channel Table Settings K84 77 97 Result Settings K84 sess 81 Result Settings K85
20. EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 01 4 MHz_CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 01 4 MHz_CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 03 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW_03_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat A lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 05 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 05 0 MHz CFlowertGHz xml BW 10 0 MHz Cfhigher1GHz xml LTE Cat A lt 1GHz DL LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 10 0 MHz Cflower1GHz xml LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 15 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 15 0 MHz CFlowertGHz xml BW 20 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat A 1GHz DL LTE Cat A 1GHz DL Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 191 6 4 12 Further Information Path XML file name Displayed standard character istics EUTRA LTE DL CategoryA BW 20 0 MHz CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat A lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW_01_4_MHz__CFhigher1GHz xm LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW_01_4_MHz__CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 03 0 MHz CFhigheriGHz xm l LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 03 0 MHz CFlow
21. T T STATus subsystem SENSe AVERage n STATe Trace State This command turns averaging for a particular trace in a particular window on and off Suffix n Selects the measurement window Trace 1 6 Selects the trace Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example AVER OFF Switches off the average calculation for trace 1 AVER STAT3 ON Switches on the average calculation for trace 3 STATus subsystem STATUs QUESUoRSbleS deer ee KE 313 STATUSIQUEStiOonable S YNC TEVEN EE 313 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition This command reads the information on the error situation in the code domain power analysis Return values lt Result gt If the result is ON an error occurred Details can be obtained using STAT QUES SYNC EVEN RST OFF Example STAT QUES SYNC COND Usage Query only Mode WCDMA CDMA EVDO STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt This command reads the information on the error situation in the code domain power analysis The value can only be read once For details on the possible errors see chap ter 8 Status Reporting System of the 1xEV DO Analysis on page 345 Return values lt Result gt 01112 3 4 5 6to 14 15 Example STAT QUES SYNC EVEN Usage Query only TRACe Subsystem Mode CDMA EVDO 7 8 TRACe Subsystem The TRACe subsystem controls access to the instrument s internal trace memory TCA TAN uei tni eege 314 T
22. lt power ID gt power indication 0 1 3 0 inactive channel 1 active channel 3 Quasi inactive channel on the analyzed branch the channel is not occupied but an active channel exists on the other branch Power values of the individual codes are usually given in Hadamard order the con solidated channel power is returned in BitReverse order The Hadamard or BitRe verse order is important for sorting the channels and consolidation see SENSe CDPower ORDer on page 269 With Hadamard the individual codes are output in ascending order with their code power The number of codes which are output corresponds to spreading factor 16 TRACe DATA Results 7 9 3 With BitReverse codes which belong to a particular channel are adjacent to each other and are therefore output in the class of the channel together with the channel power The maximum number of codes or channels that are output cannot be higher than spreading factor 16 and decreases with each concentrated channel A programming example for a query for 2 channels is given in chapter 7 11 1 Retriev ing Trace Results on page 342 General Results Channel Results BTS Mode The command returns 30 values for the selected channel in the following order lt FERRor gt lt FERPpm gt lt CERRor gt lt TFRame gt lt RHOPilot gt lt RHO1 gt lt RHO2 gt lt PPILot gt lt PMAC gt lt PDATa gt lt PPReamble gt lt MACCuracy gt l
23. Result Settings This softkey opens the Result Settings dialog box to modify the following parameters Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Result Settings E E Common Settings Revision e SubType 0 1 C SubType 2 C SubType 3 Normalize Time Phase Est PN Offset Multi Carrier Settings Multi Carrier C On e otf Enhanced Algorithm C On Off Multi Carrier Filter C on ott Filter Type Lowpass RRC Roll Off Factor Cut Off Frequency Power Settings CDP Average On e off Code Power Absolute Relative Close Subtype Result Settings Specifies the characteristics of the signal you want to analyze In subtype 2 the number of active users increases That means that the spreading fac tor number of orthogonal codes doubles for channel types MAC and PREAMBLE The amount of returned trace data in the MAC and PREAMBLE channels is different for subtype 0 1 and 2 depending on the channel type and selected evaluation see chapter 6 4 3 Channel Type Characteristics on page 177 The R amp S FSV detects all the channels on a per slot basis Therefore the R amp S FSV recognizes changes in the channel configuration and modulation over the recorded slots In subtype 2 the following modulation types are added within some of the MAC chan nels ON OFF keying ACK on the branch OOKA I ON OFF keying ACK on the Q branch OOKA Q ON OFF keying NACK on the I
24. e All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded The minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm e The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation e The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet e Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges e Signal outputs are correctly connected and are not overloaded Connect the antenna output or TX output of the base mobile station to the RF input of the R amp S FSV Use a power attenuator exhibiting suitable attenuation The following values for external attenuation are recommended to ensure that the RF input of the analyzer is protected and the sensitivity of the unit is not reduced too much Maximum Power Recommended external attenuation 2 55 to 60 dBm 35 to 40 dB 2 50 to 55 dBm 30 to 35 dB 2 45 to 50 dBm 25 to 30 dB 2 40 to 45 dBm 20 to 25 dB 2 35 to 40 dBm 15 to 20 dB 2 30 to 35 dBm 10 to 15 dB 2 25 to 30 dBm 0 to 10 dB 2 20 to 25 dBm 0 to 5 dB 20 dBm 0 dB e For signal measurements at the output of two port networks connect the reference frequency of the signal source to the rear reference input of the analyzer e The R amp S FSV must be operated with an external frequency reference to ensure that the error limits of the 1xEV DO specification for frequency measurements on
25. ir cocto rte erp e c dert te pr etr EE CAL Culatesn gt EIMit lt k gt ESPecttum VAMUG a ioci ec ees CAL Culate nz OMitsk gt EA s CALCulate n LIMit k PVTime REFOrerce rete cette terere cyanea GALCulate n bIMitsko PVTime RESTOEO iiit inre asin bcne ee eee eee reb eee erga tr ve ceca p Les uus bead CAL Culate nzLlMitzkz PV fmebRVAl ue nennen enn nnn nennen etn TERNI KSET SEUES nnns nnn CAL Culate nz MAbker mz FUNGC on POWerREGuPDHZ enne 211 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESUIt essen eene 210 CAL Culate nz MAbkercmzEUNGCion ber GEI ect 212 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ZOOM CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRAC On sese ia AEAN Ei tts EN En SPE EKN Sms CALEGulate n PEAKsearch PSEarchiAU TQ cette tnter oei n c pe eec POM a CALCulatesn gt PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGILE irr ro ttn aetate pb rei cvi e EX HEUS 235 GALCulate sn PEAKsearch PSEarch PSFOW erro etin ttr entr terna cov kh keep KO Rep pn HN EEN 235 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges eese nennen enne 235 CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate eese ES 234 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe GALCulate lt n gt S TATisticSINSAMDICS ntn tnter eorr eren rennen ce en Re y CAL Culatesn gt S TA hee EE Eegen eege e c et eer lr ed D eir ace cea eoa Ee eese Ova Ec EEG CAL CGulate cnzGTATietcehRtGultTracez aspa T EEES EEn RENESSE
26. 228 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks ACbowert GTATel eene nennen nnne rn nn 229 CAL Culate nz LlMitks FAIL eese nennen nennen nnns nna rennes nnn ns 229 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper adjacent channel during adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power Note that the absolute limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value 200DBM to 200DBM limit for the lower and the lt UpperLimit gt upper adjacent channel RST 200DBM Example CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the adjacent channel when adjacent chan nel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power is performed Before the com mand the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement must be globally switched on using CA
27. Basically the file consists of three elements that can be defined e The BaseFormat element e The PowerClass element The Range element The BaseFormat element It carries information about basic settings In this element only the ReferencePower child node has any effects on the measurement itself The other attributes and child nodes are used to display information about the Spectrum Emission Mask Standard on the measurement screen The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 6 12 In the example above PowerClass 39 43 xml under C r_s instr sem_ std WCDMA 3GPP see figure 6 29 these attributes are defined as follows e Standard W CDMA 3GPP e LinkDirection DL e PowerClass 39 43 dBm The PowerClass element It is embedded in the BaseFormat element and contains settings information about the power classes Up to four different power classes can be defined For details refer to the Sweep List softkey Sweep List on page 134 and the corresponding parame ter description The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 6 13 p M A dqu i Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 185 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis The Range element This element is embedded in the PowerClass element It co
28. E 296 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel sss 296 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel BANDwidtblDWlDth ACHannel eene 297 SENSe Subsystem ISGENGe JPOWer AC Hanne BANDwidlDWID0 Al Termate channelz rererere 297 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel esses 298 ISGENZGe JPOWer ACHannel Fil TerAl Pa Al Temate channelz 298 IGENGe JPOWer ACHannel Pl TerAl Pa CHAhnel channelz rere rerrenne 298 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel sess 298 ISGENGe JPOWer ACHannel Piret STATetAl Temate channel renen renr eneee 299 IGENZGe JPOWer ACHannel Piret GTATetcCHAhNnel channelz 299 SENSe POWer ACHanneliMODE siiani a aan anana aa 299 IGENGe JPOWer ACHannelNAME ACHannel eene enne nnn nnne 200 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME AL Temate channelz eene 300 IGENGe JPOWer ACHannelNAME CHANnel channelz eene 300 SENSe POWer ACHanneliPRES t ccccc0sicictsin cian avatars acta 301 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel esses eene nnne 301 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE sese enn 302 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TSCHannel AUTO 302 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANUal essere 302 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel esses 303 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate channel sss 303 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel channel esses 304 SENSe PO
29. Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 278 SENSe Subsystem Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Value gt Refer to the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example ESP RANG2 RLEV 0 Sets the reference level of range 2 to 0 dBm Manual operation See Ref Level on page 135 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME lt SweepTime gt This command sets the sweep time for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 278 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters lt SweepTime gt Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet RST 0 27 s Example ESP RANG1 SWE TIME 1 Sets the sweep time for range 1 to 1 s Manual operation See Sweep Time on page 135 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO State This command activates or deactivates the automatic sweep time setting for the speci fied range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 278 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example ESP RANG3 SWE TIME AUTO OFF Deactivates the sweep time auto mode for range 3 Manual o
30. Res BW Manual remote control ReStart on Fall 2 rene enne Restore Default Tables K84 Restore Standard Files netten Restore STD Lines 21e NEEN Result Settings K84 Result Settings K85 RF Slot Full Idle 4 e itte Save K84 Save As Standard Save As Standard remote control 280 Save Evaluation List Save Evaluation List remote control Softkey SGAN E 145 Select Channel Settings K84 eeeeeseseeneresneeen 75 Select Trace onmes Select Trace remote control Set CP Reference nete eene Set Mean to Manual Set Standard remote control ir Settings Overview K84 Settings Overview K85 sss Show Peaks one er rre nen rece Show Peaks remote control e Single Meas remote control usssse Single Sweep remote control Sort K84 Span Manual Span Manual remote control Span RBW Auto 50 Se Span RBW Manual 2 entrer Spectrum Emission Mask eeessess Start Start remote control Start Frequency remote control 295 Stop remote control Stop Frequency remote control 295 Sweep OD dee error Re n 112 170 Sweep List remote control
31. Alpha 0 22 Two different power reference types are supported e Peak Power Measures the highest peak within the reference range e Channel Power Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Measures the channel power within the reference range integral bandwidth method If the Channel Power reference power type is activated the dialog box is exten ded to define additional settings e Tx Bandwidth Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power minimum span lt value lt span of reference range e RRC Filter State Activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter e RRC Filter Settings Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter This window is only available if the RRC fil ter is activated For further details refer to chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 192 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 288 SENSe ESPectrum BWID on page 277 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe on page 278 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa on page 278 Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a dialog box to modify the power class settings Power Classes x Used Power Classes All E Power Class PMin lt P lt PMax Power Class 1 iur Les dBm Sweep List Power Class 2 Lens dBm 40 0 dBm Sweep List Power Class 3 Ann dBm wr Sweep List Add Remove Used Power Classes Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Choose the power classes
32. CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow State This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram Suffix n Selects the measurement window Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC ESP PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares Manual operation See Show Peaks on page 139 CALCulate lt n gt THReshold lt Threshold gt This command defines a threshold value for the marker peak search A threshold line is automatically turned on Suffix lt n gt irrelevant 7 3 7 3 1 CONFigure Subsystem Parameters lt Threshold gt The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer RST STATe to OFF Example CALC THR 82DBM Sets the threshold value to 82 dBm CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all measurement windows Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Unit gt DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm CONFigure Subsystem The CONFigure subsystem contains commands for configuring the measurements CONFigure CDPower Subsystem K82 K84 This subsystem contains the commands for measurement selection and configuration Further setting commands for the spectrum emission mask measurement are descri bed in the CALCulate ESPectrum subsystem
33. DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe State Activates deactivates the window specified by the suffix lt n gt The other measurements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix lt n gt window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP WIND3 STAT ON Turns on a third measurement screen Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces WRITE cor responds to the Clr Write mode of manual operation The trace is switched off BLANK in manual operation with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe The number of measurements for AVERage MAXHold and MINHold is defined with the SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt or SENSe SWEep COUNt commands It should be noted that synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt trace Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe VIEW AVERage MAXHold MINHold BLANk RST WRITe for TRACe1 STATe OFF for TRACe2 3 4 5 6 For details on trace modes refer to chapter 6 4 5 Trace Mode Overview on page 179 Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Switche
34. Range Lin Unit Range Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range i e the horizontal lines are labeled in dB Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1 Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LDB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 334 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto softkey this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Int
35. Sets the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent channel to 33 kHz the alternate adjacent channel 1 to 66 kHz the alternate adjacent channel 2 to 99 kHz and so on Manual operation See Spacing on page 127 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate lt channel gt lt Spacing gt This command defines the spacing between the alternate adjacent channels and the TX channel ALT1 ALT2 A modification of a higher adjacent channel spacing cau ses a change by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value in all higher adjacent channel spacings while the lower adjacent channel spacings remain unchanged Suffix lt channel gt 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters lt Spacing gt 100 Hz to 20 GHz RST 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 Example POW ACH SPAC ALT1 100 kHz Sets the spacing between TX channel and alternate adjacent channel 1 ALT 1 from 40 kHz to 100 kHz In consequence the spacing between the TX channel and all higher alternate adja cent channels is increased by the factor 100 40 2 5 ALT2 150 kHz ALT3 200 kHz ALTA 250 kHz Manual operation See Spacing on page 127 SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel lt channel gt lt Spacing gt This command defines the channel spacing for the carrier signals Suffix lt channel gt 1 11 the TX channel Parameters lt Spacing gt 14 kHz to 20 GHz RST 20 kHz Example POW ACH SPAC CHAN 2
36. Trace Mode Overview The traces can be activated individually for a measurement or frozen after completion of a measurement Traces that are not activate are hidden Each time the trace mode is changed the selected trace memory is cleared The R amp S FSV offers 6 different trace modes Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting All available detectors can be selected Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 257 Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to Positive Peak This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of enve lope Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 179 Further Information This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 257 Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to Negative Peak This mode
37. Trigger Source External Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel An edit dialog box is displayed to define the external trigger level For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 337 Trigger Polarity Sets the polarity of the trigger source 6 2 7 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default set ting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode This softkey is available for code domain measurements Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restarted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a O to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 337 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 308 Trigger Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for s
38. 0 01 Example BAND RAT 0 01 Manual operation See Span RBW Manual on page 166 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE lt FilterT ype gt This command selects the type of resolution filter For detailed information on filters see chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 181 and chapter 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 181 When changing the filter type the next larger filter bandwidth is selected if the same filter bandwidth is not available for the new filter type 5 Pole filters are not available when using the sweep type FFT SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt FilterType gt NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters P5 5 Pole filters RST NORMal Example BAND TYPE NORM Manual operation See Filter Type on page 167 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo Bandwidth This command defines the video bandwidth The available video bandwidths are speci fied in the data sheet Parameters Bandwidth refer to data sheet RST AUTO is set to ON Example BAND VID 10 kHz Manual operation See Video BW Manual on page 162 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO State This command couples and decouples the VBW to the RBW Use SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio to define the ratio VBW RBW Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example BAND VID AUTO OFF Manual operation See Video BW Manual
39. 6 19 Channel Table result display The following channel settings are displayed Column Description Channel Type Type of channel Walsh Ch SF Number of the channel spreading code 0 to spreading factor 1 including the spreading factor of the channel in Chan SF notation SymRate ksps Symbol rate with which the channel is transmitted 76 8 ksps to 307 2 ksps Mod Modulation of the channel Map Mapping of the channel I or Q branch Status Status display Unassigned codes are identified as inactive channels Power dBm Specifies the absolute power of the channel Power dB Specifies the relative power of the channel referred to the PICH or the total power of signal T Offs ns Timing offset P Offs mrad Phase offset Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR CTABle see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 13 Channel Table Trace MS mode on page 323 Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 57 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EEE EEE EE EEE SS rr EE EEE SS a 6 1 4 7 6 1 4 8 Composite Data EVM This result display determines the error vector magnitude EVM over the special com posite data channel The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power to the po
40. 6 dB MIL Std 6 dB Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available only with option R amp S FSV K54 e Channel e RRC e 5 Pole not available for sweep type FFT For detailed information on filters see chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 181 and chapter 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 181 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution TYPE on page 290 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Sweep menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description COD mugs S WEOBD EE 168 SINJI Eig o ena 168 Continue E E 168 Sweeptime Manual 168 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements SVS UII EE 169 WEED TYPO t eee 169 a EE 169 CEET 170 2 170 L EFT Filter Mode CNET T 170 geed 170 EE Lu EE 170 Sweep COUN iissa 170 SWEEP POMS EE 171 Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value see the Sweep Cou
41. AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 329 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off For details on con nectors refer to the R amp S FSV Quick Start Guide Front and Rear Panel chapter Remote command DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce on page 338 Signal Source Opens a dialog box to select the signal source For Digital Baseband UO the source can also be configured here Input Path Signal Source Defines whether the RF Radio Frequency or the Digital IQ input path is used for measurements Digital IQ is only available if option R amp S FSV B17 R amp S Digital UO Interface is installed Note Note that the input path defines the characteristics of the signal which differ sig nificantly between the RF input and digital input Remote command INPut SELect on page 335 Connected Device Signal Source Displays the name of the device connected to the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 to provide Digital IQ input The device name cannot be changed here The device name is unknown Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 329 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Input Sample Rate Signal Source Defines the sample rate of the digital UO signal
42. AU O AUO Freg EE Auto Level Auto Scale Once hr E BB Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control 335 EE ctu titer edt et fece cron 180 COMET ies 72 90 107 152 Center remote control AAA 293 GF Stepsize eene eere Epor enn 152 Clear Write 114 179 Close Sweep List ertet 137 Cont Meas remote control ssssssse 339 Continue Single Sweep isisisi 111 168 Continuous Sweep ve Continuous Sweep remote control 339 Decim Sep remote control ssssss 338 DiglCoff eigene eme 120 EL Atten remote control ssss 934 EL Atten Mode Auto Man remote control nid El Atteri On Off 2 c ie im 110 159 EX IQ BOX EET ebe EFT Filter Mode nee eoe ene 165 170 Frequency Offset remote control 294 Frontend Settings 12 89 lU LEE 155 IF Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control 936 IF Power Retrigger Hysteresis remote control 336 Inp E AC DG ii inerte 111 117 161 171 Input AC DC remote Control IQ Capture Settings S Marker 1 to 4 remote control Marker to Trace remote control Max Hold EE Mech Atten Auto sss E Mech Atten Auto remote control Mech Atten Ma
43. After a preset the sweep list contains a set of default ranges and parameters For each range you can change the parameters listed below To insert or delete ranges use the Insert Before Range Insert After Range Delete Range softkeys The measurement results are not updated during editing but on closing the dialog box Edit Sweep List Close Sweep List softkey see Close Sweep List on page 137 The changes of the sweep list are only kept until you load another parameter set by pressing PRESET or by loading an XML file If you want a parameter set to be availa ble permanently create an XML file for this configuration for details refer to chap ter 6 4 10 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files on page 184 If you load one of the provided XML files Load Standard softkey see Load Stand ard on page 143 the sweep list contains ranges and parameters according to the selected standard For further details refer also to chapter 6 4 11 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement on page 190 Note If you edit the sweep list always follow the rules and consider the limitations described in chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 192 Range Start Range Stop Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the start frequency stop frequency of the selected range Follow the rules descri bed in chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 1
44. All detectors work in parallel in the background which means that the measurement speed is independent of the detector combination used for different traces Number of measured values During a frequency sweep the R amp S FSV increments the first local oscillator in steps that are smaller than approximately 1 10 of the bandwidth This ensures that the oscil lator step speed is conform to the hardware settling times and does not affect the pre cision of the measured power The number of measured values taken during a sweep is independent of the number of oscillator steps It is always selected as a multiple or a fraction of 691 default num ber of trace points displayed on the screen Choosing less then 691 measured values e g 125 or 251 will lead to an interpolated measurement curve choosing more than 691 points e g 1001 2001 will result in several measured values being overlaid at the same frequency position RMS detector and VBW If the RMS detector is selected the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs However the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to ach ieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector Normally if the RMS detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves
45. FUNCtion ZOOM State If marker zoom is activated the number of channels displayed on the screen in code domain power and code domain error power result diagram is reduced to 64 The currently selected marker defines the center of the displayed range Suffix n irrelevant m 1 4 marker number Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC ZOOM ON Mode WCDMA 7 2 3 CALCulate LIMit PVTime Subsystem The CALCulate LIMit PVTime subsystem defines the limit check for power vs time measurement CALCulate Subsystem CAL Culate n LIMitekPVTime iREFSFence 2 cr ezuucix zn eco au rianda oaa deni aha padri eine 214 CALCulate n LIMit k PVTime RESTOore esee eene nnne nnn nnn nnns 214 CALCulate n LIMit k PVTime RVALuUe eeeeeeeenennnnnnnne nnne nnne nnne nnne nnn nnn na 215 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence Mode This command sets the reference value The standard asks for the sequence to first measure the FULL slot with the limit line relative to the mean power of the averaged time response Therefore the parameter AUTO in a FULL slot measurement should be selected In this mode the mean power is calculated and the limit lines are relative to that mean power value This value should be used also as the reference for the IDLE slot measurement With the parameter ONCE the current mean power value of the averaged time response is used to set as
46. L Channel Bandwidth span gt D 144 E Adjust Ref Evi endi I sich cen iod calc c ed eai a Dad 144 L EE c redi idv ER Ee ERE RA TI Fa ub bcn DOR Ped Du 144 GC DF I 144 B 1 ces Nat tah eeng 144 BE 14 505 TNR ITEM 145 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements GT ena eee RNa Teen RT NER eA oe 145 LAs Ref Levo NNUS 145 BE EE 145 L Range Log Q0 sais etic Eed 145 L Range Log BO AB EENS 146 L Range Log EE 146 Range kog EE enden i in E E 146 L Range EE 146 L Range Log Manuel 147 eelere eet Eege 147 GETT E 147 L y Axis Max WalUG c ccccecteccsssetessscsssecnsecessessteccssscssssacseseesencecsenas 147 Lists Min OB etii acne Gama tad 147 E SEHE RS TNR oe eua pisi EEN 148 L Default EE 148 L Adjust Seg Sieen a E 148 L Gated Trigger COMIN inci sie cuscasateensinveseccuint saaconssasenbivacanisniceiioctisesiaawdaade 148 B s LLC E 148 ITE e EE 149 Power VS Hi EE 149 Ke GL o NIORT 150 L RF Slot LE 150 E Se POUND EE 150 L Reference Mean Wi co ccocsensccccacctecsnsincanccscbasdeidceadectotensinieeetssVisteusrwendedtone 150 L Reference Manual 150 L Set Mean to Manag EE 150 L seran on Fal ersan en ie aenea ase us tenu ie in tie tad 151 Hl c 1 p08 D MAE 151 lh ico D o Em 151 E Ae RATED aei Or petu assente rs Modena 151 Code Domain Analyzer Starts the Code Domain Analyzer and opens the Code Domain Analyzer menu Select the desired result display via this me
47. MAC 6 PREAMBLE 5 DATA 4 spreading factor 2 de class lt CodeNumber gt 0 spreading factor 1 lt Modulation gt Modulation type including mapping 0 BPSK I 1 BPSK Q 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM Modulation types QPSK 8 PSK 16 QAM have complex values lt Reserved1 gt Always 0 reserved lt Reserved2 gt Always 0 reserved lt Status gt 0 inactive 1 active Can be used in a setting command to disable a channel tempo rarily lt CDPRelative gt Power value in dB Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Selects channel table for editing If a channel table with this name does not exist a new channel table is created CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 10 5 3 4 0 0 1 0 0 Defines a table with the following channels PICH 0 64 and data channel with RC4 Walsh code 3 32 Mode EVDO BTS Manual operation See Add Channel on page 80 CONFigure Subsystem CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Mapping gt lt Activity gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Status gt lt Reserved2 gt This command defines a channel table The following description applies to EVDO MS mode K85 only For BTS mode see CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 245 Before using this command you must set the name of the channel table using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command For a detailed description of the parameters refer to New Copy Edit on page 78 Paramet
48. ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP PVT BURS ON Activates the automatic alignment Mode EVDO Manual operation See Burst Fit On Off on page 150 CONFigure Subsystem CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime FREStart lt State gt If switched on this command evaluates the limit line over all results at the end of a sin gle sweep The sweep is restarted if this result is FAILED Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP PVT FRES ON Restarts a single sweep if the result evaluation is failed Mode EVDO Manual operation See Restart on Fail on page 151 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST STATe lt State gt With this command the list evaluation which is off by default for backwards compatibil ity reasons can be turned on Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP PVT LIST STATe ON Mode EVDO CONFigure C DPower BTS PVTime LIST RESult Queries the list evaluation results The results are a comma separated list containing the following values for each list range Return values lt RangeNo gt consecutive number of list range lt StartTime gt Start time of the individual list range lt StopTime gt Stop time of the individual list range lt AverageDBM gt Average power level in list range in dBm lt AverageDB gt Average power level in list range in dB lt MaxDBM gt Maximum power level in list range in dBm lt MaxDB gt Maximum power level in list range in dB lt MinD
49. POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANual esses rennen 302 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate lt channel gt 303 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel channel essent nennen 304 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel enarrat nnt nnne E nE 303 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COU NL appo t rtp rer nt et ren rne 304 SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth 2 eh e enr rentrer retta trier eren 304 SENSE Siga 304 SENSe POWer NCORT6GCHOR rero treo rne enne rere nit rr ce e e aed e Lee D Pes 305 SENSe POWer TRACe SENSE SWEEP COUN E SENSe SWEep EGA Te nr tent e tne regne ai de re E Ren pa SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLBofT nro rere tre erm hn n t perte e Perrin SENSE SWEEP ENK E EE SENSe SWEep EGATe POkLatrily rper ENEE rt rene enne rei re di ER EE Re pa SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURCGS E SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt PERiod SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STOP lt range gt e eee cece eeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeaeeeaeeseaeessaeseaeeseaeesseessnaeeaees 310 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACG lt k gt COMME ii iccccccescesecesceesttessacesscosecacsccsastesssneseetueceesatsnsetndsbecsecanstenecteads 308 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRAGexk S TARt range innen ern terne pair erae teta tta pro digas ae 309 SENSe SWEep EG
50. PRBS Test Descewing Passed Digital IQ Output Connected Device ExBox Serial Number 100064 Port IQ IN Max Digital Output Transfer Rate 110 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS Test Descewing Done Close For details see Interface Status Information in Instrument Functions R amp S Digital 1 Q Interface Option R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 329 EXIQ Opens a configuration dialog box for an optionally connected R amp S EX IQ BOX and a submenu to access the main settings quickly Note The EX IQ Box functionality is not supported for R amp S FSV models 1321 3008Kxx If the optional R amp S DiglConf software is installed the submenu consists only of one key to access the software Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the R amp S Digi tal UO Interface connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 10 or higher is required For typical applications of the R amp S EX IQ BOX see also the description of the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 in the base unit manual For details on configuration see the R amp SGEx UO Box External Signal Interface Mod ule Manual For details on installation and operation of the R amp S DiglConf software see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Man ual TX Settings EXIQ O
51. PREAM BLE or MAC Result Summary MS Mode The command returns 25 values in the following order lt SLOT gt lt PTOTal gt lt PPICh gt lt PRRI gt lt RHO gt lt MACCuracy gt lt PCDerror gt lt ACTive gt lt FERRor gt lt FERPpm gt lt DRPich gt lt RHOVerall gt lt TFRame gt lt CERRor gt lt IQOFfset gt lt IQIMbalance gt lt SRATe gt lt CHANnel gt lt SFACtor gt lt TOFFset gt lt POFFset gt lt CDPRelative gt lt CDPabsolute gt lt EVMRms gt lt EVMPeak gt TRACe DATA Results Value Description Range Unit Global results of selected half slot lt SLOT gt Half slot number lt PTOTal gt Total power dBm lt PPICh gt Pilot power dBm lt PRRI gt RRI power dBm If the RRI is not active its displayed PRRI value is 200 dBm In this case the DRPich is set to 200 dB lt RHO gt RHO value for the selected channel type slot lt MACCuracy gt Composite EVM lt PCDerror gt Peak Code Domain error dB IQOFfset IQ offset 96 lt IQIMbalance gt IQ imbalance Global results of all half slots lt FERRor gt Frequency error Hz lt FERPpm gt Frequency error ppm lt DRPich gt Delta RRI PICH dB lt CERRor gt Chip rate error ppm lt TFRame gt Trigger to frame Note The Trigger to Frame value TFRame supplies a 9 if the trig ger is at FREE RUN The Timing Phase Offset values TOFF set POFFset supply a 9
52. Sets the filter type for this range For details on filters see also chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 181 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILTer TYPE on page 281 RBW Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the RBW value for this range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range BANDwidth RESolution on page 280 VBW Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the VBW value for this range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDeo on page 280 Sweep Time Mode Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates the auto mode for the sweep time Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO on page 287 Sweep Time Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the sweep time value for the range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME on page 287 Ref Level Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the reference level for the range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range RLEVel on page 286 RF Att Mode Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates the auto mode for RF attenuation Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut AT
53. The frequency phase synchronization always requires a pilot channel Pilot or Auxiliary Pilot Synchronization is usually only successful if both frame and frequency phase synchronization were performed correctly Auto The following modes are tried sequentially until synchronization was successful If none of the methods was successful a failed synchroni zation is reported If the result of the correlation methods sync on Pilot and Auxiliary Pilot becomes increasingly worse due to bad power conditions the non data aided synchronization works opti mally and synchronization should be successful Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Pilot For frame synchronization this method uses the correlation charac teristic of the known pilot channel i e pilot channel sequence spreading code including scrambling sequence The correlation must be calculated for all hypotheses of the scrambling code 32768 for external triggers only 2048 in order to get the correct peak at the position where the frame begins This correlation method may fail if the power of the underlying pilot channel is too low compared to the total power In this case the expected correlation peak is hidden by the upcoming auto correlation noise of the bad hypothesis The frequency phase synchronization also takes advantage of the known linear phase of the pilot channel Auxiliary Pilot Similar to synchronization on pilot but with the different known se
54. The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distor tion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured cor rectly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 260 Range Opens a submenu to define the display range of the level axis This softkey and its submenu are available for RF measurements except for Power vs Time measurements Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Range Log 100 dB Range Sets the level display range to 100 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 100DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 258 Range Log 50 dB Range Sets the level display range to 50 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 50DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 258 Range Log 10 dB Range Sets the level display range to 10 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 10DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y S
55. Yes on page 135 Time time in sec Sweep Time on page 135 No Amplitude No 6 4 11 Further Information Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand ReferenceLevel Value lt power in dBm gt Ref Level on page 135 Yes if the Refer enceLevel child node is used Unit dBm Defines dBm as unit Yes if the Refer enceLevel node is used RFAttenuation Mode Manual Auto RF Att Mode on page 135 Yes if the Refer enceLevel child node is used Preamplifier ON OFF Preamp on page 136 Yes Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement You can change the settings manually or via XML files The XML files offer a quick way to change the configuration A set of ready made XML files for different standards is already provided For details see table 6 15 You can also create and use your own XML files for details see chapter 6 4 10 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files on page 184 All XML files are stored under C Nr sNinstrNsem std Use the Load Standard softkey for quick access to the available XML files see Load Standard on page 143 Table 6 15 Provided XML files Path XML file name Displayed standard character istics cdma2000 DL defaultO xml CDMA2000 BCO DL default1 xml CDMA2000 BC1 DL cdma2000 UL defaultO xml CDMA2000 BCO UL default1 xml CDMA2000 BC1 UL WCDMA 3GPP DL PowerClass
56. adjacent channel leakage ratio V M N Adjust Ref Level K84 remote command sse 267 Amplitude menu C M 108 AS CIM Trace expolt oie rn ree ie ihr bie ebd 183 attenuation Option E 110 160 Attenuation option B25 ce oe o adi 110 159 Automatic Manual e M Option B25 E 109 159 Auto level EIERE 116 Auto Peak detector 178 AULO S Cale ene 108 Auto Set menu d 9n 115 Auxiliary pilot Synchronization Average detector Average trace mode band Bet c tc ci veta ERE vh evo caua 124 Bandwidth MOMs eT T 161 o i To ifo oper 162 e EE 162 Bitstream Eege dE NEEN 59 Blank trace mode 180 B rst Rit 2i pes 2150 K84 remote Command sss 252 C Cancel Table GL 81 101 Capture Leigh irr tne 74 92 K84 remote Command sassen ines 266 CODE e eEe 144 n 68 CDP Average K845i enuntiatio K84 remote command KGS s drain ries Center frequency eere Ricip SANAS CF Stepsize Cj cM 107 channel bandwidth number spacing Channel Bitstream C 43 325 K85 And E ee traer e V Eed s IRA 61 channel results C D 38 317 318 Channel Search
57. box This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 337 Trigger Source External IQ Capture Settings Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel An edit dialog box is displayed to define the external trigger level For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 337 Trigger Polarity IQ Capture Settings Sets the polarity of the trigger source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default set ting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode This softkey is available for code domain measurements Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restarted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a O to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 337 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 308 Trigger Offset IQ Capture Settings Opens an edit di
58. if timing and phase measurement is disabled refer to CDP TPM or the number of active channels is higher than 50 Channel results lt SRATe gt Symbol rate ksps lt CHANnel gt Channel number lt SFACtor gt Spreading factor of the channel lt TOFFset gt If the evaluation of the timing and phase offset is not active S see SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 274 or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the value 9 is returned For inactive channels the value 9 is returned lt POFFset gt If the evaluation of the timing and phase offset is not active see SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 274 or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the value 9 is returned For inactive channels the value 9 is returned lt CDPRelative gt relative level of the channel referenced to total power in the co channel type dB 7 9 5 7 9 6 7 9 7 7 9 8 TRACe DATA Results Value Description Range Unit lt CDPAbsolute gt absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel 9 slot dBm lt EVMRms gt Error vector magnitude rms lt EVMPeak gt Error vector magnitude peak Power vs Chip BTS Mode The command returns one value for each chip lt level value in dBm gt The number of results that are displayed is always 2048 one power level for each chip Power vs Halfslot MS Mode The command returns one value pair for each half slot lt half slot number gt lt level va
59. level The measurement evaluates a single code over a single slot You can select a specific code and slot with the Select softkey Symbol Constellation IQ 1 Clrw p S Fig 6 11 Symbol Constellation result display E Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 45 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis The R amp S FSV K84 supports BPSK QPSK 8PSK and 16QAM modulation schemes The modulation scheme itself depends on the channel type Refer to chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 176 for further information In case of BPSK the constellation points are located on the x axis For the QPSK and 16QAM schemes the constellation points are located on neither axis Unassigned codes can be measured but the result is meaningless since these do not contain data Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB CONSt see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 20 Symbol Constellation on page 327 6 1 3 12 EVM vs Symbol This result display shows the EVM on symbol level The x axis represents the symbols and the y axis shows the EVM in The number of symbols depends on the channel type and is in the range from 2 to 100 Refer to chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 176 for further information The meas
60. level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 163 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF or Power vs Time measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 311 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 311 Sweeptime Auto Couples the sweep time to the span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW not available for zero span If you change the span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth the sweep time is automatically adjusted The R amp S FSV always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without falsifying the signal The maximum level error is 0 1 dB compared to using a longer sweep time This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 311 Sweep Type Opens a submenu to define the sweep type This softkey is available for measuring the Signal Power the Adjacent Channel Power and the Occupied Bandwidth This function is not available in IQ Analyzer mode or for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 In frequency
61. on page 72 Channel Channel with spreading factor Att Attenuation Measurements and Result Displays Label Description Half Slot Number of analyzed half slot and total number of half slots Code Power Relative or absolute power values Channel Type BTS mode Channel type of the selected channel Possible values are Pilot Mac only Data and Preamble Overview of all measurement settings You can easily display an overview of all measurement settings using the Settings Overview softkey In addition to the information in the diagram header each screen title contains dia gram specific trace information Screen focus One of the screens has a blue frame indicating the focus The screen focus can be changed just like in the base system The settings for trace statistics and markers can only be changed for the focussed screen Furthermore the focussed screen can be set to full screen for details see the R amp S FSV Quick Start Guide Configuring the Display 1 Select the Display Config softkey in the Code Domain Analyzer menu 2 Select the tab for the screen you want to configure A D 3 Select the Screen X active option to display the selected screen Tip SCPI command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe on page 257 4 Select the required result diagram to be displayed in the selected screen Tip SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 204 5 Press Close To select a
62. specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 278 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example ESP RANG2 INP ATT AUTO OFF Deactivates the RF attenuation auto mode for range 2 SENSe Subsystem Manual operation See RF Att Mode on page 135 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN STATe State This command switches the preamplifier on or off for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 278 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example ESP RANG3 INP GAIN STATe ON Switches the preamplifier for range 3 on or off Manual operation See Preamp on page 136 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INSert Mode This command inserts a new range before or after the specified range The range num bers are updated accordingly Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Mode AFTer BEFore Example ESP RANG3 INS BEF Inserts a new range before range 3 ESP RANG1 INS AFT Inserts a new range after range 1 Manual operation See Insert before Range on page 137 See Insert after Range on page 137 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STARt Level This command sets an absolute limit
63. test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file Manual operation See Save Evaluation List on page 139 See ASCII File Export on page 140 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe lt Trace gt lt FileName gt This command stores the selected trace in the specified window in a file with ASCII for mat The file format is described in chapter 6 4 8 ASCII File Export Format on page 183 The decimal separator decimal point or comma for floating point numerals contained in the file is defined with the FORMat DEXPort DSEParator command see FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 338 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Trace gt 1to6 selected measurement trace lt FileName gt DOS file name The file name includes indication of the path and the drive name Indication of the path complies with DOS conventions Example MMEM STOR TRAC 3 TEST ASC Stores trace 3 in the file TEST ASC OUTPut IF SOURce Source This command selects the source of the IF output Parameters lt Source gt IF intermediate frequency output viDeo video output 200 mV RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF output connector Manual operation See Video Output on page 171 OUTPut TRIGger lt PortLevel gt This command selects level of the Trigger Out port Th
64. the offset between the trigger event and and the start of the slot is shown 4 4 1 Adjusting the Trigger Offset The delay between the trigger event and the start of the slot can be compensated for by adjusting the trigger offset e Set an external trigger source and the trigger offset Open the IQ Capture dialog box Set the Trigger Source option to External Set the Trigger Offset to 700us to compensate analog delays of the trigger event In the two screens the following results are displayed Screen A shows the the same as above In screen B the result summary is displayed In the Trigger to Frame result the offset between the trigger event and the start of the slot has been adjusted 4 5 Measuring the Composite EVM The Error Vector Magnitude EVM describes the quality of the measured signal com pared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSV In the I Q plane the error vector represents the ratio of the measured signal to the ideal signal on symbol level The error vector is equal to the square root of the ratio of the measured signal to the reference signal The result is given in 96 In the Composite EVM measurement the error is averaged over all channels by means of the root mean square for a given slot The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time On screen the results are shown in a dia gram in which the x axis represents the examined slots and the y ax
65. these standards are meant In addition to the measurements called for by the 1xEV DO standard in the code domain the 1xEV DO Analysis options feature measurements in the spectral range such as channel power adjacent channel power occupied bandwidth and spectrum emission mask with predefined settings To open the 1xEV DO settings menu e If the 1xEV DO Analysis mode is not the active measurement mode press the MODE key and select the 1xEV DO option e If the 1xEV DO Analysis mode is already active press the HOME key The 1xEV DO menu is identical to the Measurement menu It contains the following commands for the different measurement types Code Domain Analyzer on page 123 Power on page 123 Ch Power ACLR on page 124 Spectrum Emission Mask on page 134 Occupied Bandwidth on page 143 CCDF on page 144 Power vs Time on page 149 For details on the measurement types see chapter 6 1 Measurements and Result Displays on page 32 Measurements and Result Displays e Measurements and Result Displays eese tette nnne thea 32 e Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements 69 e Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements 121 e Buptaeribfortuei scien aeree terree nne a tee peek teen tete bee quu 172 6 1 Measurements and Result Displays The 1xEV DO Analysis options provide various measurement types and result dis plays All measurements and resu
66. 1 SENSe Subsystem SENSe CDPower TPMeas lt State gt This command actives or deactivates the timing and phase offset evaluation of the channels to the pilot If the value is OFF or if more than 50 channels are active the command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 206 returns a value of 9 for the timing and phase offset as the result If the value is ON the timing and phase offsets are calculated and returned The results are queried using the TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 314 command and the CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 206 command Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP TPM ON Activate timing and phase offset Mode EVDO Manual operation See Time Phase Est on page 83 See Time Phase Estimation on page 103 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual SENSe ADJust Subsystemi 2 3rd terere DESEN Eb A a FE cud oe ANVERS 274 SENSe ESPectrum Subsystem sse 277 SENSe BANDwidth eubevstem enne enne nen 288 SENSe FREQuency SUBSYSTEM AA 292 SENSe POWer subsystem uid Lage ban li dee lise CeReE AAS 295 SENSS SWEep Subsystems eneen 1 223137 o TRE ee ENEE EE 306 Other Commands in the SENSe Subsystem sss 312 SENSe ADJust Subsystem GENSeIADJust ALL 275 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer sse 275 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYST
67. 261 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 1DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 258 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Range Log Manual x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to define the display range of a logarithmic level axis man ually Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 Display range DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 258 Range Linear x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Selects linear scaling for the level axis in The grid is divided into decadal sections Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1 This is the default set ting for linear scaling Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 Range Lin Unit x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range i e the horizontal lines are labeled in dB Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1 Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LDB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 y Axis Max Value Scaling CCDF Opens an
68. 31 39 xml W CDMA 3GPP 31 39 dBm DL PowerClass 39 43 xml W CDMA 3GPP 39 43 dBm DL PowerClass 43 INF xml W CDMA 3GPP 43 INF dBm DL PowerClass_negINF_31 xml W CDMA 3GPP INF 31 dBm DL WIBRO DL PowerClass 29 40 xml WiBro TTA 29 40 dBm DL PowerClass 40 INF xml WiBro TTA 40 INF dBm DL PowerClass_negINF_29 xml WiBro TTA INF 29 dBm DL WIBRO UL PowerClass 23 INF xml WiBro TTA 23 INF dBm UL PowerClass neglNF 23 xml WiBro TTA 23 INF dBm UL WIMAX DL ETSI MHz 1 75 System_Type_E xml WIMAX System Type E DL MHz 2 00 MHz 3 5 MHz 7 00 MHz 14 00 MHz 28 MHz R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Path XML file name Displayed standard character istics System_Type_F xml WIMAX System Type F DL System_Type_G xml WIMAX System Type G DL WIMAX DL IEEE 10MHz xml WIMAX 10MHz DL 20MHz xml WIMAX 20MHz DL WIMAX UL ETSI MHz 1 75 MHz 2 00 MHz 3 5 MHz 7 00 MHz 14 00 MHz 28 MHz System_Type_E xml WIMAX System Type E UL System_Type_F xml WIMAX System Type F UL System_Type_G xml WIMAX System Type G UL WIMAX UL IEEE 10MHz xml WIMAX 10MHz UL 20MHz xml WIMAX 20MHz UL WLAN 802_11_TURBO ETSI xml IEEE 802 11 IEEE xml IEEE 802 11 WLANY802 11a ETSI xml IEEE 802 11a IEEE xml IEEE 802 11a WLANY802 11b IEEE xml IEEE 802 11b WLANY802 11j 10MHz ETSI xml IEEE 802 11j IEEE xml IEEE 802 11j WLANY802 11j 20MHz ETSI xml IEEE 802 1 1j IEEE xml IEEE 802 1 1j
69. 40 dBm Manual operation See PMin PMax on page 142 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum RESTore This command restores the predefined limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement All modifications made to the predefined limit lines are lost and the fac tory set values are restored Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt k gt irrelevant Example CALC LIM ESP REST Resets the limit lines for the Spectrum Emission Mask to the default setting CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum VALue lt Power gt This command activates the manual limit line selection and specifies the expected power as a value Depending on the entered value one of the predefined limit lines is selected 7 2 4 4 CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt Power gt 33 28 0 33 P233 28 28 lt P lt 33 0 P lt 28 RST 0 Example CALC LIM ESP VAL 33 Activates manual selection of the limit line and selects the limit line for P 33 CALCulate PSE subsystem CALOCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate sessi 234 CAL Culate lt n PEAKsearch PSEAarchi AUTO vei aed hos aen eov aen a 234 CALOCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin eise 235 CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch PSHOW ener nennen 235 CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch GUlDbanges sese 235 CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch IMMediate
70. 63 Fig 6 14 Code Domain Power result display The standard requires an averaged code domain analysis Select CDP Average on page 85 and the R amp S FSV performs a measurement over all slots and averages the results For the Data and Preamble channels the standard assumes that in the slots preambles of different lengths do not occur Active and inactive channels are defined via Inactive Channel Threshold on page 78 The power values of the assigned and unassigned codes are displayed in different colors Yellow assigned code e Cyan unassigned code Set the mapping with Mapping Type on page 76 The Mapping Auto function cau ses complex mapping to be analyzed separately for the Data channel type and map ping for the or Q branch to be analyzed separately for the other channel types In the latter case the UO selection can be set by means of Invert Q on page 74 e MP P M p l Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 51 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Another option for obtaining an overview of the CDP is to enable complex mapping The code domain power is then constantly displayed as a complex analysis on screen A for the selected channel type In case of an analysis of the Data channel the results of complex analysis are approximately 3 dB higher than t
71. C On e off Adjust Ref Level Center Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 fcenter fmax SPAN pin 2 Span 0 0 Hz lt foenter s fmax fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet If the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is active center frequencies above 7 GHz are not available Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 293 Frequency Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 294 Ref Level Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distor tion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured cor rectly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 260 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Ref Level Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the ar
72. CONFIgure CDPowerE BTS BCLass BAND GIass tee te ettet 242 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABIe STATe sess nennen 244 CONFloure CDbower BITGlCTAbleCATalog nennen nnns 244 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMeDt ccccceccsteeeesesecceeeeeeaeeeneeeeeceeeeeaeaeaee 244 CONFigure CDPowerpBTS CTABle C PY roii cats tee nnrir dininin 245 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA rronin ai Ea aaia aaa 245 CONFloure CDbowerf BTGICTABe DATA 247 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete 2 2 2 2 etate eese tree dede 248 CONFloure CDbower BITSICTABIeNAME cnino i Na a aana 248 CONFloure CDbower BITGlCTAblebtztore nennen enhn 248 CONFigurecDPower BTSEC TABIE SELeth E 249 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATE eese 249 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ESTATel eneee eneee eee orererersrsrne nen 249 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency eese 249 CONFigure Subsystem CONFloure CDbower BTGlMCAbrer Fil TerbROrt rennen 250 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE 2 cccccceececeeeeeeeecaeeeeeaeeeaeeeeneteneneees 250 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MAL Go 251 CONFIgure cDPower BTSIMEASUFSIIEI tocado reu eu runt araida toit eri nete 251 GONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime BU RSLE 2 iret eerte cosas sac ea aaa 252 CONFloure CDbower B TGlbViime tt Gar 253 CONFloure CDbower B TGlbviimeUSTtzTAaTel nenen en ener erererorerersrseee 253 GONFigure CDPower BTS PV
73. Composite Data BItSIEeaIm encre teen Eee ere Dr Pre tege PEE ERR Pes Ya Tr E RE E a 59 e Symbol Gofstellallohi EE 59 p r Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 50 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis ES EEE ES RR M s Y v u 9 P HM a amp w n M C Pp bil 6 1 4 1 e EVM KEE ul EE 60 e Composite Constellation rho oti aer ERR RR ERN RN NSREE REBRREN NEA a 61 e Channel BIESIFGBITI esr re erre rtc me Re ener ER ERR de Rec E YER c YR A pahaa EUR RR FUE EXTRAS 61 Peak Gode Donia EPOR sete eet rre rte edente iesus t e ee ee rud 62 Code Domai sio CET 63 e Mag NN TEE EE 64 e JhaseEBNOPVS E 65 e Symbol Magnitude EE cricoid in erroe aeria dete t br pe aa bra aveeteerss 65 e Symbol PASO EE 65 Code Domain Power This result display determines the power of all codes of a specific channel and plots it in a diagram The x axis represents the code number The number of codes depends on the Select Channel Settings on page 75 Each bar in the diagram represents one code The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the power of each code By default the scaling is relative The measurement evaluates the total signal of a specific channel over a single slot Code Domain Power 1 1 Clrw Start Code 0 4 Code Stop Code
74. Composite EVM The composite EVM is the difference between the test signal and ideal reference signal For further details refer to the Composite EVM RMS result display Pilot RRI Power Shows the absolute power of the Pilot channel RRI channel in dBm Pk CDE SF xx IQ The Peak Code Domain Error measurement specifies a projection of the difference between test signal and ideal reference signal to the spreading factor that belongs to the channel type This spreading factor is shown in brackets IQ Imbalance IQ Offset Shows the IQ imbalance DC offset of the signal in percent Rho Shows the quality parameter RHO calculated over a half slot According to the standard RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideally generated reference signal It is measured over all half slots Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 53 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Channel results The Channel Results in the lower part of the table show results for the selected chan nel e Channel Pwr Rel Abs Channel power of the selected channel relative absolute values e Channel GF Channel spreading factor e Timing Phase Offset e Symbol Rate e Composite Data EVM RMS error vector magnitude values of composite data channel in 96 e Composite Data EVM Peak EVM values of composite data channel in 96 e Symbol EVM RMS Pk Symbol Error Vector Magnitude RMS Peak values e Composite Data Modul
75. DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 257 Blank Hides the selected trace Remote command DISP TRAC OFF see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 258 Further Information 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type All resolution bandwidths are realized with digital filters The video filters are responsible for smoothing the displayed trace Using video band widths that are small compared to the resolution bandwidth only the signal average is displayed and noise peaks and pulsed signals are repressed If pulsed signals are to be measured it is advisable to use a video bandwidth that is large compared to the resolution bandwidth VBW 10 x RBW for the amplitudes of pulses to be measured correctly The following filter types are available e Normal 3dB Gaussian filters The Gaussian filters are set by default The available bandwidths are specified in the data sheet e CISPR 6 dB filters MIL Std 6 dB filters Note that the 6 dB bandwidths are available only with option R amp S FSV K54 e Channel filters For details see chapter 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 181 Channel filters do not support FFT mode e RRC filters For details see chapter 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 181 RRC filters do not support FFT mode e 5 Pole filters The available bandwidths are specified in the data sheet 5 Pole filters do not
76. E NRE GALGulate n STATistics SCALe AUTQO ONDGE center nennen diine 238 GALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RANGO inr eie ker eet ebbe cr eee v cro rove da pede en aea Eva CAL CGulatecnzGTATietceGCAlexvhRltEVel ana na ANERE TENE CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer ee EE Tee e RE CAL CGulatecnzGTATietceGCAlevUbber ne Let e A Ne CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDCI SS ccscensseasecsenecsseneenecessessenceseessonsenseasstesaneoateneentacsoans 242 GONFigure CDPower BTS G TABle CATalog ot ertt ene t e a 244 GONFigure CDPower BTS CTABlIe COMMABnt entrer rer cre thee Sap nds 244 ee eeler RI TE AER CTAB CORY E 245 CONFigure CDPower EBTS CTABle DATA rore ertt ntn t re rmt ENEE EEN 245 GONFigure CDPower BTS G LT ABIe DAJTA scade rrt re pene era EENS des CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete GONFigure CDPower B TS GTABle NAME trot rtr cinere rne cnn en doter ED EFIE gs CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle RESTore GONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect rrr eren repr nn nete rete GONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe econtra CONFigure CDPower BTS MCAR ier STATe eere ettet trennt nennt nnne tnnt nennen CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARr rier FIL Ter STATE piin CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARKEnFILTORROEF csicsececsscaceassacens rra or
77. EEN 209 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer MODE eese nennen nnns 210 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESUIt cccccescccceesceesseseceeneeeceeneeeans 210 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESUult PHZ sees 211 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SEL Ct cccccccccseeecesceeceeseeeseeeeeneneees 212 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHon ZO0OM nennen ness sse nr sean 213 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult lt ResultType gt This command queries the measured and calculated values of the Code Domain Power analysis The channel type can be set by means of the SENSe CDPower CTYPe command the slot number by means of the SENSe CDPower SLOT com mand and the code number by means of the SENSe CDPower CODE command Suffix n 1 4 window lt m gt irrelevant CALCulate Subsystem Query parameters lt ResultType gt ACTive CDEPeak CDERms CDPabsolute CDPRelative CERRor CHANnel CODMulation CODPower DACtive DMTYPe DRPich EVMPeak EVMRms FERRor FERPpm IQIMbalance IQOFfset MACCuracy MACTive MTYPe PCDerror PDATa PLENGth PMAC POFFset PPICh PPILot PPReamble PRRI PTOTal RHO RHOData RHOMac RHOVerall RHOPilot RHO1 RHO2 SFACtor SLOT SRATe TFRame TOFFset ACTive Number of active channels CDEPeak Peak value of E
78. EVM for each slot Set the number of slots via the Capture Length on page 74 field The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The selected slot is displayed red WEE Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 40 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis ES EEE SS EE EE ra EE EEE EEE SS i Composite EVM el Clrw Start Slot 0 1 Slot Stop Slot 2 Fig 6 6 Composite EVM result display Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal and therefore the compo site EVM is very large Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active chan nel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 78 field Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP MACCuracy see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 8 Composite EVM on page 320 6 1 3 7 Channel Table Starts the Channel Occupancy Table analysis In this result display all active channels are displayed Therefore the channel table can contain up to 146 entries on
79. Example for base spreading factor of 64 0 64 1 64 2 64 63 64 Bit Reverse order Bundles the channels with concentrated codes i e all codes of a channel are next to one another In this way you can see the total power of a con centrated channel Example for base spreading factor of 64 0 64 32 64 16 64 48 64 8 64 40 64 15 64 47 64 31 64 63 64 For further details on the code order refer to the Hadamard and BitReverse Code Tables in the Appendix on page Remote command SENSe CDPower ORDer on page 269 Normalize Result Demod Settings Select this parameter to eliminate the DC offset from the signal By default the param eter is deselected Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 268 Time Phase Estimation Result Demod Settings Actives or deactivates the timing and phase offset calculation of the channels as to the pilot channel If deactivated or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the cal culation does not take place and dashes instead of values are displayed as results Remote command SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 274 Operation Mode Result Demod Settings The operation mode is used for the channel search Access In ACCESS mode only PICH always available and DATA channels can exist Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Traffic In TRAFFIC mode all channels PICH RRI DATA ACK and DRC can exist PICH and RRI are always in
80. FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X and CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y commands independent of the position of marker 1 and of a trace Suffix n Selects the measurement window m irrelevant Note marker 2 is always the deltamarker for phase noise mea surement results Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise measurement with all delta mark ers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State This command links delta marker 1 to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position of the marker so does the delta marker Suffix n Selects the measurement window m 1 irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT LINK ON CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker E
81. Mode Co 77 98 Channel Table Result Display C m M veaseettes 41 321 323 KOG p S 56 Channel Table Settings C Q 77 97 Channel Tables E 78 98 Channel Type EE 76 K84 remote Command A 266 Characters Sp cial rtt rn cvsetacenntecaveetes Clear Write trace mode Code Domain Analysis etre ttn Code Domain Error Power CD Pp 44 326 CM E 63 Code Domain Power R84 asses 35 315 C oM E H 51 Code Number K84 remote Command A 265 Code Order KE 103 Code Power C 85 5 1o HE 104 Code selection of Cr Commands IR lee Me En NE Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function Composite Constellation CD H HEEPE CP Composite Data Bitstream Co 321 Composite Data Constellation KGS on neiieod mese taro e Pe OOV erg 58 321 Composite Data EVM WRG EE 321 Composite EVM BEE 40 K84 K85 i t Lo Cave Mas b detener 320 Continuous SWEEP 2 2 ette etre ees et pete 111 168 Correction allge 133 coupling defa lt settings 2 2 reote tet
82. NOFSymbols 10 2 9 CodeClass 7 9 26 Symbol Phase Error The comand returns the phase error in degrees of each symbol at the selected slot The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected channel NOFSymbols 10 2 8 CodeClass 7 10 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual The following commands are identical to those in the base unit and are included in this manual only because they are specifically referenced to here See also chapter 7 6 SENSe Subsystem on page 264 and chapter 7 2 CALCulate Subsystem on page 203 7 10 41 INPUE comtipnands 3 i ertet de Recte eorr tede vilelaei a a a aa adaa naaa shake 328 7 10 2 TRIGger Commande 335 7 10 3 Other Referenced Commande 338 7 10 4 INPut commands INPut ATTenuation Value This command programs the input attenuator To protect the input mixer against dam age from overloads the setting 0 dB can be obtained by entering numerals not by using the DOWN command The attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly Other Commands Referenced in this Manual In the default state with Spectrum mode the attenuation set on the step attenuator is coupled to the reference level of the instrument If the attenuation is programmed directly the coupling to the reference level is switched off This fu
83. OOKN Q If the 2 bits within an ON OFF keying modulation are identical the modulation cannot be recognized as an ON OFF keying modulation If both bits contain 1 ON the modu lation is identical to a BPSK and is recognized as BPSK If both bits contain 0 OFF there is no power within that code and slot and therefore no modulation is detected If the evaluation is set to MAPPING COMPLEX the separate and Q branch detection within the result summary is no longer selected and the modulation type is a 2BPSK with the coding number 5 via remote Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements As of Subtype 2 the R amp S FSV K85 can demodulate the new demodulation types B4 Q4 Q2 Q4Q2 and E4E2 For the data channel the software also provides the new results displays Composite Data EVM Composite Data Constellation and Compo site Data Bitstream In R amp S FSV K85 there is no difference between subtype 2 and subtype 3 in the soft ware Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType on page 255 Code Order Result Demod Settings Sets the sorting of the channels for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error result displays Hadamard order By default the codes are sorted in Hadamard order i e in ascending order You can see the power of each code in this way there is no distinction between channels apparent If there is a channel covering several codes the display shows the individual power of each code
84. PN Offset Result Settings Specifies the Pseudo Noise PN offset of the base station In a 1xEV DO system the PN offset is used to distinguish the base stations The PN offset determines the offset in the circulating PN sequence in multipls of 64 chips with reference to the event second clock trigger Although the parameter is always available it has an effect only in External trigger mode Remote command SENSe CDPower PNOFfset on page 270 Multi Carrier Result Settings Selects or deselects the multi Carrier mode The mode improves the processing of multi carrier signals It allows the measurement on one carrier out of a multi carrier sig nal Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe on page 249 Enhanced Algorithm Result Settings Activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm that is used for signal detection on multi carrier signals This algorithm slightly increases the calculation time Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements If both the Enhanced Algorithm and the Multi Carrier Filter on page 84 are deactiva ted the multi carrier mode is automatically switched off Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo on page 251 Multi Carrier Filter Result Settings Activates or deactivates the usage of a filter for signal detection on multi carrier sig nals If both the Enhanced Algorithm on page 83 and the Multi Carrier Filter are deactiva ted the mult
85. Power K85 63 Code Domain Power ep Composite Constellation KA 47 Composite Constellation K84 85 remote 327 Composite Constellation K85 ss 61 Composite Data Bitstream K85 remote 2321 Composite Data Constellation K85 remote 321 Composite Data Constellation K85 58 Composite Data EVM K85 remote 5921 Composite EVM K84 AE 40 Composite EVM K84 85 remote 320 Composite EVM K85 p EVM vs Symbol K84 EVM vs Symbol K84 85 remote 327 EVM vs Symbol K85 General Results K84 General Results K84 85 remote 317 318 General Results K85 cene 52 Magnitude Error vs Chip K84 85 remote Peak Code Domain Error K84 Peak Code Domain Error K84 85 remote Peak Code Domain Error K85 Phase Error vs Chip K84 85 remote 328 Power vs Chip K84 sn 09 Power vs Chip K84 85 remote 320 Power vs Chip K85 aeree dieere 54 Power vs Symbol K84 sisiriha 40 Power vs Symbol K84 85 remote 320 Power vs Symbol K85 s00 Symbol Constellation K84 we 45 Symbol Constellation K84 85 remote 327 Symbol Constellation K85
86. Preamplifier C On e Off Adjust Ref Level Center Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 fcenter E fmax UU SPAN pin 2 span 0 0 Hz lt fcenter lt fmax fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet If the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is active center frequencies above 7 GHz are not available Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 293 Frequency Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 294 Ref Level Frontend Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distor tion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured cor rectly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 260 Ref Level Offset Frontend Settings Opens an edit dial
87. QAM TRACe DATA Results 7 9 4 Value Description Range Unit lt MACTive gt Number of active MAC channels lt DACTive gt Number of active DATA channels lt PLENGth gt Length of preamble in chips lt RHO gt RHO value for the selected channel type slot lt PCDerror gt Peak Code Domain error dB lt IQIMbalance gt IQ imbalance 96 IQOFfset IQ offset lt SRATe gt Symbol rate ksps lt CHANnel gt Channel number lt SFACtor gt Spreading factor of the channel lt TOFFset gt If the evaluation of the timing and phase offset is not active S see SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 274 or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the value 9 is returned For inactive channels the value 9 is returned lt POFFset gt If the evaluation of the timing and phase offset is not active see SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 274 or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the value 9 is returned For inactive channels the value 9 is returned lt CDPRelative gt relative level of the channel referenced to total power in the 0 co channel type dB lt CDPAbsolute gt absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel co slot dBm lt EVMRms gt Error vector magnitude rms lt EVMPeak gt Error vector magnitude peak lt MTYPe gt Modulation type 0 BPSK I 1 BPSK Q 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM 5 2BPSK if complex analysis selected for PILOT
88. R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Return values lt ConnState gt lt DeviceName gt lt SerialNumber gt lt PortName gt lt SampleRate gt lt MaxTransferRate gt lt ConnProtState gt lt PRBSTestState gt lt SampleRateType gt lt Placeholder gt Example Mode Manual operation Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected Device ID of the connected device Serial number of the connected device Port name used by the connected device Maximum or currently used sampling rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indicated by lt SampleRateType gt parameter Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done 0 Maximum sampling rate is displayed 1 Current sampling rate is displayed for future use currently 0 INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 0ut A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS See Connected Device on page 117 See Digital IQ Info on page 118 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual INPut DIQ RANGe AUTO l
89. Select softkey e P M Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 59 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Symbol Constellation IQ 1 Clrw eee Fig 6 23 Symbol Constellation result display Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB CONSt see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 20 Symbol Constellation on page 327 6 1 4 11 EVM vs Symbol This result display shows the EVM on symbol level The x axis represents the symbols and the y axis shows the EVM in The number of symbols depends on the channel type and is in the range from 2 to 100 Refer to chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 176 for further information The measurement evaluates a single channel over a single slot You can select a specific code and half slot with the Select softkey EVM vs Symbol IQ 1 Clrw Start Sym 0 8 Sym Stop Sym 95 Fig 6 24 EVM vs Symbol result display Inactive channels can be measured but the result is meaningless since these chan nels do not contain data e M 4 a Operating Manua
90. Select your recently created channel table Press the Edit softkey to open and modify the channel table Each row in the channel table represents one channel 4 Sort the channels in the channel table by pressing the Sort softkey The R amp S FSV sorts the channels according to the rules listed in the Sort softkey description 5 Adda new channel by pressing the Add Channel softkey a Select a channel type e g a data channel b In the Channel Type field select CHAN from the dropdown menu c Specify the channel number a value between 0 and 127 and spreading factor d Choose the radio configuration usually 3 5 Further Information e Activate the channel by editing the State field The other values symbol rate and power are automatically calculated If there is a conflict with another channel in the table a red diamond is displayed in the Domain Conflict field of the conflicting channels 6 You can delete a channel with the Delete Channel softkey Note that a channel is deleted without further notice 7 Ifyou want to discard your changes you can restore the original table with the Reload softkey All your changes will be lost You can also restore the default channel tables delivered with the R amp S FSV with the Restore Default Tables softkey This recovery can be done even if you have saved changes to these tables For more information on softkeys dialog boxes and parameters concerning channel tables
91. Sep Default Coupling Default Settings Default Settings remote control Delete KBA s rrr rmn Delete Channel K 4 sees Delete Rarige en Delete Range remote control Deviation Lin Log remote control Display Config K84 m Display Config K85 ets 105 Edit ACLR Limit remote control 223 224 226 227 Edit Power Classes o etiem ene ttes 141 Edit Reference Range eerte 138 140 Edit Reference Range remote control 277 278 288 El Atten Mode Auto Man 110 160 Fast ACER On Off si nei hd ees 132 Fast ACLR On Off remote control 304 305 elle 167 Filter Type remote control 289 290 Frequency Offset 72 90 108 154 Full Span remote control issirinksi arias 295 Gate Delay remote control eee eee eee eee 307 Gate Length remote control iissa 307 Gate Mode Lvl Edge remote control 310 Gate RANGES EE Gate Ranges remote control E Gated Trigger On Off sessssees Gated Trigger remote control Grid Abs Rel en Grid Abs Rel remote control IF Output IF Video remote control 341 Input 50 Q 75 Q remote control 334 Insert after Range Insert after Ra
92. Symbol Constellatton A 327 T921 EVM VS SYMDOl EE 327 7 9 22 Composite Constellation ror rne er ern n khe rk rua NY aet a Red Vaud ABE E 327 19 23 Magnitude Error vs Clip reposer rena crt cea tec eed rca cd a n Redde 327 7 9 24 Phase Error VS e DEE 328 7 9 25 Symbol Magnitude Error 328 9 26 Symbol Phase ErtQr ici rene ete ea ere PA ve advo 328 7 10 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual eee 328 7 10 1 INPut COMMANA Srn ei eee aee e ri eee e ee na cd vide 328 40 2 TRIGger el TE 335 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis pum P eee imet 7 10 3 Other Referenced Cormmiards iicet reicht ces rante cre enata e id zx 338 7 11 Programming Examples eniin teens annu ite nna ie tanus ie ana naa aeneis 342 7 11 4 Retrieving Trace Results rera e ues tane vd a tcv vu eee 342 T 1 Notation In the following sections all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed and then described in detail arranged according to the command subsystems The notation is adapted to the SCPI standard The SCPI conformity information is included in the individual description of the commands Individual Description The individual description contains the complete notation of the command An example for each command the RST value and the SCPI informa
93. The Range element is structured as follows Range Index n gt lt Name Name gt lt ChannelType gt Channel Type lt Channel Type gt lt WeightingFilter gt lt Type gt FilterType lt Type gt lt RollOffFactor gt Factor lt RollOffFactor gt lt Bandwith gt Bandwidth lt Bandwidth gt lt WeightingFilter gt lt FrequencyRange gt lt Start gt RangeStart lt Start gt lt Stop gt RangeStop lt Stop gt lt FrequencyRange gt lt Limit gt Start Unit 2 Unit Value Value gt Stop Unit Unit Value Value lt Limit gt lt Limit gt Start Unit Unit Value Value gt Stop Unit Unit Value Value gt lt Limit gt lt RBW Bandwidth Bandwidth Type FilterType 7 lt VBW Bandwidth Bandwidth gt lt Detector gt Detector lt Detector gt Sweep Mode SweepMode Timez SweepTime 7 Amplitude ReferenceL evel Unit dBm Value Value gt lt RFAttenuation Mode Auto Unit dB Value Value gt Preamplifier Statez State 7 lt Amplitude gt lt Range gt Table 6 12 Attributes and child nodes of the BaseFormat element Child Node Attribute Value Parameter Description Mand FileFormatVersion 1 0 0 0 Yes Date YYYY MM DD Date in ISO 8601 format No HH MM SS Name lt string gt Name of the standard Yes Instrument Type FSL Name of the instrument No Application SA K72 K82 Name of the application No
94. This command switches the spurious limit check off If you want to read out the values peak values including the delta to a limit you have to switch on the limit again This command is only for FSP compatibility and not necessary to use on the R amp S FSV Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example CALC PSE Starts to determine the list CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch AUTO lt State gt This command activates or deactivates the list evaluation Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CALC ESP PSE AUTO OFF Deactivates the list evaluation Manual operation See List Evaluation On Off on page 139 CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin lt Margin gt This command sets the margin used for the limit check peak search Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt Margin gt 200 to 200 dB RST 200 dB Example CALC ESP PSE MARG 100 Sets the margin to 100 dB Manual operation See Margin on page 139 CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch PSHow This command marks all peaks with blue squares in the diagram Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC ESP PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch SUBRanges lt NumberPeaks gt This com
95. US PCS 1 9 GHz Band Band Class 15 AWS Band Band Class 16 US 2 5 GHz Band Band Class 17 US 2 5 GHz Forward Link Only Band Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass on page 242 CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens a submenu to configure the channel power and adjacent channel power mea surement independently of the predefined standards for details see also chap ter 6 4 14 Predefined CP ACLR Standards on page 195 and chapter 6 4 15 Opti mized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters on page 196 of TX Chan CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of carrier signals to be taken into account in channel and adjacent channel power measurements Values from 1 to 18 are allowed Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt on page 304 of Adj Chan CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of adjacent channels to be considered in the adjacent channel power measurement Values from 0 to 12 are allowed The following measurements are performed depending on the number of the channels 0 Only the channel powers are measured 1 The channel powers and the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel are measured 2 The channel powers the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel and of the next higher and lower channel alternate channel 1 are measured 3 The channel power the power
96. amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 329 6 2 5 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Sweep menu in 1xEV DO Analysis modes for CDA measurements For RF measurements the softkeys are described in chapter 6 3 6 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu on page 167 CONUMUOUS SW OBED EE 111 SItgle SWEBD EE 111 Gonmue SIngle SWORD ic tipa cte ctt A ee ar ves rece dr e ERREUR 111 WEED COUME e 112 Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value see the Sweep Count softkey Sweep Count on page 112 Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 339 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggering starts the number of sweeps that are defined by using the Sweep Count softkey The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 339 Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey without deleting the trace of the last measurement 6 2 6 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements This is particularly of interest when
97. branch OOKN I and the ON OFF keying NACK on the Q branch OOKN Q Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements If the 2 bits within an ON OFF keying modulation are identical the modulation cannot be recognized as an ON OFF keying modulation If both bits contain 1 ON the modu lation is identical to a BPSK and is recognized as BPSK If both bits contain 0 OFF there is no power within that code and slot and therefore no modulation is detected If the evaluation is set to MAPPING COMPLEX the separate and Q branch detection within the result summary is no longer selected and the modulation type is a 2BPSK with the coding number 5 via remote In subtype 3 in R amp S FSV K84 the modulation type 64QAM can be detected The MAC RA channel occupies a variable code number and the preamble occupies the I and the Q branch Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType on page 255 Normalize Result Settings Select this parameter to eliminate the DC offset from the signal By default the param eter is deselected Remote command SENSe CDPower NORMalize on page 268 Time Phase Est Result Settings Activates or deactivates the timing and phase offset calculation of the channels as to the pilot channel If deactivated or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the calculation does not take place and dashes instead of values are displayed as results Remote command SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 274
98. channel type over a single slot WEE Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 61 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Bitstream Table IQ 1 Clrw pe Se DEMNEIS Fig 6 26 Channel Bitstream result display Select a specific symbol using the MKR key If you enter a number the marker jumps to the selected symbol If there are more symbols than the screen is capable of dis playing use the marker to scroll inside the list Depending on the modulation and the channel type a slot may contain a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 400 bits For more information on this topic refer to chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 176 Depending on the modulation type a symbol consists of the following bits e BPSK 1 bit only the or the Q component is assigned in case of complex map ping a 2BPSK modulation is displayed with both the and Q components e QPSK 2 bits I component followed by the Q component e 8PSK 3 bits e 16QAM 4 bits e 64QAM 5 bits Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP BSTReam see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 16 Channel Bitstream on page 325 6 1 4 14 Peak Code Domain Error The Peak Code Domain Error is defined as the maximum value for the Code Domain Error for all codes Th
99. edit dialog box to define the upper limit of the displayed probability range Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 The y axis scaling is defined via the y Unit Abs softkey The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UPPer on page 239 y Axis Min Value Scaling CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to define the lower limit of the displayed probability range Values in the range 1e lt value lt 0 1 are allowed The y axis scaling is defined via the y Unit 96 Abs softkey The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer on page 239 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements y Unit Abs Scaling CCDF Defines the scaling type of the y axis The default value is absolute scaling Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT on page 239 Default Settings Scaling CCDF Resets the x and y axis scalings to their preset values x axis ref level 10 dBm x axis range APD 100 dB x axis range CCDF 20 dB y axis upper limit 1 0 y axis lower limit 1E 6 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet on page 237 Adjust Settings Scaling CCDF Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power
100. essent enne 240 ej eiiis 204 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel ABSolute sse nennen 223 CAL Culate nz LUlMitzkzACbowerACHannel AbBGoluteG AaTe enne 224 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt AC Power ACHannelREGuh eene nennen nnn nnne 225 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel RELative esee 224 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe essent 226 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate Channel ABSolute essen 226 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate channel RELative esee 227 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate Channel RELative Ate 228 GALCulate n LIMit k ACPower STATe ertt rrt tn tt tr rri erroe GALCulatesn bIMit ks ESPectrum l MILES cn ron onere reper e eR herr eet rta ern C rag GALGulate n LIMitsk ESPectrum MOBDE ttr trennen rat n tnr tene nen an CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt COUNt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt LIMit STATe CAL CGulate nzLUlMitzks EGbectum PClass CasszMANimum CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class MlINimum essent nennen CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class EXCLusive eee CALCulate n LIMitsks ESPectrum RESTOtO
101. eto veut 181 EMITOGB ihrer decetero e rhet 181 Normal 3dB RRO Lindenb zitiert de eid Moss 181 Filters JUI A H 181 i re ai 181 TYPES 181 Frame synchronization retten ttes 94 frequency Dil gen 72 90 108 154 jc m R 154 el 154 Frequency CENTET oT Frequency menu KR 2i Frontend Settings ii ccr treten Full Scale Level Digital Baseband IQ remote control 331 Digital UO Interface remote control Digital lQ e a s adi G General Results EE dee Ee 52 Hysteresis Lower Auto level Upper Auto level IEC IEEE bus Command GESCHPUOM i ceo ra ciebat e teet rene 201 Inactive Channel Threshold WI 78 98 K84 remote command sssseseseeseeesieerierieernerens 266 Inherent noise COME CUOMN eege deed eege cy 133 Input sample rate Digital Q E Input Output menu e O EE ege te de K key Tag EE AUTO SET K84 eeh INPUTIOQUT PUT ioci et rp ren MEAS SWEEP K84 TRACE K84 ue CIS len EE 112 Key INPUTIOQUT PUT ET 116 L level display range 145 146 147 157 158 range 145 146 147 157 158 Level Reference icocci siccae died cated eines 72 90 108 156 Level Unit Digital UO Interface remote control 332 Digital IQ neinna iii peret ratae te rine RR ehe 118 limit ACL
102. for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution Adjusts the reference level to the current input signal For details see also the Adjust Ref Lvl softkey Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 238 Gated Trigger On Off CCDF Activates and deactivates the gating for statistics functions for the ACP and the CCDF channel The trigger source is changed to EXTERN if this function is switched on The gate ranges are defined using the Gate Ranges on page 148 softkey Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe on page 307 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce on page 308 Gate Ranges CCDF Opens a dialog to configure up to 3 gate ranges for each trace For details on configuration see Defining gated triggering for APD and CCDF meas urements in the base unit description Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Gate Ranges Comment Range 1 Start Range 1 Stop Range 1 Use Range 2 Start Range 2 Stop Range 2 Use Range 3 Start Range 3 Stop Range 3 Use Remote command SWE EGAT ON see SENSe SWEep EGATe on page 307 Switches on the external gate mode SWE EGAT TRAC1 COMM SlotA see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k COMMent on page 308 Adds a comment to trace 1 SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAT1 ON see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STATe lt range gt on page 309 Activates tracing for range 1 of trace 1 SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAR1 3ms see SENSe SWEep EGAT
103. of half slots to be analyzed Parameters lt NumberSweeps gt 0 to 32767 RST 0 GSM 200 PHN 1 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Manual operation See Sweep Count on page 112 See No of HalfSlots on page 150 SENSe Subsystem SENSe SWEep EGATe lt State gt This command switches on off the sweep control by an external gate signal If the external gate is selected the trigger source is automatically switched to EXTernal as well In case of measurement with external gate the measured values are recorded as long as the gate is opened During a sweep the gate can be opened and closed several times The synchronization mechanisms with OPC OPC and WAI remain com pletely unaffected The sweep end is detected when the required number of measurement points 691 in Spectrum mode has been recorded Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SWE EGAT ON Switches on the external gate mode SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE Switches on the edge triggered mode SWE EGAT HOLD 100US Sets the gate delay to 100 us SWE EGAT LEN 500US Sets the gate opening time to 500 ys INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Manual operation See Gated Trigger On Off on page 148 See Gate Ranges on page 148 SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff lt DelayTime
104. of the upper and lower adjacent channel the power of the next higher and lower channel alternate channel 1 and of the next but one higher and lower adja cent channel alternate channel 2 are measured Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements 12 The channel power the power of the upper and lower adjacent channel and the power of the all higher and lower channels alternate channel 1 to 11 are measured Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs on page 296 Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens a dialog to define the channel settings for all channels independant of the defined number of used TX or adjacent channels A AU The dialog contains the following tabs e Bandwidth on page 126 Spacing on page 127 Names on page 129 Weighting Filter on page 129 Limits on page 129 Bandwidth Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Define the channel bandwidths for the transmission channels and the adjacent chan nels TX is only available for the multi carrier ACLR measurement When you change the bandwidth for one channel the value is automatically also defined for all subse quent channels of the same type Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements The transmission channel bandwidth is normally defined by the transmission standard The correct bandwidth is set automatically for the selected standard see chap ter 6 4 15 Optimized Settings for
105. on page 181 The RMS detector is used for obtaining correct power measurement results Therefore this requires no software correction factors Measured values are output as a list The powers of the transmission channels are out put in dBm the powers of the adjacent channels in dBm The sweep time is selected depending on the desired reproducibility of results Repro ducibility increases with sweep time since power measurement is then performed over a longer time period As a general approach it can be assumed that approx 500 non correlated measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0 5 dB 99 of the measurements are within 0 5 dB of the true measured value This holds true for white noise The measured values are considered as non correlated if their time interval cor responds to the reciprocal of the measured bandwidth With IS 136 the measurement bandwidth is approx 25 kHz i e measured values at an interval of 40 us are considered as non correlated A measurement time of 40 ms is thus required per channel for 1000 measured values This is the default sweep time which the R amp S FSV sets in coupled mode Approx 5000 measured values are required for a reproducibility of 0 1 dB 99 96 i e the measurement time is to be increased to 200 ms Remote command SENSe POWer HSPeed on page 304 Set CP Reference Ch Power ACLR Defines the currently measured channel power as the reference value if channel powe
106. page 250 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 249 Channel Table Settings Opens the Channel Table Settings dialog box and the corresponding submenu Predefined Channel Table Settings Channel Search Mode Predefined Auto Search Inactive Channel Threshold Channel Tables DO16QAM DOSPSK DO IDLE DOQPSK l1xEV DO standard table Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Predefined channel tables are a way to customize measurements The RECENT chan nel table contains the last configuration used before switching from Auto Search to Predefined The DOQPSK DO8PSK DO16QAM and DO_IDLE channel tables are included in the option per default and are configured according to the standard For details on the predefined channel tables refer to chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 173 In addition new channel tables can be created and saved to be used in measurements Channel Search Mode Channel Table Settings Defines the kind of channel table used for the measurement Auto The Auto Search mode scans the whole code domain including all permissible symbol rates and channel numbers for active channels The automatic search provides an overview of the channels contained in the signal If channels are not detected as being active change the threshold see Inactive Channel Threshold or select the Predefined channel search type P
107. page 270 Capture Length IQ Capture Settings Sets the number of slots you want to analyze The input value is always in multiples of the slots The maximum capture length is 32 The Capture Length field is available if Set Count equals 1 The default value is 3 Remote command SENSe CDPower IQLength on page 266 Set Count IQ Capture Settings Defines the number of consecutive sets to be stored in the instrument s IQ memory One set consists of 32 slots The R amp S FSV can capture up to 15680 slots about 26 seconds in a single sweep i e the possible value range is from 1 to 490 sets The default setting is 1 In that case you can still define the number of slots see Cap ture Length In case you want to capture more than one set the capture length is always 32 The R amp S FSV automatically sets the capture length to 32 and the Capture Length field is not available for modification Remote command SENSe CDPower SET COUNt on page 271 Set to Analyze IQ Capture Settings Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range depends on the Set Count and is between 0 and Set Count 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET VALue on page 271 Trigger Source Free Run IQ Capture Settings The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog
108. predefined display configuration You can retrieve previously stored display configurations and thus easily switch between different displays of measurement results 1 Select the Predefined tab in the Display Configuration dialog box The previously stored and default configurations are listed The current configura tion is displayed at the top of the dialog box 2 Select the required set of screen configurations 3 Press Apply Measurements and Result Displays To store the current display configuration You can store the current display configuration in the list of predefined settings in order to switch back to it later 1 Select the current display configuration at the top of the Display Configuration dialog box 2 Click Add The current display configuration is added to the list of predefined settings To remove a predefined display configuration You can remove one of the stored display configurations 1 Select the display configuration to be removed from the Predefined tab of the Display Configuration dialog box 2 Click Remove The selected display configuration is removed from the list of predefined settings To restore the default display configurations You can restore the default set of predefined display configurations gt Inthe Predefined tab of the Display Configuration dialog box click Restore 6 1 3 Code Domain Analysis Results BTS Mode The Code Domain Analyzer prov
109. range dBc This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Sweep List dialog box on page 134 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STOP on page 286 Close Sweep List Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Closes the Sweep List dialog box and updates the measurement results Insert before Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range The range numbers of the currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly The maxi mum number of ranges is 20 For further details refer to chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 192 Remote command ESP RANG3 INS BEF see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INSert on page 284 Insert after Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Inserts a new range to the right of the currently focused range The range numbers of all higher ranges are increased accordingly The maximum number of ranges is 20 For further details refer to chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 192 Remote command ESP RANG1 INS AFT see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INSert on page 284 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Delete Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Deletes the currently focused range if possible The range numbers are updated accordingly Fo
110. result display Select a specific symbol using the MKR key If you enter a number the marker jumps to the selected symbol If there are more symbols than the screen is capable of dis playing use the marker to scroll inside the list Depending on the modulation and the channel type a slot may contain a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 400 bits For more information on this topic refer to chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 176 Depending on the modulation type a symbol consists of the following bits e BPSK 1 bit only the or the Q component is assigned in case of complex map ping a 2BPSK modulation is displayed with both the and Q components e QPSK 2 bits I component followed by the Q component e 8PSK 3 bits e 16QAM 4 bits e 64QAM 5 bits Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP BSTReam see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 16 Channel Bitstream on page 325 6 1 3 9 Peak Code Domain Error The Peak Code Domain Error is defined as the maximum value for the Code Domain Error for all codes That means that in this result display the Code Domain Error is pro jected onto the code domain at a specific base spreading factor The spreading factor Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 43 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Func
111. source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 332 Full Scale Level Signal Source The Full Scale Level defines the level that should correspond to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 The level can be defined either in dBm or Volt Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 331 Level Unit Signal Source Defines the unit used for the full scale level Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 332 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level Signal Source If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 331 Digital IQ Info Displays a dialog box with information on the digital UO input and output connection via the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 if available The information includes Device identification Used port e Maximum digital input output sample rates and maximum digital input output transfer rates e Status of the connection protocol e Status of the PRBS descewing test R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Digital Baseband Info Digital IQ Input Connected Device SMU200A Serial Number 103634 Port Out A Digital Input Sample Rate 100 MHz Max Digital Input Transfer Rate 100 MHz Connection Protocol Passed
112. specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 278 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Value Refer to the data sheet RST 30 0 kHz Example ESP RANG2 BAND RES 5000 Sets the RBW for range 2 to 5 kHz Manual operation See RBW on page 135 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDeo Value This command sets the VBW value for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 278 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Value Refer to the data sheet RST 10 0 MHz SENSe Subsystem Example ESP RANG1 BAND VID 5000000 Sets the VBW for range 1 to 5 MHz Manual operation See VBW on page 135 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt COUNt This command returns the number of defined ranges Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Example ESP RANG COUNt Returns the number of defined ranges SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt DELete This command deletes the specified range The range numbers are updated accord ingly The reference range cannot be deleted A minimum of three ranges is manda tory Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Example ESP RANG4 DEL Deletes range 4 Manual operation See Delete Range on page 138 SENSe E
113. sued sevens 241 DISPlay SUDSY Stem E 255 INSTrument SUDSYStOING 2 tess cceed sccce cece ceteeeeescdecesseessnede cxssieeestecesdsceesvens daveeeeeessees 263 SENSe Subsystem 1 iieri e iei na nii ssceesevanesesueeessbeceested ak E uvae n Ra panna R 264 STATUS subsystoem cci ssnansctes iaceret inu aria i tnr nurus seaaeeeed scandent span previas 313 TRACe Subsystem nni cce racha icne ska un tana ku asia dianian iiaia EE EEN 314 TRACe DATA ResuUlts critt iater nnne iturus iet reat rea RE Dra a oo onn EE RR 314 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual eee 328 Programming Examplee ze veNEEEEEEEERREEEEEENEESEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEKEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEESEee 342 Status Reporting System of the 1xEV DO Analysis 345 B lqebeeguninpp teet M 346 352 1 1 Documentation Overview Preface Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSV is divided as follows Quick Start Guide Operating Manuals for base unit and options e Service Manual e Online Help Release Notes Quick Start Guide This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and basic measurements are described Also a brief introduc
114. sweep mode the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweep ing e Sweep on page 164 e FFT on page 164 not available with 5 Pole filters channel filters or RRC filters see chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 181 e Auto on page 165 Sweep Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to standard analog frequency sweep In the standard sweep mode the local oscillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency Remote command SWE TYPE SWE see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 311 FFT Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to FFT mode The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation FFT FFT is not available when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters In this case sweep mode is used Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Note The same applies when a tracking generator internal or external options R amp S FSV B9 B10 is active Remote command SWE TYPE FFT see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 311 Auto Sweep Type Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement Auto mode is set by default Remote command SWE TYPE AUTO see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 311 FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the partial span size The pa
115. the signal CDP Average Result Demod Settings Activate CDP Average and the Code Domain Analysis is averaged over all slots in the set For channel type Data and Preamble this calculation assumes that preambles of different lengths do not occur in the slots If active ALL is displayed in the Slot field above the measurement screen This softkey is available for Code Domain Analysis and is required by the 1xEV DO standard Remote command SENSe CDPower AVERage on page 265 Code Power Result Demod Settings Selects for the Code Domain Power measurement whether the y values are displayed as an absolute dBm or relative dB In relative mode the reference is the total power of the channel type Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 204 Power Reference Result Demod Settings Determines the reference power for relative power measurements Pilot Channel By default the reference power is the power of the pilot channel Total Power The power is measured over one half slot The reference power is the total power of the signal for the corresponding half slot By default the power of the channels is referred to the power of the pilot channel code number 0 The power of the pilot channel is identical over all half slots Therefore it can be used as a constant reference for the result display In contrast the total power can vary from half slot to half slot due to the possibility of a power leve
116. the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC connectors e Connect the external trigger input on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIG GER GATE IN to the external trigger output of the signal generator Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMU Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV ODO Procedure 1 Setthe R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO MS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and select 1xEV DO MS Analysis 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A c Select the Code Domain Power measurement 5 Setthe center frequency and the reference level a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Frontend Settings softkey b In the Center Frequency field enter 833 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 10 dBm R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO MS Analysis K85 d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box In the two screens the following results are displayed by default screen A shows the code domain power of the signal Compared to the measurement without an external trigger See previous example the repetition rate of the measurement increases In screen B the result summary is displayed In the row Trigger to Frame
117. the test signal and an ideally gen erated reference signal In the diagram the codes are plotted on the x axis The num ber of codes corresponds to the base spreading factor which depends on the channel type Refer to for an overview of the spreading factors for each channel type The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the error power of each channel Since it is an error power active and inactive channels can be rated jointly at a glance The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single slot p D P saesa Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 44 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Code Domain Error Power IQ 1 Clrw Start Code 0 2 Code Stop Code 31 Fig 6 10 Code Domain Error result display The power values of the active and inactive codes are displayed in different colors e Yellow active code e Cyan inactive code Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XPOW CDEP see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsystem on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 18 Code Domain Error BTS Mode on page 325 6 1 3 11 Symbol Constellation This result display shows the channel constellation of the modulated signal at symbol
118. value at the start frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independently of the defined limit check type Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt Level gt 400 to in 400 dBm RST 13 dBm Example ESP RANG1 LIM ABS STAR 10 Sets an absolute limit of 10 dBm at the start frequency of the range Manual operation See Abs Limit Start on page 136 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STOP Level This command sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independent of the defined limit check type Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Level gt 400 to in 400 dBm RST 13 dBm Example ESP RANG1 LIM ABS STOP 20 Sets an absolute limit of 20 dBm at the stop frequency of the range Manual operation See Abs Limit Stop on page 137 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STARt Limit This command sets a relative limit value at the start frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independent of the defined limit check type Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Limit gt 400 to in 400 dBc RST 50 dBc Example ESP RANG3 LIM REL STAR 20 Sets a relative limit of 20 dBc at the start frequency of the range Manual operation See Rel Li
119. x axis represents the slots and the y axis shows the PCDE val ues A measurement of the RHO factor is shown in the second part of the example RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideal reference sig nal The maximum value of RHO is 1 In that case the measured signal and the refer ence signal are identical When measuring RHO it is required that only the pilot chan nel is active Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF on the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC con nectors Connect external triggering of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIG GATE to the signal gener ator trigger TRIGOUT1 at PAR DATA Signal generator settings Frequency 878 49 MHz Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 18 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO BTS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and select the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the Peak Code Domain Error measurement a Press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A c Selec
120. x resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth 10 MHz max VBW This coupling ratio is recommended whenever the amplitudes of pulsed signals are to be measured correctly The IF filter is exclusively responsible for pulse shaping No additional evaluation is performed by the video filter This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 10 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 291 RBW VBW Noise 10 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth resolution bandwidth 10 At this coupling ratio noise and pulsed signals are suppressed in the video domain For noise signals the average value is displayed This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 0 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 291 RBW VBW Manual Coupling Ratio Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio The resolution bandwidth video bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 0 001 to 1000 This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 10 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 291 Span RBW Auto 100 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio resolution bandwidth span 100 This coupling ratio is the default setting of the
121. 0 256 21344 84 168 252 336 420 1600 512 1088 68 136 204 272 340 1600 1024 576 36 72 104 144 180 6 4 4 Detector Overview The measurement detector for the individual display modes can be selected directly by the user or set automatically by the R amp S FSV The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace display field by an abbreviation The detectors of the R amp S FSV are implemented as pure digital devices They collect signal power data within each measured point during a sweep The default number of sweep points is 691 The following detectors are available Table 6 10 Detector types Detector Indicator Function Auto Peak Ap Determines the maximum and the minimum value within a measurement point not available for SEM Positive Peak Pk Determines the maximum value within a measure ment point Negative Peak min peak Mi Determines the minimum value within a measure ment point RMS Rm Determines the root mean square power within a measurement point Average Av Determines the linear average power within a mea surement point Sample Sa Selects the last value within a measurement point The result obtained from the selected detector within a measurement point is displayed as the power value at this measurement point Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 178 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis d 6 4 5
122. 00 0000 0000 Further Information 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables Creating a channel table 1 Select the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 2 Select the Channel Table Settings softkey The Channel Table Settings dialog box is displayed 3 Select the Predef channel search mode and set a threshold for inactive channels 4 Press the Add Channel softkey to create a new channel table The New Channel Table dialog box is displayed The new channel table contains no data at all 5 Enter a name for the new channel table e g Test Table in the corresponding field The name you enter in this field is also the name of the table channel file 6 Enter a description for your new channel table e g Channel table created for test purposes in the Description field 7 Build your channel table by adding the channels with the configuration you need or Measure the current signal by pressing the Meas softkey The R amp S FSV automati cally adds the channels of the current signal to the channel table Refer to New Copy Edit on page 78 for a description of all parameters relating to a channel 8 Save your table by pressing the Save softkey All data is lost if you just close the dialog box The list of available channel tables in the Channel Table Settings dialog box now contains the Test Table Editing a channel table 1 Select the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 2 Select the Channel Table Settings softkey 3
123. 1 chapter 6 1 3 1 Code Domain Power on page 35 chapter 6 1 3 10 Code Domain Error on page 44 chapter 6 1 3 13 Composite Constellation on page 47 chapter 6 1 3 12 EVM vs Symbol on page 46 chapter 6 1 3 2 General Results on page 36 chapter 6 1 3 4 Power vs Chip on page 39 chapter 6 1 3 5 Power vs Symbol on page 40 chapter 6 1 3 11 Symbol Constellation on page 45 Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 272 SENSe CDPower CODE on page 265 6 2 2 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Menu in MS Mode The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the main menu of the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option O You can also access the main menu via the MEAS CONFIG hardkey Seungs E 89 Frontend SOUS TTT 89 Eege egene 90 L Frequency Offset 90 x i T 90 loj qi T 91 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements L Ee EE 91 L Adjust E 91 IQ Capture Settings EE 91 o l EE 91 L Capture Length EK 92 EE 92 EE 92 L Trigger Source Free Run 92 L Trigger Source Bte aleon eanna a A RL 92 Bee Pola ae a eege eege 92 L en EE 93 Ile 93 OV ING Re E 94 Likong Code E 95 L Long Code Mask eH 95 L Mult EE 96 L Enhanced BIG tee Eed 96 Bi 0 Camion d EE 96 L Filter Type nennen tette tntntn tete teen tnis 96 L ROLON FaN SQ Tm meen 97 Exe edi s 05 MONDO 97 Channel Table e R 97 L Channel Egeter 98 L Ana tive Channel Threshold eicer
124. 133 L Adjust Ref Lul e erH 133 Spect m TE le RE 134 ER EE 134 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements L Sweep List dialog BONG puesta dir ri cud p en TRI 134 L Range Start Range Ston 134 Rast MONUI 134 Lil sb i ccs caer estos Dahan det ccs dd 135 EE 135 ic eeneg 135 EE 135 L Sweep Time 135 M oL MMC 135 a A7 e E E 135 L RF Agtenustor etnies 136 EE 136 Troie BEE 136 19 1 MEET TEE 136 L Abs 501 T 136 L Abe Limit BI cetete ad actenus dpi taeda ada cle 137 ni MRE UNI ERR signin ils acini advo 137 L Rell ice D aa 137 L Close Sweenp Let 137 L insert before Rage necnon a A 137 L insert after RANJE MN 137 L Delete Pata NM EU T 138 L IRA ES as NR esu 138 L Edit Reference Range 138 Eusroc no Mee MM 139 L List Evaluation OmON is eed ia re ni rne crib 139 a cc NERONE 139 L Show Re MENS 139 L Save Evaluation List nni 139 L ASCII File EXpOIT asse essa ricette bd Drm tr tenes 140 L DeiM NENNEN NERONE NER 140 L Edit Reference Range REENEN 140 L Edit Power Classes 141 L Used Power CEISSSB ciuisc enean iata ege 141 Elo Ai MMC ET 142 Leem Lieb rct tec esi i petu tione IEEE Do RR 142 B on jo ECT 142 GE EE 142 EU oro o EE 143 L Save As Standard ect tet iecit tre Ve rnc re eden 143 L Meas 1 Uc NER 143 L Restore Standard Eiles tnnt 143 Occupied Bandwidth messireisid rto dr rete n err nre FE Feed Cei ae 143 L Power Bandwidth span gt OD 143
125. 3 57 6 0 4 3 54 6 0 4 11 54 3 0 4 7 51 3 0 4 15 52 5 0 INST SEL MDO Activate 1xEV DO MS implicitly CDP relative is displayed on Screen A and Result Summary is active on Screen B Mapping is set to I INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep CDP MAPP Q Select Q branch CDP ORD HAD Set order to Hadamard INIT WAI Start measurement with synchronization TRAC TRACE1 Read out CDP relative Hadamard Q 45 0 53 3 3 4 1 52 3 0 Code 0 is quasi inactive as PICH is set to I 4 2 16 1 1 4 3 54 6 0 The DATA channel is distributed between 4 4 51 2 0 4 5 55 1 0 the active codes 2 16 6 16 10 16 14 16 4 6 16 4 1 4 7 51 3 0 each with one quarter of the power i e 4 8 52 4 0 4 9 55 5 0 10 dB 6 dB 16 dB 4 10 15 8 1 4 11 54 3 0 Programming Examples 2 12 51 98 0 4 13 537 6505 4 14 15 9 1 4 15 52 5 0 CDP ORD BITR Set order to BitReverse TRAC TRACE1 Read out CDP relative BitReverse Q Sorting is changed in accordance with BitReverse de 0 53 3 3 4 8 52 4 0 PICH is quasi inactive 4 4 51 2 0 4 12 51 8 0 25 55 402050741 Channel 2 4 is now consolidated and 4 1 7252 34 0 de 9 755 54 0 displayed with accumulated power 4 5 55 1 0 4 13 57 6 0 4 3 54 6 0 4 11 54 3 0 4 7 51 3 0 4 15 52 5 0 CDP OVER ON Activate Overview mode CDP relative on Screen A I branch CDP relative on Screen B Q branch TRAC
126. 3 model is restricted to a maximum frequency of 3 GHz whereas the 1321 3008K04 model has a maximum frequency of 4 GHz e The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 1311 2015 xx is not available for the R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx models The maximum usable UO analysis bandwidth for these models is 28 MHz or with option R amp S FSV B70 40 MHz 2 Introduction Overview of Firmware Options R amp S FSV K84 K85 This section contains all information required for operation of an R amp S FSV equipped with Application Firmware R amp S FSV K84 or K85 It covers operation via menus and the remote control commands for the 1xEV DO Analysis This part of the documentation consists of the following chapters chapter 3 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 on page 11 Explains some basic 1xEV DO base station tests chapter 4 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO MS Analysis K85 on page 20 Explains some basic 1xEV DO mobile station tests chapter 5 Test Setup for Base Station and Mobile Station Tests on page 29 Describes the measurement setup for base station and mobile station tests chapter 6 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis on page 31 Describes the instrument functions of 1xEV DO Analysis chapter 7 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis on page 199 Describes all remote control commands defined for the code domain measure ment An alphabetic list of all remote control commands and a
127. 33 El Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the elec tronic attenuator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 110 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definition select the Man mode again If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 333 INPut EATT on page 333 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R
128. 4 4 51 2 0 4 5 55 1 0 the active codes 2 16 6 16 10 16 14 16 4 6 16 4 1 4 7 51 3 0 each with one quarter of the power i e 4 8 52 4 0 4 9 55 5 0 10 dB 6 dB 16 dB 4 10 15 8 1 4 11 54 3 0 4 12 51 8 0 4 13 57 6 0 Programming Examples 4 14 15 9 1 4 Abe D2 Be 0 CDP ORD BITR Set order to BitReverse TRAC TRACE1 Read out CDP relative BitReverse Q Sorting is changed in accordance with BitReverse 4 0 53 3 3 4 8 52 4 0 PICH is quasi inactive 4 4 51 2 0 4 12 51 8 0 2 2 10 0 1 Channel 2 4 is now consolidated and A 1 52 3 0 4 9 55 5 0 displayed with accumulated power 4 5 55 1 0 4 13 57 6 0 4 3 54 6 0 4 11 54 3 0 4 7 51 3 0 4 15 52 5 0 CDP OVER ON Activate Overview mode CDP relative on Screen A I branch CDP relative on Screen B Q branch TRAC TRACEI Read out CDP relative of I branch 4 0 7 0 1 4 8 54 2 0 PICH is active 4 4 56 7 0 4 12 55 3 0 4 2 48 3 3 4 10 48 1 3 DATA 2 4 is quasi inactive 4 6 49 0 3 4 14 48 5 3 4 1 54 4 0 4 9 55 2 0 4 5 51 2 0 4 13 54 3 0 4 3 54 5 0 4 11 55 7 0 4 7 56 6 0 4 15 52 3 0 TRAC TRACE2 Read out CDP relative of Q branch 4 0 53 3 3 4 8 52 4 0 PICH is quasi inactive 4 4 51 2 0 4 12 51 8 0 25 55 402050741 Channel 2 4 is now consolidated and 45 15 52 34 0 44 9 55 5 0 displayed with accumulated power 4 5 55 1 0 4 1
129. 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde A Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSV is abbreviated as R amp S FSV R amp S FSV K84 K85 Contents 1 2 1 3 1 4 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 7 1 7 2 Contents EE ee ee ee 5 Documentation OverviQw iicet ceceesteeccceennted ceceestte secessteedceeestzeeieeeestecs 5 Conventions Used in the Documentation eee 7 How to Use the Help System eese eene nennen nennen nennen nnn 8 Notes for Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx Models enne 9 NGO ONC GU ON e 10 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 11 Measuring the Signal Channel Power eene 11 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask eene 12 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error 13 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 15 Measuring the Composite EVM eeeeeeeeeeennnenenren nnne nnne nennen 17 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error
130. 5kHz Manual operation See Spacing on page 127 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt Number This command selects the number of carrier signals The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 212 Parameters Number 1 to 18 RST 1 Example POW ACH TXCH COUN 3 Manual operation See of TX Chan on page 125 SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth Percentage This command defines the percentage of the power with respect to the total power This value is the basis for the occupied bandwidth measurement see SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 301 Parameters Percentage 10 to 99 9PCT RST 99PCT Example POW BWID 95PCT Manual operation See Power Bandwidth span gt 0 on page 143 SENSe POWer HSPeed State This command switches on or off the high speed channel adjacent channel power measurement The measurement itself is performed in zero span on the center fre quencies of the individual channels The command automatically switches to zero span and back SENSe Subsystem Depending on the selected mobile radio standard weighting filters with characteristic or very steep sided channel filters are used for band limitation Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example POW HSP ON Manual operation See Fast ACLR On Off on page 132 SENSe POWer
131. 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Y Axis Minimum on page 109 7 5 INSTrument Subsystem The INSTrument subsystem selects the operating mode of the unit either via text parameters or fixed numbers INS e Dit EE DEE 263 INS TEGERE NSELSDE icio aceeveanousessscecwaceevaaneddeesinadtadde Vaaadleuivesteadeceadaacers 263 INSTrument SELect lt InstrName gt Parameters lt InstrName gt Selects the operating mode BDO 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option R amp S FSV K84 MDO 1xEV DO MS Analysis option R amp S FSV K85 INSTrument NSELect lt InstrNo gt Parameters lt InstrNo gt Selects the operating mode 14 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option R amp S FSV K84 15 1xEV DO MS Analysis option R amp S FSV K85 7 6 7 6 1 7 6 2 7 6 2 1 7 6 2 2 7 6 2 3 7 6 2 4 7 6 2 5 7 6 2 6 7 6 2 7 7 6 1 SENSe Subsystem SENSe Subsystem The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters of the analyzer In accord ance with the SCPI standard the keyword SENSe is optional which means that it is not necessary to include the SENSe node in command sequences Note that most commands in the SENSe subsystem are identical to the base unit only the commands specific to this option are described here SENSe CDPower Gubesvetem eene 264 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual 274 SENSe ADUJust Subsystem eene ene
132. 92 In order to change the start stop frequency of the first last range select the appropriate span with the SPAN key If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the measurement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz The first and last ranges are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated Frequency values for each range have to be defined relative to the center frequency The reference range has to be centered on the center frequency The minimum span of the reference range is given by the current TX Bandwidth Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FREQuency STARt on page 282 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FREQuency STOP on page 282 Fast SEM Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Activates Fast SEM mode for all ranges in the sweep list For details see chap ter 6 4 13 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements on page 193 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Note If Fast SEM mode is deactivated while Symmetric Setup mode is on Symmet rical Setup mode is automatically also deactivated If Fast SEM mode is activated while Symmetrical Setup mode is on not all range settings can be set automatically Remote command SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 278 Filter Type Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask
133. A Measurements Display Configuration ScreenA lV Screen A active Result Diagram for Screen A Code Domain Power General Result Channel Result Power vs Chip Power vs Symbol Composite EVM RMS Channel Table e C C C C C C Symbol Constellation EVM vs Symbol Composite Constellation Channel Bitstream Peak Code Domain Error Code Domain Error Power Close This softkey opens the Display Config dialog box to select the result display configu ration The Code Domain Analyzer provides the following result display configurations for measurements in the code domain Result Display Configuration Definition Code Domain Power Code Domain Power result display General Result General measurement results in a table Channel Result Various measurement results for a specific channel Power vs Chip Power of the selected channel versus all chips Power vs Symbol Power of the selected channel and of the selected slot versus all symbols Composite EVM RMS Averaged error between the test signal and the ideal reference signal Channel Table Channel occupancy table Symbol Constellation Channel constellation of the modulated signal at symbol level EVM vs Symbol Error Vector Magnitude result display Composite Constellation Composite Constellation result display Channel Bitstream Display of demodulated bits Peak Code Domain Error Project
134. A Results Table 7 3 Return values for parameter CTABle Value Description Range Unit max time offset Max timing offset value of all channels s lt code number for max The code number which has max timing offset value time gt lt code class for max The code class which has max timing offset value time gt lt max phase offset gt Max phase offset value of all channels rad lt code number for max The code number which has max phase offset value phase gt lt code class for max The code class which has max phase offset value phase gt lt reserved gt reserved for future functionality 0 7 9 16 Channel Bitstream The command returns the bitstream of one slot i e it returns one value for each bit either O or 1 in a symbol lt bit 1 gt lt bit 2 gt lt bit n gt The number of returned bits depends on the modulation type For BPSK modulated signals there is one bit per symbol for 2BPSK and QPSK signals there are 2 bits per symbol for 8 PSK modulated signals there are 3 bits per symbol and for 16QAM modulated signal there are 4 bits per symbol Accordingly the bitstream per slot is of different lengths The number of results is between 2 and 400 If a channel is detected as being inactive the invalid bits in the bit stream are identified by 9 7 9 17 Peak Code Domain Error The command returns two values for each half slot in the following order half
135. ALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 204 TRACe lt 1 4 gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt When the trace data for this mode is queried the magnitude error in of each symbol at the selected slot is transferred The number of the symbols depends on the spread ing factor of the selected channel NOFSymbols 10 2 9 CodeClass Symbol Phase Error The Symbol Phase Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result of calcu lation is one symbol phase error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive values of symbol phase error indicate a symbol phase that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol phase errors indicate a symbol phase that is less than the ideal one 6 1 5 1 6 1 5 2 Measurements and Result Displays Result data for remote query SCPI command CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM PHAS see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 204 TRACe lt 1 4 gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt When the trace data for this mode is queried the phase error in degrees of each sym bol at the selected slot is transferred The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected channel NOFSymbols 10 2 9 CodeClass RF Measurement Results Signal Channel Power The Signal Channel Power measurement analyses the RF signal power of a single channel with 1 2288 MHz bandwidth over a single trace The displayed results are based on the root mean
136. ATe TRACe k STATe range essent nene 309 SENSe SWEep EGAT Te TYPE EE 310 SENSE SWEEP POINTS e M 310 EI EEN 311 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed STATe sese 217 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz FUNGC onPhNOise AUTO 217 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz FUNGC onPhNOisel GTATel cee ceeeeeneeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseeeeneeeeeeees 218 CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarkersm gt LINK giereg EENS EE ees dapes CALCulatesn gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt MAXimumiLEPFT ciue eere S Ed catena essed CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MA Nimum RIGH tssis ia 219 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumf PEAK esses nennen nennen nennen 219 CAL CGulate nz D I Tamarker zmz MihNimum LEET 220 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MiNimumNENT A 220 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINIMUM RIGHTL A 221 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eeeseeeeeeeeeeeenneneennee nennen 220 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe CAL Culatesn gt DEL Tamarkersin gt iXs 3 iere nee tise ides Aiea ened 222 CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker cmz X REI ative AAA 222 CAL Culate lt n gt DEL Tamarkersimei EE 222 GALGulate n DELTamarkersm ES TATe nich tn eret pa eterne nt tht rtp ren npe bes 221 CALOCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHoOw
137. BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 289 of Samples CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to set the number of power measurements that are taken into account for the statistics Apart from the number of measurements the overall measurement time depends also on the set resolution bandwidth as the resolution bandwidth directly influences the sampling rate Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics NSAMples on page 236 Scaling CCDF Opens a submenu to change the scaling parameters of x and y axis x Axis Ref Level Scaling CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the currently active unit dBm dBuV etc The function of this softkey is identical to the Ref Level softkey in the Amplitude menu see Ref Level on page 72 For the APD function this value is mapped to the right diagram border For the CCDF function there is no direct representation of this value on the diagram as the x axis is scaled relatively to the measured mean power Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RLEVel on page 238 x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Opens the Range submenu to select a value for the level range to be covered by the statistics measurement selected Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RANGe on page 238 Range Log 100 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 100 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DI
138. BM gt Minimum power level in list range in dBm lt MinDB gt Minimum power level in list range in dB CONFigure Subsystem lt LimitCheck gt Result of limit check for the list range 0 Passed 1 Failed lt Reserved1 gt 0 currently not used lt Reserved2 gt 0 currently not used Usage Query only CONFigure CDPower BTS REVision lt SignalType gt With this command you define which revision type the signal to be analyzed has Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only For newer pro grams and for subtype 3 use the CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType on page 255 command Parameters lt SignalType gt OJA 0 subtype 0 1 A subtype 2 RST 0 Example CONF CDP REV 0 Revision 0 signal is analyzed Mode EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS RFSLot lt Slot gt This command defines the expected signal FULL slot or IDLE slot Accordingly the limit lines and the borders for calculating the mean power are set The lower and upper limit line are called DOPVTFL DOPVTFU for FULL and DOPVTIL DOPVTIU for IDLE mode It is possible to change these lines with the standard limit line editor Parameters lt Slot gt FULL IDLE RST FULL Example CONF CDP RFSL FULL Use limit line for FULL slot and connect FULL slot signal Mode EVDO Manual operation See RF Slot Full Idle on page 150 7 4 DISPlay Subsystem CONFigure CDPower BTS SUBType lt Subtype gt Selects the subtype of the standard to be used f
139. CALCulate Commandes 240 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsystem The CALCulate FEED subsystem selects the type of evaluation for the measurement data This corresponds to the result display selection in manual operation CAL CulgtesmsEEEED DEE 204 CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt ResultDisplay gt This command selects the result display for the measured data For details on result displays see chapter 6 1 Measurements and Result Displays on page 32 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt ResultDisplay gt XPOW CDP XPOW CDP ABS XPOW CDP RAT XPOW CDEP XTIM CDP ERR CTABle XTIM CDP PVChip XTIM CDP ERR SUMM XTIM CDP MACCuracy XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain XTIM CDP SYMB CONSt XTIM CDP SYMB EVM XTIM CDP BSTReam XTIM CDP COMP CONSt XTIM CDP PVSYmbol XTIMe CDPower CHIP MAGNitude XTIMe CDPower CHIP PHASe XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM PHASe XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM MAGNitude XPOW CDP XPOW CDP ABS Code Domain Power CDP result display absolute XPOW CDP RAT Code Domain Power CDP result display relative XPOW CDEP Code Domain Error Power CDEP result display XTIM CDP BSTReam Channel Bitstream result display XTIM CDP CBSTReam Channel Bitstream result display for composite data MS only XTIM CDP COMP CONSt Composite Constellation result display XTIM CDP COMP EVM Composite EVM RMS result display XTIM CDP ERR CTABle Channel Table result display XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain
140. CALe on page 258 Range Log 5 dB Range Sets the level display range to 5 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 5DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 258 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Range Log 1 dB Range Sets the level display range to 1 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 1DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 258 Range Log Manual Range Opens an edit dialog box to define the display range of a logarithmic level axis man ually Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 Display range DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 258 Range Linear Range Selects linear scaling for the level axis in The grid is divided into decadal sections Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1 This is the default set ting for linear scaling Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261
141. CP ACLR Test Parameters on page 196 Measurements in zero span see Fast ACLR On Off softkey are performed in the zero span mode The channel limits are indicated by vertical lines For measure ments requiring channel bandwidths deviating from those defined in the selected standard the IBW method is to be used With the IBW method see Fast ACLR On Off softkey the channel bandwidth limits are marked by two vertical lines right and left of the channel center fre quency Thus you can visually check whether the entire power of the signal under test is within the selected channel bandwidth If measuring according to the IBW method Fast ACLR Off the bandwidths of the different adjacent channels are to be entered numerically Since all adjacent channels often have the same bandwidth the other alternate channels are set to the bandwidth of the adjacent channel when it is changed Thus only one value needs to be entered in case of equal adjacent channel bandwidths For details on available channel filters see chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Fil ter Re on Type on page 181 mote command ENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt channel gt page 296 ENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel on page 297 ENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate lt channel gt page 297 ACLR Reference Bandwidth Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Se
142. DLE channel tables are included in the option per default and are configured according to the standard For details on the predefined channel tables refer to chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 173 In addition new channel tables can be created and saved to be used in measurements Channel Search Mode Channel Table Settings Defines the kind of channel table used for the measurement Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Auto The Auto Search mode scans the whole code domain including all permissible symbol rates and channel numbers for active channels The automatic search provides an overview of the channels contained in the signal If channels are not detected as being active change the threshold see Inactive Channel Threshold or select the Predefined channel search type Predef Performs the code domain measurement on the basis of the active predefined channel table All channels of a channel table are assumed to be active For further details also refer to the Channel Tables field and the chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 173 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 244 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 249 Inactive Channel Threshold Channel Table Settings Defines the minimum power which a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be recognized as an active channel Channels below the specified thresho
143. DO Manual operation See Long Code Mask on page 95 SENSe CDPower LCODe Q lt Mask gt Defines the long code mask of the Q branch of the mobile in hexadecimal form Parameters lt Mask gt Range HO to H4FFFFFFFFFF RST HO Example CDP LCOD Q HF Define long code mask Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Long Code Mask Q on page 95 SENSe CDPower LEVel ADJust This command adjusts the reference level of the R amp S FSV to the measured channel power This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSV or limiting the dynamic response by a too low signal to noise ratio Example CDP LEV ADJ Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power Usage Event Mode EVDO SENSe CDPower MAPPing lt Branch gt This command selects when the mapping mode is not Complex whether the or Q branch should be analyzed Parameters lt Branch gt 1 Q RST Example CDP MAPP Q Selects the Q branch Mode EVDO SENSe Subsystem SENSe CDPower MMODe lt Mode gt This command defines the mapping mode either automatically or user defined for all channel types Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO IOQ COMPlex 10Q or Q mapping COMPlex Complex mapping AUTO Data channel type Complex PILOT MAC and PREAMBLE channel types IOQ RST AUTO Example CDP MMODe COMP The pilot channel ty
144. Data RHO over all slots for the DATA area RHOMac RHO over all slots for the MAC area RHOPilot RHO over all slots for the pilot area RHOVerall RHO overall RHO1 RHOoverall 1 over all slots over all chips with start of averaging at the half slot limit RHO2 Example Usage Mode CALCulate Subsystem RHOoverall 2 over all slots over all chips with start of averaging at the quarter slot limit SFACtor spreading factor of the channel SLOT half slot number MS mode only SRATe symbol rate in ksps TFRame trigger to frame in sec TOFFset timing offset ins The Trigger to Frame value TFRame supplies a 9 if the trigger is at Free Run The Timing Phase Offset values TOFFset POFFset supply a 9 if timing and phase measurement is disabled refer to SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 274 or the number of active channels is higher than 50 CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES CDP Reads out total power Query only EVDO CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CENTer This command matches the center frequency to the frequency of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Example Selects the measurement window Selects the marker CALC MARK2 FUNC CENT Sets the center frequency to the frequency of marker 2 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PICH This command sets marker 1 to th
145. E 75 Select Channel Te EE 75 E Chanae TUBES erer 76 Bio EB ENTRE 76 D PU MMC 76 Channel lable Sb E 77 L Channel Search fleegt leieren recs N 77 L Inactive Channel Threshold entrer rrt 78 Ls gp 78 L NewiCopwlEdn tentent treten netten 78 B E 80 L Delete Channel crannan a ain ia an iE aE AER 80 V EE 80 E 81 GEN 81 e EE 81 GE 81 e EE 81 L Restore Default Tables ecisdet tirer t pcne Rie tra ret 81 Result Settirigs ie eed iie eve e red E EE a eR duda 81 20 MAMNKMKT 82 Lr C NENNEN UU T NE ON EP aeiae 83 Bi x 1 emm 83 FEIN cedo REIR seas 83 Mi ic E E 83 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements L Enhanced AIDOUBIRL ondes dee ee 83 BU Lme i dx AME T E E AORERE 84 El 4 SEMEN MM 84 Mil eil c MNT 84 Muere dz E EDT OE 85 Beso s Ee 85 Et E ENIRO 85 Display ee EE 85 MDGS EE 87 Settings Overview This softkey opens the Settings Overview dialog box that visualizes the data flow of the Code Domain Analyzer and summarizes all of the current settings In addition you can change the current settings via this dialog box To reset all values to their default state press the Set to Default button Invert Q Off Capture Length 3 Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Set Count SCH Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz SetTo Analyze 0 Ref Level 10 0 dBm Trigger Source Free Run Channel Type Pilot Ref Level O
146. ETRACSESES E er BEE 261 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum eese 262 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum eeeeeeeeee eene 262 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off DISPlay Subsystem Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Marker table is displayed OFF Marker table is not displayed AUTO Marker table is only displayed if 2 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example To activate the table display DISP MTAB ON To query the current state of the marker table display DISP MTAB DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command enlargens the measurement window indicated by the suffix to full screen The result display of the screen is by default the same as that of the first mea surement screen Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Size gt SMALI LARGe RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 SIZE LARG Maximizes the second measurement screen Mode CDMA EVDO DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SSELect This command selects which window screen is active Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters RST 1 Example DISP WIND1 SSEL Sets the window 1 active Mode CDMA EVDO DISPlay Subsystem
147. EWV6l cito e er ette ttt dee ao oe eae ae ND SENSeHAVERagesn COUNG m ere Sege SENSe AVERagesn STATes Trace rn ttr re nrbt rt terrre nre rerba Sa SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIO tibt EES EEN ee menge e cec de Edad SENSe BANDwidth BWIDiheVID6O ALTO icta etae tein ea nee tu eaa ER EE SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VID60O RATIO e tacere tret based fete onere cL ea E Ere od SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VID60O TYPE 2 2 2 1 kee ener eee e tege epe SE SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESOlutiori 2 7 2 Bera tnt tel tit ie een d rena AE SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT cccceesesceesseeeseeececeeecseeeeesaeeeeessesseesaesseeeaeeeeseaeeeeeeaees SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio SENSe BANDwidth BWIDthERESolution I YE 2 1 tn riter aint t e erobern SENSe GDPower AVERAge o eerte rt tetro rare Eee cp ete Pe E Lote ee dna PR E e ga Een Te SENSe CDPower EE SENSe CDPower CTYP6e EE EI E e ee e enge DEE E E e ee e e ue EE SENSe CDPower LCODell EI E e ee Ode 268 E E e ee e ET 268 SENSe CDPower OPERGaltIOn 5 tuni rn trente tr nh rere kie e a XR EE YR y XR ENEE EE iiu 268 SENSe CDPower ORDer E E e ee e EE SENSe CDPower PNOPFISCG wisi cc scecseicsccvscsassnatantares rer rie e povbevoccenseinadtadouscvscsyecessaetezsvnarscessdpaabitaeieeds SENSe GDPower PREFGrenCe isa iie ener eren dre adhe rr
148. Ee Re 270 E Eer RI E 271 SENSe JCDPOWeESETIOODRN E 271 SENSe CDPowerSET WAL Wel 2 cfd niaaa aE E aait 271 ES ETSI Teo oy EE 272 Ek Kuebe RTE 272 SENSe CDPower T Mas tereti so cepe eL Lace puvk cu eee Xv TL E REESEN EEN 274 SENSe Subsystem SENSe CDPower AVERage lt State gt This command can be precisely enabled by means of ON when the Code Domain Power analysis is active refer to CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 204 If averaging is active the CDP is calculated over all slots and displayed as called for by the 1xEV DO standard Parameters State ON OFF RST 0 Example CDP AVER ON Activate averaging CDP relative over all slots and display on screen A Mode EVDO Manual operation See CDP Average on page 85 See CDP Average on page 104 SENSe CDPower CODE lt CodeNumber gt This command selects the code number The maximum number depends on the chan nel type Parameters lt CodeNumber gt Code number depending on the channel type as described in the table below RST 0 Example CDP CODE 11 Selects code number 11 Mode EVDO Manual operation See Select on page 87 See Select on page 106 Channel Type Spreading factor Code number PILOT 32 0 2 31 MAC REV 0 64 0 63 REV A 128 0 127 PREAMBLE REV 0 32 0 31 REV A 64 0 63 DATA 64 0 31 SENSe Subsystem SENSe CDPower CTYPe lt ChannelType gt This command is used to select the cha
149. F power Manual operation See Gated Trigger On Off on page 148 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt COMMent Comment Defines a comment for one of the traces for gated triggering Suffix ko 1 6 trace Parameters Comment Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 COMM SlotA Manual operation See Gate Ranges on page 148 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt PERiod Value This command defines the length of the period to be traced using gated triggering SENSe Subsystem Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace Parameters Value numeric value RST 0s Example SWE EGAT TRACI PER 5ms Defines the period for gated triggering to 5 ms Manual operation See Gate Ranges on page 148 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STARt lt range gt Value This command defines the starting point for the range to be traced using gated trigger ing Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace range 1 3 range Parameters Value numeric value RST OFF Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAR1 3ms Sets the Starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms Manual operation See Gate Ranges on page 148 a SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STATe lt range gt State This command activates or deactivates tracing for a specific range using gated trigger ing Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace lt range gt 1 3 range Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Examp
150. FEED Subsystem on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 19 Code Domain Error MS Mode on page 326 6 1 4 16 Mag Error vs Chip Mag Error vs Chip activates the Magnitude Error versus chip display The magnitude error is displayed for all chips of the slected slot The magnitude error is calculated by the difference of the magnitude of received signal and magnitude of reference signal The reference signal is estimated from the channel configuration of all active channels The magnitude error is related to the square root of the mean power of reference sig nal and given in percent Result data for remote query SCPI command CALC FEED XTIM CDP CHIP MAGN see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 204 TRACe lt 1 4 gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt When the trace data for this mode is queried a list of magnitude error values of all chips at the selected slot is returned The values are calculated as the magnitude dif ference between the received signal and the reference signal for each chip in and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 64 6 1 4 17 6 1 4 18 6 1 4 19 Measurements and Result Displays Phase Error vs Chip Phase Error vs Chip activates the phase error versus chip display The phase error is displayed for all chips of the slected slot The phas
151. IM ESP PCL LIM ABS Manual operation See Used Power Classes on page 141 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MAXimum lt Level gt This command sets the upper limit level for one power class The unit is dBm The limit always ends at 200 dBm i e the upper limit of the last power class can not be set If more than one power class is in use the upper limit must equal the lower limit of the next power class Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt RST 200 CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 MAX 40 dBm Sets the maximum power value of the first power class to 40 dBm Manual operation See PMin PMax on page 142 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MINimum lt Level gt This command sets the minimum lower level limit for one power class The unit is dBm The limit always start at 200 dBm i e the first lower limit can not be set If more than one power class is in use the lower limit must equal the upper limit of the previous power class Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric_value gt RST 200 for class1 otherwise 200 Example CALC LIM ESP PCL2 MIN 40 dBm Sets the minimum power value of the second power class to
152. INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 118 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital baseband IQ input signal is set automatically by the connected device if the currently used sample rate is provided indicated by the lt SampleRateType gt parameter in the result of the 1TNPut DIO CDEVice command This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface B17 description of the base unit Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ SRAT AUTO ON Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines the electronic attenuation If necessary the command also turns the electronic attenuator on This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 25 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Parameters lt Attenuation gt 0 25 RST 0 dB OFF Example INP1 EATT 10 dB Mode all Manu
153. LC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ALT2 RES Queries the limit check result in the second alternate adjacent channels CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe lt State gt This command switches on and off the limit check for adjacent channel power meas urements The commands CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe or CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate Channel RELative STATe must be used in addition to specify whether the limit check is to be performed for the upper lower adjacent channel or for the alternate adjacent channels Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on the ACLR limit check Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 129 See Relative Limit on page 130 See Absolute Limit on page 130 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check Note that for SEM measurements the limit line suffix lt k gt is irrelevant as only one spe cific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class To get a valid result you have to perform a complete mea
154. LCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult It should be noted that a complete measurement must be performed between Switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are available Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH REL STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels Manual operation See Absolute Limit on page 130 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the relative limit of the upper lower adjacent channe
155. M RMS Peak Code Domain Error Channel Table Code Domain Error Power E Composite Data EVM ps Composite Data Constellation e Composite Data Bitstream This softkey opens the Display Config dialog box to select the result display configu ration The Code Domain Analyzer provides the following result display configurations for measurements in the code domain Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Result Display Configuration Definition Code Domain Power Code Domain Power result display Result Summary Various measurement results in a table Power vs Half Slot Power of the selected channel versus all half slots Power vs Symbol Power of the selected channel and of the selected slot versus all symbols Composite EVM RMS Averaged error between the test signal and the ideal reference signal Channel Table Channel occupancy table Composite Data EVM EVM display for special composite data channel only available for subtypes 2 or higher see Subtype on page 102 Composite Data Constellation Constellation of the special composite data channel only available for subtypes 2 or higher see Subtype on page 102 Composite Data Bitstream Display of demodulated bits for the special composite data channel only available for subtypes 2 or higher see Subtype on page 102 Symbol Constellation Channel constellation of the modulated signal at
156. Measurements Capture Length IQ Capture Settings Sets the number of slots you want to analyze The input value is always in multiples of the slots The maximum capture length is 32 The Capture Length field is available if Set Count equals 1 The default value is 3 Remote command SENSe CDPower IQLength on page 266 Set Count IQ Capture Settings Defines the number of consecutive sets to be stored in the instrument s IQ memory One set consists of 32 slots The R amp S FSV can capture up to 15680 slots about 26 seconds in a single sweep i e the possible value range is from 1 to 490 sets The default setting is 1 In that case you can still define the number of slots see Cap ture Length In case you want to capture more than one set the capture length is always 32 The R amp S FSV automatically sets the capture length to 32 and the Capture Length field is not available for modification Remote command SENSe CDPower SET COUNt on page 271 Set to Analyze IQ Capture Settings Selects a specific set for further analysis The value range depends on the Set Count and is between 0 and Set Count 1 Remote command SENSe CDPower SET VALue on page 271 Trigger Source Free Run IQ Capture Settings The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog b
157. Menus for RF Measurements The following rules apply for the limits e A separate limit can be defined for each adjacent channel The limit applies to both the upper and the lower adjacent channel e A relative and or absolute limit can be defined The check of both limit values can be activated independently e The R amp S FSV checks adherence to the limits irrespective of whether the limits are absolute or relative or whether the measurement is carried out with absolute or rel ative levels If both limits are active and if the higher of both limit values is excee ded the measured value is marked by a preceding asterisk Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe on page 229 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult on page 225 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative on page 227 Relative Limit Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Defines a limit relative to the carrier signal Remote command CALC LIM ACP ON see CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe on page 229 CALC LIM ACP lt adjacent channel gt OdBc 0dBc CALC LIM ACP lt adjacent channel gt STAT ON Absolute Limit Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Defines an absolute limit Remote command CALC LIM ACP ON see CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe on page 229 CALC LIM ACP
158. N Switches on the CCDF measurement CALCulate lt n gt STATistics NSAMples lt NoMeasPoints gt This command sets the number of measurement points to be acquired for the statisti cal measurement functions Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt NoMeasPoints gt 100 to 1E9 RST 100000 Example CALC STAT NSAM 500 Sets the number of measurement points to be acquired to 500 Manual operation See of Samples on page 145 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet This command resets the scaling of the X and Y axes in a statistical measurement The following values are set x axis ref level 20 dBm x axis range APD 100 dB x axis range CCDF 20 dB y axis upper limit 1 0 y axis lower limit 1E 6 Suffix lt n gt Example Manual operation irrelevant CALC STAT PRES Resets the scaling for statistical functions See Default Settings on page 148 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics RESult lt Trace gt lt ResultType gt This command reads out the results of statistical measurements of a recorded trace Suffix lt n gt lt Trace gt Parameters lt ResultType gt Example irrelevant 1 6 trace MEAN PEAK CFACtor ALL MEAN Average RMS power in dBm measured during the measure ment time PEAK Peak power in dBm measured during the measurement time CFACtor Determined CREST factor ratio of peak power to average
159. N Video filter ahead of the logarithmic amplifier SENSe FREQuency subsystem EE ee e e 293 SENSe FREQuency CENT nS TEP uani apaina aana iaai npin ainena aai ai 293 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO cette tette ttes 293 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK icio aeria dong EEN 293 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTOor eeesesseeeee eene nennen aa tana 294 SENSeJ FREQusncy GEET eege ease staged cepa uud uo SEELEN dek 294 SENSE FRE QUSH SPAN orco EE 295 ISENSeIEREOuency SPAN FULL 295 SENS FREQUEN S TARE Rm 295 SENSE FREQUENCY EE 295 SENSe Subsystem SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency frequency domain or measuring fre quency time domain Parameters lt Frequency gt Range 0 to fmax RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz fmax iS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz Manual operation See Center on page 72 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt Range 1 to fmax RST 0 1 x lt span value gt Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT STEP 120 MHz Manual operation See CF Stepsize on page 107 See Manual on page 154 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO State This command couples the step size of the center frequency to the span ON or sets the value of the center f
160. NCORrection lt Mode gt This command turns noise cancellation on and off If noise cancellation is on the R amp S FSV performs a reference measurement to deter mine its inherent noise and subtracts the result from the channel power measurement result first active trace only The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolu tion bandwidth and level setting Therefore the correction function is disabled when ever one of these parameters is changed A corresponding message is displayed on the screen Noise correction must be turned on again manually after the change Parameters lt Mode gt ON Performs noise correction OFF Performs no noise correction AUTO Performs noise correction After a parameter change noise correction is restarted automati cally and a new correction measurement is performed RST OFF Example POW NCOR ON Manual operation See Noise Correction on page 133 SENSe POWer TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command assigns the channel adjacent channel power measurement to the indi cated trace The corresponding trace must be active i e its state must be different from blank Note The measurement of the occupied bandwidth OBW is performed on the trace on which marker 1 is positioned To evaluate another trace marker 1 must be posi tioned to another trace with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1to6 7 6 2 6 SENSe Subs
161. NDwidth BWIDth ACHannel lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the channel bandwidth of the adjacent channel of the radio transmission system If the bandwidth of the adjacent channel is changed the band widths of all alternate adjacent channels are automatically set to the same value With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 181 Parameters lt Bandwidth gt 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID ACH 30 kHz Sets the bandwidth of all adjacent channels to 30 kHz Manual operation See Bandwidth on page 126 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate lt channel gt lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the channel bandwidth of the specified alternate adjacent chan nels of the radio transmission system If the channel bandwidth of one alternate adja cent channel is changed e g channel 3 the bandwidth of all subsequent alternate adjacent channels e g 4 11 is automatically set to the same value With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 181 Suffix lt channel gt 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters Bandwidth 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Exam
162. NSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 294 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Amplitude menu in 1xEV DO Analysis modes for CDA and Power vs time measurements For all other RF measurements see chapter 6 3 4 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu for RF Meas urements on page 156 Rof level M 108 E 108 L Auto Scale Ahead pietre teresa ce peii eie tpe dc ge osi RU 108 L Y Ass ET iet re d Fave du n fnit 109 L Y Axis ITO socie rere tret rtc cba rater nrbe 109 Ref teval OffSal ue edi rein cede d te eae heen e De acer tee feta vedi i d deg 109 Preamp ONO MT EET 109 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual 109 E sel E ne ME En D 110 ELAtten OMOR mS 110 El Atten Mode e Eu DE 110 Duos epe E 111 Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distor tion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured cor rectly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 260 Scale Opens a submenu to define the amplitude scaling type This softkey and its submenu is available for code domain measurements in BTS mode K82 Auto Scale Once Scale Automatically scales the y axis of the grid of the selecte
163. Off Frequency Result Settings Defines the cutoff frequency of the RRC filter The cutoff frequency is the frequency at which the passband of the filter begins Possible values are between 0 1 MHz and 2 4 MHz in 1 Hz steps The default value is 1 25 MHz This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 250 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 249 CDP Average Result Settings Activate CDP Average and the Code Domain Analysis is averaged over all slots in the set For channel type Data and Preamble this calculation assumes that preambles of different lengths do not occur in the slots If active ALL is displayed in the Slot field above the measurement screen This softkey is available for Code Domain Analysis and is required by the 1xEV DO standard Remote command SENSe CDPower AVERage on page 265 Code Power Result Settings Selects for the Code Domain Power measurement whether the y values are displayed as an absolute dBm or relative dB In relative mode the reference is the total power of the channel type Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 204 Display Config This softkey opens the Display Config dialog box to select the result display In the Code Domain Analyzer the results are displayed in up to four screens Any result can be displayed in either screen Menu and Softkey Description for CD
164. P 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 116 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation Duration This command defines the duration of the level measurement used to determine the optimal reference level automatically for SENS ADJ LEV ON SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt Duration gt lt numeric value gt in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 Manual operation See Meas Time Manual on page 116 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSV determines the length of the measure ment that is performed while determining the ideal reference level Parameters Mode AUTO Automatically determines the measurement length MANual Manual definition of the measurement length RST AUTO Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR MODE MAN Specifies manual definition of the measurement duration ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 Specifies the duration manually SENSe ADJust FREQuency This command defines the center frequency and the reference level automatically by determining the highest level in the frequency span Example ADJ FREQ Manual operation See Auto Freq on page 115 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command automatically sets the optimal reference level for t
165. Peak Code Domain Error result display XTIM CDP ERR SUMM Result Summary result display XTIM CDP MACCuracy Composite EVM result display XTIM CDP PVChip Power vs Chip result display XTIM CDP PVSLot Power vs Slot result display XTIM CDP PVSYmbol Power versus Symbol result display XTIM CDP SYMB CCONst Channel Constellation result display for composite data MS mode only XTIM CDP SYMB CEVM Symbol Error Vector Magnitude result display for composite data MS mode only XTIM CDP SYMB CONSt CALCulate Subsystem Channel Constellation result display XTIM CDP SYMB EVM Symbol Error Vector Magnitude result display XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM MAGNitude Result display of the symbol magnitude error XTIMe CDPower SYMBol EVM PHASe Result display of the symbol phase error XTIMe CDP CHIP MAGNitude Result display magnitude error versus chip XTIMe CDPower CHIP PHASe Result display phase error versus chip RST XPOW CDP RAT Example CALC FEED XTIM CDP MACC Selects the Composite EVM result display Mode EVDO Manual operation See Code Power on page 85 See Code Power on page 104 7 2 2 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Subsystem The CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion subsystem checks the marker functions in the instrument CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESUuIt c cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 206 CAL Culate nz M bker mzFUNGCHonCENTer eene nnns nnns anas 209 GALCGulatesmsMARKersm siFUNGtORPIQP I
166. Preamble 64 chips long 1 3 32 BPSK I Data 16 0 16 8 PSK 1 16 8 PSK 2 16 8 PSK 13 16 8 PSK 14 16 8 PSK 15 16 8 PSK Table 6 5 Base station channel table DO16QAM with 16QAM modulation in DATA area Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I 3 64 BPSK I 4 64 BPSK I 34 64 BPSK Q 35 64 BPSK Q Further Information Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Preamble 64 chips long 1 3 32 BPSK I Data 16 0 16 16QAM 1 16 16QAM 2 16 16QAM 13 16 16QAM 14 16 16QAM 15 16 16QAM Table 6 6 Base station test model DO IDLE for idle slot configuration Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I Table 6 7 Mobile station channel table PICH Channel type Code channel Mapping Activity Walsh Code SF PICH 0 16 l 1111 1111 1111 1111 Table 6 8 Mobile station channel table PICHRRI Channel type Code channel Mapping Activity Walsh Code SF PICH 0 16 l 1111 1111 1111 1111 RRI 0 16 l 1010 1010 1010 1010 Table 6 9 Mobile station channel table 5CHANS Channel type Code channel Mapping Activity Walsh Code SF PICH 0 16 l 1111 1111 1111 1111 RRI 0 16 l 1010 1010 1010 1010 DATA 2 4 Q 1111 1111 1111 1111 ACK 4 8 l 0000 0000 0000 1000 DRC 8 16 Q 0110 00
167. Pulse EE 165 L RBW VBW Noise EE 166 L RBW VBW WAU E 166 L Span RBW Auto E EE 166 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements L Span RBW KMaengt side 166 L E e WEE 167 SI ee 167 Res BW Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the resolution bandwidth The available resolution bandwidths are specified in the data sheet For details on the correlation between resolution bandwidth and filter type refer to chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 181 Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth For rotary knob or UP DNARROW key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or down wards The manual input mode of the resolution bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next to the RBW display in the channel bar This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF It is also available for Power vs Time measurements Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 289 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 289 Res BW Auto Couples the resolution bandwidth to the selected span for span gt 0 If you change the span the resolution bandwidth is automatically adjusted This setting is recommended if you need the ideal resolution bandwidth in relation to a particular span This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Occupi
168. R amp S FSV K84 K85 1xEV DO Analysis Operating Manual Ch nne Slot ULNIS Start Code n Stop Code 63 IQ capturing 1176 7632 02 04 Test amp Measurement Operating Manual This manual describes the following R amp S FSV options e R amp S FSV K84 1310 8803 02 Ss R amp S FSV K85 1310 8778 02 This manual describes the following R amp S9FSV models with firmware version 2 30 and higher R amp S FSV A 1321 3008K04 R amp S FSV 7 1321 3008K07 R amp S FSV 13 1321 3008K13 R amp S FSV 30 1321 3008K30 R amp S FSV 40 1321 3008K39 R amp S FSV 40 1321 3008K40 It also applies to the following R amp S9FSV models However note the differences described in chapter 1 4 Notes for Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx Models on page 9 R amp S FSV 3 1307 9002K03 R amp S FSV 7 1307 9002K07 R amp S FSV 13 1307 9002K13 R amp S FSV 30 1307 9002K30 R amp S FSV 40 1307 9002K39 R amp S FSV 40 1307 9002K40 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2014 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Muhldorfstr 15 81671 Munchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax
169. R amp S FSV This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically Res BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 0 001 See SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 291 Span RBW Manual Coupling Ratio Activates the manual input of the coupling ratio This setting takes effect if you define the resolution bandwidth automatically Res BW Auto 6 3 6 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements The span resolution bandwidth ratio can be set in the range 1 to 10000 Remote command BAND RAT 0 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio on page 290 Default Coupling Coupling Ratio Sets all coupled functions to the default state AUTO In addition the ratio RBW VBW is set to SINE 1 1 and the ratio SPAN RBW to 100 This softkey is available for Power vs Time measurements Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 289 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 291 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 311 Filter Type Opens a submenu to select the filter type This softkey and its submenu are available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF Instead of opening a submenu this softkey opens the Sweep List dialog box to select the filter type when measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask The submenu contains the following softkeys e Normal 3 dB e CISPR
170. R amp S FSV by replacing modules The manual includes the following chap ters Chapter 1 Performance Test Chapter 2 Adjustment Chapter 3 Repair Chapter 4 Software Update Installing Options Chapter 5 Documents Online Help The online help contains context specific help on operating the R amp S FSV and all avail able options It describes both manual and remote operation The online help is instal led on the R amp S FSV by default and is also available as an executable chm file on the CD delivered with the instrument 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The cur rent release notes are provided in the Internet Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin prog
171. R measurements ascritti 130 limit check ACLR measurement 129 Long Code Mask K83 remote control ssusss 266 267 KBD 95 Low pass Filter K84 K85 Lower Level Hysteresis eiii EE 116 Lower case commande issia ini anairen 202 M MAC Channel E 76 Magnitude Error vs Chip EE 327 mapping Te WE ett WEE K84 remote command ssesseseieseeeeereereisrrerenereen Mode K84 remote command Max Hold trace mode miissisiiasasiissiinas Measure Channel Table C measurement Ld m m 124 CCDF crocie eti Eegen 144 Code Domain Analyzer s 123 Crest Factor wee 144 Occupied Bandwidth 143 ower siens m1239 Power vs Time we 149 Spectrum Emission Mask seseeesees 134 measurement examples cM HIT 20 Measurement menu sss 121 menu LC Une 151 SPAM WE 154 Sweep 167 Menu SET D E 161 Min Hold trace mode ssessssseeee 114 180 Multi carrier d 83 VAI 96 multi carrier filter RB C 84 Ls oT 96 N Negative Peak detector n recti iter 178 lee gl E Ee 150 noise CONECO ME Source external siicc cencicaciesesseccescasacnessdzerceccasseets Normalization KIA X K84 remote command
172. RACe lt n gt DATA lt Data gt Returns the measurement results for the selected trace Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Query parameters lt Data gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 CTABle LIST TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 Reads out the trace data of measurement windows 1 to 4 The return values for each measurement type are described in chapter 7 9 TRACe DATA Results on page 314 CTABle For the Channel Table result display reads out the maximum values of the timing phase offset between each assigned chan nel and the pilot channel see also chapter 7 9 14 Channel Table CTABle BTS Mode on page 324 LIST Returns the peak list For each peak the following entries are given lt peak frequency gt lt absolute level of the peak gt lt distance to the limit line gt Usage Query only Mode EVDO Manual operation See List Evaluation On Off on page 139 7 9 TRACe DATA Results The measurement results for a specific trace are queried using TRACe lt n gt DATA The format of the results varies according to the measurement type and is described here 7 9 1 Code Domain Power BTS mode 315 7 9 2 Code Domain Power MS mode 316 7 9 3 General Results Channel Results BTS Mode 317 TRACe DATA Results 7 9 4 Result Summary MS Mode 318 4 9 5 Powervs Chip BTS Mode ehh ete Ded ed er andae cet o 320 7 9 6 Power vs Halfslot MS Mode 320 ZC Power ve Symbole rhe rite tta ce tec ee a
173. S FSV averages the measured values and compares the results to the emission envelope mask You can define the emission envelope mask in the corresponding submenu Setting Default value Frequency Span 0 Zero Span Sweep Time 833 38 Ms RBW 3 MHz 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 2 3 6 2 4 6 2 5 6 2 6 6 2 7 6 2 8 6 2 9 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Setting Default value VBW 10 MHz Detector RMS Trace Mode Average For details on the softkeys of the Power vs Time measurement see Power vs Time on page 149 in the Measurement menu Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements The following chapters describe the menus and softkeys specific to 1xEV DO Analysis R amp S FSV 84 and R amp S FSV 85 options for CDA measurements The Lines menu is not available in the 1xEV DO Analysis modes The Span menu is not available for code domain measurements and signal power measurements The Bandwidth menu is not available for code domain measurements All menus not described here are the same as for the base unit see the description there Importing and Exporting UO Data UO data can be imported from a file for processing in R amp S FSV K84 K85 and cap tured UO data can be stored to a file IQ Import IQ Export softkeys in the Save Rcl menu For details see the base unit description To display help to a softkey press the HELP key and then the softkey for wh
174. S mode the number of results depends on the number of symbols and is between 2 and 100 In MS mode the number of values depends on the spreading factor Spreading factor 16 64 values Spreading factor 8 128 values Spreading factor 4 256 values Composite Constellation The command returns two values the real and imaginary parts for each chip in the fol lowing order re chip 0 gt im chip 0 re chip 1 gt im chip 1 gt re chip n im chip n gt The number of results corresponds to the number of chips from the 1024 chips in a half slot Magnitude Error vs Chip The comand returns a list of magnitude error values of all chips at the selected slot The values are calculated as the magnitude difference between the received signal and the reference signal for each chip in 96 and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot Other Commands Referenced in this Manual 7 9 24 Phase Error vs Chip The comand returns a list of phase error values of all chips at the selected slot The values are calculated as the phase difference between the received signal and the ref erence signal for each chip in degrees and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot 7 9 25 Symbol Magnitude Error The comand returns the magnitude error in of each symbol at the selected slot The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected channel
175. SF 2 64 Sym Rate ksps 19 2 ksps automatically calculated Modulation BPSK I Power dB 0 dB automatically calculated State Off DomainConflict No automatically calculated To change the channel type use the dropdown menu that opens when selecting high lighting the Channel Type field that should be changed modulation settings are changed in the same way To change the channel number type another channel number in the form Channel Number SpreadingFactor or just the code number in the respective field Confirm the change with the ENTER key To activate or deactivate a channel select the State field and confirm with the ENTER key The R amp S FSV automatically checks for conflicts between two active channels Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 245 Delete Channel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Deletes the selected channel without further notice Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Meas New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Initiates a measurement in Auto Search mode see Channel Search Mode on page 77 The measurement results are applied to the active channel table The active channel table is overwritten without further notice The softkey is only available if you have selected the Auto Search mode in the Chan nel Table Settings dialog box Sort New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Sorts the table according to the following rules F
176. SPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILTer TYPE lt Type gt This command sets the filter type for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 278 Suffix range 1 20 range SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt Type gt NORMal Gaussian filters CFILter channel filters RRC RRC filters PULSe EMI 6dB filters P5 5 Pole filters RST NORM The available bandwidths of the filters are specified in the data sheet Example ESP RANG1 FILT TYPE RRC Sets the RRC filter type for range 1 Manual operation See Filter Type on page 135 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARt lt Frequency gt This command sets the start frequency for the specified range In order to change the start stop frequency of the first last range select the appropriate span If you set a span that is smaller than the overall span of the ranges the mea surement includes only the ranges that lie within the defined span and have a minimum span of 20 Hz The first and last range are adapted to the given span as long as the minimum span of 20 Hz is not violated Note the rules for the lt Frequency gt parameter specified in chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 192 Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Frequency gt numeric value RST 250 0 MHz range 1 2 52 MHz range 2 2 52 MHz ra
177. SPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 100DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 258 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Range Log 50 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 50 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 50DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 258 Range Log 10 dB x Axis Range lt Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 10 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 10DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 258 Range Log 5 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 5 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 5DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 258 Range Log 1 dB x Axis Range Scaling CCDF Sets the level display range to 1 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page
178. SV B17 In frequency sweep mode the analyzer provides several possible methods of sweep ing e Sweep on page 164 e FFT on page 164 not available with 5 Pole filters channel filters or RRC filters see chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type on page 181 e Auto on page 165 Sweep Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to standard analog frequency sweep In the standard sweep mode the local oscillator is set to provide the spectrum quasi analog from the start to the stop frequency Remote command SWE TYPE SWE see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 311 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements FFT Sweep Type Sets the Sweep Type to FFT mode The FFT sweep mode samples on a defined frequency value and transforms it to the spectrum by fast Fourier transformation FFT FFT is not available when using 5 Pole filters Channel filters or RRC filters In this case sweep mode is used Note The same applies when a tracking generator internal or external options R amp S FSV B9 B10 is active Remote command SWE TYPE FFT see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 311 Auto Sweep Type Automatically sets the fastest available Sweep Type for the current measurement Auto mode is set by default Remote command SWE TYPE AUTO see SENSe SWEep TYPE on page 311 FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type Defines the filter mode to be used for FFT filters by defining the p
179. T RELative Example POW ACH MODE REL Sets the adjacent channel measurement mode to relative Manual operation See ACLR Abs Rel on page 131 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ACHannel lt Name gt This command defines a name for the adjacent channel The name is displayed in the result diagram and the result table Parameters lt Name gt RST Adj Example POW ACH NAME ACH XYZ Defines the name of the adjacent channel as XYZ Manual operation See Names on page 129 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate channel Name This command defines a name for the specified alternate channel The name is dis played in the result diagram and the result table Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters Name RST ALT 1 11 Example POW ACH NAME ALT3 XYZ Defines the name of the third alternate channel as XYZ Manual operation See Names on page 129 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel channel Name This command defines a name for the specified TX channel The name is displayed in the result diagram and the result table Suffix channel 1 12 the TX channel SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt Name gt RST TX lt 1 12 gt Example POW ACH NAME CHAN3 XYZ Defines the name of the third transmission channel as XYZ Manual operation See Names on page 129 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet lt Setting gt This command adjusts the frequency span t
180. TRACE1 Read out CDP relative of I branch 4 0 7 0 1 4 8 54 2 0 PICH is active 4 4 56 7 0 4 12 55 3 0 4 2 48 3 3 4 10 48 1 3 DATA 2 4 is quasi inactive 4 6 49 0 3 4 14 48 5 3 4 1 54 4 0 4 9 55 2 0 4 5 51 2 0 4 13 54 3 0 4 3 54 5 0 4 11 55 7 0 4 7 56 6 0 4 15 52 3 0 TRAC TRACE2 Read out CDP relative of Q branch 4 0 53 3 3 4 8 52 4 0 PICH is quasi inactive 4 4 51 2 0 4 12 51 8 0 2 S LOO Ee y Channel 2 4 is now consolidated and 4 1 52 3 0 4 9 55 5 0 displayed with accumulated power 4 5 55 1 0 4 13 57 6 0 4 3 54 6 0 4 11 54 3 0 4 7 51 3 0 4 15 52 5 0 8 Status Reporting System of the 1xEV DO Analysis Detailed information on the status registers of the base system is given in the base unit description In this section only the new and altered status registers for the 1xEV DO Analysis options K84 and K85 are described The R amp S FSV K84 K85 use the STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Although this register is provided by the base system the 1xEV DO Analysis options use different bits and definitions The STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register contains information on the error situation in the code domain analysis of the 1xEV DO Analysis options The bits can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition and STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt on page 313 Bit No Meaning 0 This bit is not used 1 F
181. Tenuation AUTO on page 283 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements RF Attenuator Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the attenuation value for that range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation on page 283 Preamp Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Switches the preamplifier on or off Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut GAIN STATe on page 284 Transd Factor Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets a transducer for the specified range You can only choose a transducer that fulfills the following conditions e The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range The x axis is linear e The unit is dB Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range TRANsducer on page 288 Limit Check 1 4 Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets the type of limit check for all ranges For details on limit checks see the base unit description Working with Lines in SEM The limit state affects the availability of all limit settings Abs Limit Start on page 136 Abs Limit Stop on page 137 Rel Limit Start on page 137 Rel Limit Stop on page 137 Depending on the number of active power classes see Power Class dialog box the number of limits that can be set varies Up to four limits are possible The sweep list is extended accordi
182. The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey This softkey resets the level measurement duration for automatic leveling to the default value of 100 ms Upper Level Hysteresis Settings Defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto matically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer on page 275 Lower Level Hysteresis Settings Defines a lower threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto matically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer on page 275 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Input Output menu for CDA measurements For RF measurements see chapter 6 3 7 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Measurements on page 171 leif GCA CIC sv 117 ee 117 elt SI 117 ei AE 117 L Connected Device cccececsssssecssssessseescecsscscessectsccsecaesecaesaesscaeeatceansarsecaeees 147 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements FOE 118 L Ful Scale Leyal EE 118 ur 1 get 118 L Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level 118 Digital IQ EE 118 LEE 119 BEN 119 arid N NE LU UU IM 120 EE 120 E EE 120 e EE 120 EE 120 Input
183. This command selects the specified XML file under C r_s instr sem_std If the file is stored in a subdirectory include the relative path Example ESP PRES WCDMA 3GPP DL PowerClass 31 39 xml Selects the PowerClass 31 39 xml XML file in the C R_S instr sem_std WCDMA 3GPP DL directory ESP PRES W CDMA 3GPP DL 31 39 dBm The query returns information about the selected standard the link direction and the power class If no standard has been selected the query returns None Manual operation See Load Standard on page 143 SENSe ESPectrum PRESet RESTore This command copies the XML files from the C NR SNVinstrNsem backup folder to the C NR SNinstrNsem std folder Files of the same name are overwritten SENSe Subsystem Example ESP PRES REST Restores the originally provided XML files Manual operation See Restore Standard Files on page 143 SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STORe lt FileName gt This command stores the current settings as presettings in the specified XML file under C Nr sNinstrNsem backup Parameters lt FileName gt Example ESP PRES STOR WCDMAN3GPPNDLNPowerClass 31 39 xml Stores the settins in the PowerClass 31 39 xml file in the C R_S instr sem_std WCDMA 3GPP DL directory Manual operation See Save As Standard on page 143 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution Value This command sets the RBW value for the
184. This command sets the level of the external trigger source in Volt Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5 V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe Type This command selects the slope of the trigger signal The selected trigger slope applies to all trigger signal sources Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Type POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Trigger Polarity on page 75 TRIGger n SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source IF power and RF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth exten sion option R amp S FSV B160 For details on trigger modes refer to the Trg Gate Source softkey in the base unit description Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Source IMMediate Free Run EXTern External trigger IFPower Power trigger at the second intermediate frequency RFPower Power trigger at the first intermediate frequency TIME Time interval PSEN External power sensor requires R amp S FSV K9 option RST IMMediate Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Trigger Source Free Run on page 74 See Trigger Source External on page 74 7 10 3 Other Referenc
185. Times LIST RESUlt 2 eii iecore tee ties 253 GONFigure GDPower BTS REVISION EE 254 CONFigure CDPower BETS RFSLoOt etiaro neret e prt renta eu te Ch aaa ENEE 254 Elei Le re Re CET KEE 255 CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass lt Bandclass gt This command selects the bandclass for the measurement Parameters lt Bandclass gt CONFigure Subsystem 011 2 13 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 21 22 0 800 MHz band 1 1900 MHz PCS 2 TACS band 3 3A JTACS band see Bandclass on page 124 4 Korean PCS band 5 450 MHz NMT 6 2 GHz IMT 2000 7 700 MHz band 8 1800 MHz band 9 900 MHz band 10 Secondary 800 MHz band 11 400 MHz European PAMR band 12 800 MHz PAMR band 13 2 5 GHz IMT2000 Extension 14 US PCS 1 9GHz Band 15 AWS Band 16 US 2 5 GHz 17 US 2 5 GHz 21 3B JTACS band see Bandclass on page 124 22 3C JTACS band see Bandclass on page 124 RST 0 CONFigure Subsystem Example CONF CDP BCL 1 Selects band class 1 1900 MHz Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Bandclass on page 124 See Bandclass on page 142 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe lt State gt This command activates or deactivates the RECENT channel table To select another channel table use the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect com mand Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP CTAB OFF D
186. VM error vector magnitude of composite data channel MS mode only CDERms RMS value of EVM error vector magnitude of composite data channel MS mode only CDPabsolute channel power absolute in dBm CDPRelative channel power relative in dB CERRor chip rate error in ppm CHANnel channel number CODMulation modulation type of the composite data channel MS mode only CODPower power of the composite data channel MS mode only DACtive number of active DATA channels DMTYPe modulation type of the DATA channel type 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16QAM DRPich Delta RRI PICH in dB EVMPeak error vector magnitude peak in EVMRms error vector magnitude rms in FERRor frequency error in Hz FERPpm frequency error in ppm IQIMbalance CALCulate Subsystem UO imbalance in IQOFfset UO offset in 96 MACCuracy composite EVM in 96 MACTive number of active MAC channels MTYPe modulation type of the channel type O BPSK I 1 BPSK Q 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16QAM 5 2BPSk PCDerror peak code domain error in dB PDATa absolute power in the DATA channel type PLENGth Length of preamble in chips PMAC absolute power in the MAC channel type POFFset phase offset in rad PPICh Pilot power in dBm MS mode only PPILot absolute power in the PILOT channel type PPReamble absolute power in the PREAMBLE channel type PRRI RRI power in dBm PTOTal total power RHO RHO value for the selected channel type slot RHO
187. Wer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNtL esistente rna 304 SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDI0 ENEE 304 SENSe POWerHSPG ed ina a AE NEN N RE 304 SENSeJPOWSENCOREGGOHOD EE 305 SENSeJPOWher TRAGB EN 305 SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs lt ChannelPairs gt This command sets the number of adjacent channels upper and lower channel in pairs The figure 0 stands for pure channel power measurement Parameters lt ChannelPairs gt 0 to 12 RST 1 Example POW ACH ACP 3 Sets the number of adjacent channels to 3 i e the adjacent channel and alternate adjacent channels 1 and 2 are switched on Manual operation See of Adj Chan on page 125 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel lt channel gt lt Bandwidth gt This command sets the channel bandwidth of the specified TX channel in the radio communication system The bandwidths of adjacent channels are not influenced by this modification With SENSe lt source gt POWer HSPeed set to ON steep edged channel filters are available For further information on filters refer to chapter 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 181 SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt Bandwidth gt 100 Hz to 40 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH BWID CHAN2 30 kHz Sets the bandwidth of the TX channel 2 to 30 kHz Manual operation See Bandwidth on page 126 See Channel Bandwidth span gt 0 on page 144 SENSe POWer ACHannel BA
188. Y SPAC LIN Select a linear scale Manual operation See Range Log 100 dB on page 145 See Range Log 50 dB on page 146 See Range Log 10 dB on page 146 See Range Log 5 dB on page 146 See Range Log 1 dB on page 146 See Range Log Manual on page 147 See Range Linear on page 147 See Range Lin Unit on page 147 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum lt Value gt This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for the selected result display Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Y Axis Maximum on page 109 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value of the y axis for the selected result display Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant INSTrument Subsystem lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN
189. absolute level of the error power no differ Lo el ence of power between the Hadamard and dB BitReverse order power ID power indication 0 1 3 0 inactive channel 1 active channel 3 Quasi inactive channel on the analyzed branch the channel is not occupied but an active channel exists on the other branch The Hadamard or BitReverse order is important for sorting the channels see the SENSe CDPower ORDer command With Hadamard order the individual codes are output in ascending order With BitReverse order codes which belong to a particu lar channel are adjacent to each other Since an error power is output for the code domain error power consolidation of the power values is not appropriate The number of codes that are output therefore generally corresponds to the base spreading factor 16 7 9 20 7 9 21 7 9 22 7 9 23 TRACe DATA Results Symbol Constellation The command returns two values the real and imaginary parts for each symbol in the following order re 0 gt im 0 gt re 1 gt im 1 gt re n gt im n gt In BTS mode the number of results depends on the number of symbols and is between 2 and 100 In MS mode the number of values depends on the spreading factor Spreading factor 16 64 values Spreading factor 8 128 values Spreading factor 4 256 values EVM vs Symbol The command returns one value for each symbol value in symbol 0 gt In BT
190. age on page 85 and the R amp S FSV performs a measurement over all slots and averages the results For the Data and Preamble channels the standard assumes that in the slots preambles of different lengths do not occur Active and inactive channels are defined via Inactive Channel Threshold on page 78 The power values of the assigned and unassigned codes are displayed in different colors e Yellow assigned code e Cyan unassigned code Set the mapping with Mapping Type on page 76 The Mapping Auto function cau ses complex mapping to be analyzed separately for the Data channel type and map ping for the or Q branch to be analyzed separately for the other channel types In the latter case the I Q selection can be set by means of Invert Q on page 74 Another option for obtaining an overview of the CDP is to enable complex mapping The code domain power is then constantly displayed as a complex analysis on screen A for the selected channel type In case of an analysis of the Data channel the results of complex analysis are approximately 3 dB higher than the results of a separate or Q analysis This is because 50 of the power values are distributed to and Q respec tively for the complex modulation types of the DATA channel type Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XPOW CDP or CALC FEED XPOW CDP RAT see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsystem on page 204
191. ai rice Pv o e o Ne SENSE FREQUENC ADD SENSe FREQUSNCY S TOP intet tede ede ee tt t o e tp aaa e eet pro es SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPails 1 rti rh ttr rer hr ec ere y re e EE EE ATA SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ACHannel SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth ALTernate channel essen 297 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel eene 296 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel ernannt er nnne nna rnnt nenas IEN Ge POMWer ACHannel Pl TerAlPHa Al Temate channelz SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel channel sse SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel eret ern tnn nnn nnn nnn SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate lt channel gt SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel channel sees SENSe POWer AGhlanneb MODE E SENSe POWer ACHanneE NAME ACElarnrel cione trt rne hen rect rene dean SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate lt channel gt SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel channels essent en eee neret SENSe POWer ACHannelL PRES Et anyin rene nne ecc a arre re n E e yx SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESetRLEWVel 0 rrt tti cr rn tina erre rh nb ae adn SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONGQE esent ne gneiss Ninit Ennan tatnen SENSe
192. al one The symbol magnitude error is the differ ence of the magnitude of the received symbol and that of the reference symbol related to the magnitude of the reference symbol Symbol Magnitude Error gel Cirw 1 Sym Result data for remote query SCPI command CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM MAGN see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 204 TRACe lt 1 4 gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt When the trace data for this mode is queried the magnitude error in of each symbol at the selected slot is transferred The number of the symbols depends on the spread ing factor of the selected channel NOFSymbols 10 2 9 CodeClass 6 1 3 17 Symbol Phase Error The Symbol Phase Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result of calcu lation is one symbol phase error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive values of symbol phase error indicate a symbol phase that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol phase errors indicate a symbol phase that is less than the ideal one Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 49 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Symbol Phase Error 1 Clrw 0 049 deck Sym 0 1Sym Result data for remote query SCPI command CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM PHAS see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 204 TRACe lt 1 4 gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt When the t
193. al operation See El Atten Mode Auto Man on page 110 INPut EATT AUTO State This command switches the automatic behaviour of the electronic attenuator on or off If activated electronic attenuation is used to reduce the operation of the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example INP1 EATT AUTO OFF Mode all Manual operation See El Atten On Off on page 110 See El Atten Mode Auto Man on page 110 INPut EATT STATe lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on or off This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the 20 dB preamplifier on and off With option R amp S FSV B22 the preamplifier only has an effect below 7 GHz With option R amp S FSV B24 the amplifier applies to the entire frequency range This command is not available when using R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Turns the preamplifier on Manual operation See Preamp On Off on page 73 INPut IMPedance Impedanc
194. alog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep offset 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger Switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretrigger max sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Ana lyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trig ger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 336 Select Channel Settings This softkey opens the Select Channel Settings dialog box to modify the following parameters Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Channel Type Settings Channel Type Preamble C Data Mapping Settings Mapping Type CR Co Complex Mapping Auto On off Channel Type Select Channel Settings Select one of the following channel types for the measurement e Pilot e MAC e Preamble e Data For further details on the characteristics of the channel types refer to chapter 6 4 2 Working with Cha
195. ameter CTABle Value Description Range Unit max time offset Max timing offset value of all channels S channel type channel type indication 0 7 The channel type is coded with numbers as follows 0 PILOT 1 MAC 2 PREAMBLE with 64chip 3 PREAMBLE with 128chip 4 PREAMBLE with 256chip 5 PREAMBLE with 512chip 6 PREAMBLE with 1024chip 7 DATA lt code number for max The code number which has max timing offset value time gt lt code class for max The code class which has max timing offset value time gt lt max phase offset gt Max phase offset value of all channels rad lt code number for max The code number which has max phase offset value phase gt lt code class for max The code class which has max phase offset value phase gt lt reserved gt reserved for future functionality 0 7 9 15 Channel Table CTABle MS Mode In addition to the results of the channel table which are output using the TRACE parameter the CTABle parameter provides the maximum values of the TIMING and PHASE OFFSET together with the associated channel The command returns 12 values including 6 reserved values for maximum timing and phase offsets in the following order max time offset code number for max time code class for max time max phase offset in rad code number for max phase code class for max phase reserved 1 gt reserved 6 TRACe DAT
196. amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt Range 70 711 nV to 7 071 V RST 1V Example INP DIQ RANG 1V Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 118 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Level Unit on page 118 The availability of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters Level V dBm dBpW W dBmV dBuV dBuA A RST Volt Example INP DIQ RANG UNIT A Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Level Unit on page 118 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the R amp S Digital UO Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 118 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example
197. an nel is active Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF on the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC con nectors e Connect external triggering of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIG GATE to the signal gener ator trigger TRIGOUT1 at PAR DATA Signal generator settings Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO MS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO MS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and select the 1xEV DO MS Analysis option 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the Peak Code Domain Error measurement a Press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A c Select the Peak Code Domain Error softkey and start the measurement 5 Set the center frequency and the reference level a Open the Frontend Settings dialog box b Inthe Center Frequency field enter 833 49 MHz c Inthe Ref Level field enter 0 dBm Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box 6 Set an external trigger source a Open the IQ Capture Settings dialog box b Set the Trigger Source option to External In t
198. an be undone Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime RESTore on page 214 List Evaluation Power vs Time Opens a table below the measurement screen that shows the averaged maximum and minimum values for the current measurement Adjust Ref Lvl Power vs Time Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the set tings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSV or limiting the dynamic range by a too small S N ratio For details on manual settings see Settings of CP ACLR test parameters in the description of the base unit The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a standard To achieve an opti mum dynamic range the reference level has to be set in a way that places the signal maximum close to the reference level without forcing an overload message Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal bandwidth the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is still sig nificantly below the reference level Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel on page 301 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Frequency menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option mod
199. and the corresponding power levels within the 1 2288 MHz channel bandwidth are displayed In the table below the diagram the numeric values of the channel bandwidth of the TX Channel and power level of the analyzed signal are listed Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask 3 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask To detect spurious emissions such as harmonics or intermodulation products the R amp S FSV offers a spectrum emission mask measurement The measurement com pares the power against the spectrum emission mask in the range from 4 MHz to 4 MHz around the carrier The exact measurement settings like the filter that is used depend on the Band Class parameter For a list of supported bandclasses refer to the Bandclass on page 124 softkey in the Spectrum Emission Mask menu Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors Signal generator settings Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO BTS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and select the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option 3 Start the measurement a Press the MEAS key b Press the Spectrum Emission Mask softkey 4 Set the center frequency a Press the FREQ key and enter 878 49 MHz 5 Set the reference level a Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm 6 Sel
200. artial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis Auto FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea surement results Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 289 Narrow FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type For an RBW x 10kHz the FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 289 Sweep Count Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values O or 1 are set one Sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the sweep count value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 306 6 3 7 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Sweep Points Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of measured values to be collected dur ing one sweep Entry via rotary k
201. at means that in this result display the Code Domain Error is pro jected onto the code domain at a specific base spreading factor The spreading factor is automatically set by the channel type Set the number of slots via the Capture Length on page 74 field In the diagram each bar of the x axis represents one PCG The y axis represents the error power The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The currently selected half slot is marked in red t M e Re e Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 62 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Peak Code Domain Error IQ 1 Clrw Start Slot 0 1 Slot Stop Slot 2 Fig 6 27 Peak Code Domain Error result display Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal is very large The result dis play therefore shows a peak code domain error that is too high for all half slots Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active chan nel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 78 field Remote control In re
202. ation Modulation and selected branch of the composite data channel Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR SUMM see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 204 To query these results use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 206 6 1 4 3 Power vs Half Slot This result display shows the power of the selected channel over all half slots Power vs Chip ei Clrw Start Sym 0 256 Chip Stop Sym 2047 Fig 6 16 Power vs Half Slot result display Select the channel to be analyzed via the Select softkey Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 54 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP PVChip see on page 204 T To query these results use the command TRACe DATA lt TRACeX gt see on page 320 This result display shows the power of the selected channel and the selected half slot at each symbol time The number of symbols on the x axis is between 2 and 100 depending on the channel type Spectrum CDMA2000 BTS 1xEV DO BTS Ref Level 20 00 dBm Freq 0 0 Hz Channel 0 32 Code Power Relative Slot 0of3 Channel Type PILOT SGL Inp Dig IQ Code Domain Power 1 ei Clrw 2 Code Stop Code 31 1Sym Stop Sy
203. ay configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP PVChip see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 5 Power vs Chip BTS Mode on page 320 6 1 3 5 Power vs Symbol This result display shows the power of of a code at each symbol time The number of symbols on the x axis is between 2 and 100 depending on the channel type The measurement evaluates a specific channel type over a single slot Power vs Symbol 1 1 Clrw 84 55 dBm I 94 55 dBm T I 144 55 dBm I 154 55 dBm I 164 55 dBm Start Sym 0 2Sym Stop Sym 31 Fig 6 5 Power vs Symbol result display Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP PVSYmbol1 see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 7 Power vs Symbol on page 320 6 1 3 6 Composite EVM This result display is for measuring the modulation accuracy It determines the error vector magnitude EVM over the total signal The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power to the power of an ideally generated reference signal To calculate the mean error power the root mean square average of the real and imaginary parts of the signal is used The EVM is shown in The diagram consists of a composite
204. base stations mobile stations are met A rubidium frequency standard can be used as a reference source for example e If the base station or mobile station has a trigger output connect the trigger output of the base station mobile station to the rear trigger input of the analyzer EXT TRIG GATE Presettings 1 Enter the external attenuation Enter the reference level Enter the center frequency Set the trigger If used enable the external reference Select the standard and the desired measurement oc Rom Set the PN offset 6 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis The R amp S FSV equipped with the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option K84 performs Code Domain measurements on forward link signals according to the 3GPP2 Standard Third Generation Partnership Project 2 High Rate Packet Data generally referred to as 1xEVDO The R amp S FSV equipped with the 1xEV DO MS Analysis option K85 performs Code Domain measurements on reverse link signals according to the 3GPP2 Standard This standard is based on the following specifications e CDMA2000 High Rate Packet Data Air Interface Specification C S0024 B ver sion 3 0 e Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for CDMA2000 High Rate Packet Data Access Network C S0032 B version 1 0 e Recommended Minimum Performance Standards for cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data Access Terminal C S0033 B version 1 0 When the 1xEV DO specification is mentioned in the document
205. between transmitter and receiver frequency impair the synchronization of the Code Domain Power measurement If at all possi ble the transmitter and the receiver should be synchronized The unit of the frequency error is either Hz or ppm referred to the carrier frequency Composite Data Power Power of the special channel containing composite data Rho Overall 1 2 Shows the quality parameter RHO for all chips and over all half slots According to the standard the averaging limit is on the half slot limit Chip Rate Error Shows the chip rate error 1 2288 Mcps in ppm A large chip rate error results in symbol errors and therefore in possible synchro nization errors for Code Domain Power measurements This measurement result is also valid if the analyzer could not synchronize to the 1xEV DO signal Active Channels Indicates the number of active channels Trigger to Frame Reflects the timing offset from the beginning of the recorded signal section to the start of the first half slot In case of triggered data acquisition this corresponds to the timing offset frame to trigger trigger offset start of first half slot If it was not possible to synchronize the R amp S FSV to the 1xEV DO signal this mea surement result is meaningless For the Free Run trigger mode dashes are displayed Slot specific results The Code Results in the second part of the table show results specific to the selected half slot Total Power
206. box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretrigger 4 sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Ana lyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trig ger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 336 Synch Multicarrier Settings This dialog contains the multicarrier and synchronization parameters Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Synchronization Multi Carrier Settings Sync To Synch Multicarrier Settings The application has two synchronization stages the frame synchronization detection of the first chip of the frame and the rough frequency phase synchronization For the frame synchronization different methods are implemented Two methods use the known sequence of a pilot channel Pilot or Auxiliary Pilot a third does not require a pilot channel
207. by the suffix lt n gt If necessary the measurement is switched on prior to the query The channel spacings and channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe POWer subsystem CALCulate Subsystem To obtain a correct result a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be performed before a query is output Synchronization is possible only in the single sweep mode Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt ResultType gt ACPower CPOWer ACPower Adjacent channel power measurement Results are output in the following sequence separated by com mas Power of transmission channel Power of lower adjacent channel Power of upper adjacent channel Power of lower alternate channel 1 Power of upper alternate channel 1 Power of lower alternate channel 2 Power of upper alternate channel 2 The number of measured values returned depends on the num ber of adjacent alternate channels selected with SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs With logarithmic scaling RANGE LOG the power is output in the currently selected level unit with linear scaling RANGE LIN dB or LIN the power is output in W If SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE is set to REL the adjacent alternate channel power is output in dB CPOWer Channel power measurement In a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement the query returns the power result for the reference range if this
208. command or omitted as well Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command either not at all once or Several times Description of Parameters Due to the standardization the parameter section of SCPI commands consists always of the same syntactical elements SCPI has therefore specified a series of definitions which are used in the tables of commands In the tables these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets lt gt and is briefly explained in the following 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 2 4 CALCulate Subsystem For details see the chapter SCPI Command Structure in the base unit description Boolean This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states on and off The off state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the numeric value 0 the on state is indicated by ON or any numeric value other than zero Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value 0 or 1 numeric value num These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set using specific keywords character data The following keywords given below are per mitted MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value DEFault This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default value e uP This keyword increments the parameter val
209. cond denotes the upper adjacent chan nel Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dB CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON Switches on the limit check for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels CALCulate Subsystem Manual operation See Limit Checking on page 129 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe State This command activates the limit check for the relative limit value of the adjacent chan nel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed Before this command the limit check must be activated using CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult Note that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are available Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Paramet
210. ctor for the RRC filter Parameters lt RollOffFactor gt Range 0 01 to 0 99 RST 0 02 Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter CONF CDP MCAR FILT ROFF 0 05 Sets the roll off factor to 0 05 Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Roll Off Factor on page 84 See Roll Off Factor on page 97 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE Type This command sets the filter type to be used in multi carrier mode You can set the parameters for the RRC filter with the CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 250 and CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency on page 249 commands Parameters Type LPASs RCC RST LPAS CONFigure Subsystem Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Roll Off Factor on page 84 See Cut Off Frequency on page 85 See Filter Type on page 96 See Roll Off Factor on page 97 See Cut Off Frequency on page 97 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo State This command activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm for the filters in multi carrier mode Pa
211. d INPut GAIN STATe on page 334 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto softkey this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis pm M M r M rw Eae level mixer levelinput RF attenuation Note As of firmware version 1 61 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 328 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of t
212. d screen with respect to the measured data Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements The softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO on page 259 Y Axis Maximum Scale Opens a dialog box to set the maximum value for the y axis of the grid of the selected Screen The softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum on page 262 Y Axis Minimum Scale Opens a dialog box to set the minimum value for the y axis of the grid of the selected Screen The softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum on page 262 Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 260 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote comman
213. dBm for calculating the limit lines Precondi tion is that the automatic mode of power calculation is switched off via the commands CALCulate n LIMit k PVTime REFerence on page 214 ONCE or CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 214 MAN Suffix n irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt RefLevel gt Range 200 to 200 RST 20dBm Default unit dBm Example CALC LIM PVT REF MAN Manual reference value for limit lines CALC LIM PVTime RVA 33 5 Set manual reference value to 33 5 Mode EVDO 7 2 4 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual 7 2 4 4 CALCulate DELTamarker subsystem sssssssse eene eene 215 7 2 4 2 CALCulate LIMit aubsvstem nemen 223 7 2 4 8 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsvsiem emen 230 7 2 4 4 CALCulate PSE Subsystem eene nennen nennen 234 7 2 4 5 CALCulate STATistics subsvstem ene 236 7 2 4 6 Other Referenced CALCulate Commandes 240 7 2 4 1 CALCulate DELTamarker subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOINE X c cccceescceeeeseceseeeeseeeees 216 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzFUNCHontlxedRbOnty 216 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzFUNCHontizedtGTATel eene 217 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise AUTO c ccccccceecceeceseeceseseeseeeees 217 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe esee 218 CALCulate Subsystem CAL Culatesn gt DEL Tamarker
214. data For details on an ASCII file see chapter 6 4 8 ASCII File Export Format on page 183 This format can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs e g MS Excel It is necessary to define as a separator for the data import Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point It is there fore possible to select between separators decimal point and comma using the Decim Sep softkey see Decim Sep on page 140 An example of an output file for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements is given in chapter 6 4 9 ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask on page 184 Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 338 MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST on page 340 Decim Sep Save Evaluation List List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Selects the decimal separator with floating point numerals for the ASCII Trace export to support evaluation programs e g MS Excel in different languages The values decimal point and comma can be set Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 338 Edit Reference Range Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the Reference Range dialog box to edit the additional settings used for SEM measurements Reference Range x Power Reference Type Power Reference Type Channel Power Settings Tx Bandwidth 3 84 MHz RRC Filter State ON C OFF RRC Filter Settings
215. ds specific to the 1xEV DO Analysis options R amp S FSV K84 K85 The abbreviation EVDO stands for the operating mode of this option For details on conventions used in this chapter refer to chapter 7 1 Notation on page 201 For further information on analyzer or basic settings commands refer to the corre sponding subsystem in the base unit description In particular the following subsystems are identical to the base unit refer to the base unit description e CALCulate DELTamarker e CALCulate MARKer except for the specific commands described in chapter 7 2 CALCulate Subsystem on page 203 e DISPlay subsystem e FORMat subsystem e NITiate subsystem e INPut subsystem e MMEM subsystem OUTput subsystem e SENSe subsystem except for the specific commands described in chapter 7 6 SENSe Subsystem on page 264 e TRIGger subsystem NOGAtION 201 CAL Culate Subsystem enne rere tnnt nna nn sa an kara so exa SEE Rasa rua uuo 203 CALCulate FEED Subsystetm 2 i oerte eat bere ennt i e queo e deu ga bee dera uec 204 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Gubevsiem nens 206 CALCulate LIMit PVTime SUBSYSTEM eee 213 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual 215 CONFigure Subsystom ierit ceein etenim eniai 241 CONFigure CDPower Subsystem K82 K84 sss 241 NIE ENEE EE 255 INSTrument Subsystoem uates inns kun na
216. dth BWIDth RESolution RATio to define the ratio RBW span Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example BAND AUTO OFF Switches off the coupling of the resolution bandwidth to the span Manual operation See Res BW Manual on page 162 See Res BW Auto on page 162 See Default Coupling on page 167 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT lt FilterMode gt This command defines the filter mode of FFT filters by defining the partial span size The partial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis SENSe Subsystem This command is only available for sweep type FFT Parameters lt FilterMode gt AUTO The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best measurement results NARRow The FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter RST AUTO Example BAND TYPE FFT Select FFT filter Example BAND FFT NARR Select narrow partial span for FFT filter Manual operation See Auto on page 165 See Narrow on page 165 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution RATio lt Ratio gt This command defines the ratio between the resolution bandwidth Hz and the span Hz Note that the ratio defined with the remote command RBW span is reciprocal to that of the manual operation span RBW Parameters lt Ratio gt Range 0 0001 to 1 RST
217. e tendons 180 Clear Write 114 179 Max Hl WE 114 179 MIM HOIA e 114 180 dr ES 114 180 trigger le 75 92 112 Trigger OffSeb iie ree ien eyed et pese 75 93 113 Trigger menu K84 s ccrta ere ees 112 Trigger Source External Eer coiere aper e Peters gere ael 74 92 112 Trigger Source Free Run eli TL 74 92 112 TX Settings EXJQSBOX TT 119 U Upper Level Hysteresis c c 116 Upper case COMMAS ossiani neroian 202 V VBW RMS detector ocior ettet d ced no aware 163 179 Video bandwidth certe tno disc 162 View trace mode nca nci de 114 180 Ww WEIGHING AE 129 Y Y AXIS MaxiMU N sssr a aTa 109 Y AXiS MIFIT iicet e eoi ze cocco ade 109 Z Zoom NEO ELE eege ed eege eege 114 180
218. e BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 291 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo on page 291 Video BW Auto Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth If you change the resolution bandwidth the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted This setting is recommended if a minimum sweep time is required for a selected reso lution bandwidth Narrow video bandwidths result in longer sweep times due to the lon ger settling time Wide bandwidths reduce the signal noise ratio This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth It is also available for Power vs Time measurements Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO on page 291 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either downwards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected bandwidth and span
219. e This command selects the nominal input impedance 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 O adapter of the RAZ type 25 O in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 50 Q Example INP IMP 75 7 10 2 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual INPut SELect lt Source gt This command selects the signal source for measurements Parameters lt Source gt RF DIQ RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ only available with R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 RST RF Example INP SEL RF Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Input Path on page 117 TRIGger Commands TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower lt Level gt This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger source for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 DBM Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM Mode All TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Value gt This command sets the holding time before the next BB power trigger event for digi
220. e TRACe lt k gt STARt lt range gt on page 309 Sets the starting point for range 1 on trace 1 at 3 ms SWE EGAT TRAC1 STopl 5ms see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STOP lt range gt on page 310 Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms SWE EGAT TRAC1 PER 5ms see SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k PERiod on page 308 Defines the period for gated triggering to 5 ms Adjust Settings CCDF Adjusts the level settings according to the measured difference between peak and min imum power for APD measurement or peak and mean power for CCDF measurement in order to obtain maximum power resolution Adjusts the reference level to the current input signal For details see also the Adjust Ref Lvl softkey Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 238 Power vs Time Starts the Power vs Time measurement 1xEV DO BTS Analysis mode only This measurement is required by the standard for the Emission Envelope Mask For details on screen layout and default values see the description of Power vs Time Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 251 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements No of HalfSlots Power vs Time Change the number of halfslots used for averaging The default value is 100 Remote command SENSe SWE
221. e As Standard Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the Save As Standard dialog box in which the currently used SEM settings and parameters can be saved and exported into an xml file Enter the name of the file in the File name field For details on the structure and contents of the XML file refer to chapter 6 4 10 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Files on page 184 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STORe on page 280 Meas Start Stop Spectrum Emission Mask Aborts restarts the current measurement and displays the status Start The measurement is currently running Stop The measurement has been stopped or in single sweep mode the end of the sweep has been reached Remote command ABORt on page 338 INITiate lt n gt ESPectrum on page 340 Restore Standard Files Spectrum Emission Mask Copies the XML files from the C NR SNinstrNsem backup folder to the C R_S instr sem_std folder Files of the same name are overwritten Remote command SENSe ESPectrum PRESet RESTore on page 279 Occupied Bandwidth Activates measurement of the bandwidth assigned to the signal Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 251 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 210 Power Bandwidth span gt 0 Occupied Bandwidth Opens an edit dialog box to enter the percentage of total power in the displayed fre quency range which de
222. e Log 10 dB on page 146 See Range Log 5 dB on page 146 See Range Log 1 dB on page 146 See Range Log Manual on page 147 DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO Mode This command turns automatic scaling of the y axis on and off If on the R amp S FSV determines the ideal scale of the y axis for the current measure ment results Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt only 1 trace Parameters lt Mode gt ON Automatic scaling is on OFF Automatic scaling is off ONCE Automatic scaling is performed once RST OFF Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ONCE Activates automatic scaling of the Y axis for the active trace Mode CDMA EVDO OFDM OFDMA WiBro PHN Manual operation See Auto Scale Once on page 108 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When SyStTem DISPlay UPDate is turned off this command has no immediate effect on the screen Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABS Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL Manual operation See Grid Abs Rel on page 160 DISPla
223. e Subsystem Parameters lt Type gt SWE Selects analog frequency sweeps AUTO Automatically selects the sweep type FFT or analog frequency sweep FFT Selects FFT sweeps RST AUTO Example SWE TYPE FFT Selects FFT sweeps Manual operation See Sweep on page 164 See FFT on page 164 See Auto on page 165 Other Commands in the SENSe Subsystem SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt lt NoMeasurements gt This command defines the number of measurements which contribute to the average value Note that continuous averaging is performed after the indicated number has been reached in continuous sweep mode In single sweep mode the sweep is stopped as soon as the indicated number of meas urements sweeps is reached Synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode This command has the same effect as the SENSe source SWEep COUNt com mand In both cases the number of measurements is defined whether the average cal culation is active or not The number of measurements applies to all traces in the window Suffix n Selects the measurement window Parameters lt NoMeasurements gt 0 to 32767 RST 0 Example SWE CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode AVER COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 AVER STAT ON Switches on the calculation of average INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps
224. e aped Gh cee eee EN Ene ve WEE SENSe GDPower QIINVOTE 5 ci etre tert ied ra e c Pes Corde Uk el Ebo red nom reed cd ces UU D dE EI E e ee DEET SENSe CDPower SET COUNLE irt te ertet e trn eee re t e std Herne eee o End Me ve VES ROUES SENSe GDPower SET E TEE EI Ee ee RE EI E e ee E ISENS JESRE Crum RE SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa SENSe ESPectrum FIE Ter RRC ESTATe i irit rn tot t enr nah rte thori ISENS JESPE cUm ge Melen EE SENSe JESPecthm PRESGURES T OF 6 esses niin rtt ot eth rete er tee Er E Ere ge LE ERR nr Y YE a RENE SENSe ESPe ctrum PRESSetSTORS notre tere re eee er erp eege SENSe ESPectrum PRESetWU S T ANdard EE SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDEO eee cece cece ceeee cee eeeeseeeeseeeteaeeneeeeneeeeeeenaes SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution ie SENSe ESPectrum RANGesxrange COLINL rerit nne trot n hide ina ER RR E EE iae SENSe ESPectrum RANGesr ngez DELet eorr rrr perito erp e ERE SET SEEEN SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILT Or TYPE ertt rn etre SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation essent eene SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation AUTO sse SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut GAIN STATe essere nennen nennen SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INSert f SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LlIMit source ABSolute STARIt
225. e center frequency of the signal generator to 878 49 MHz Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 14 3 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power The center frequency of the DUT should not deviate by more than 1 0 kHz from that of the R amp S FSV Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power If the code domain power measurement is performed without external triggering a sec tion of the test signal is recorded at an arbitrary point of time and the firmware attempts to detect the start of a slot To detect this start all possibilities of the PN sequence location have to be tested in Free Run trigger mode This requires computing time This computing time can be reduced by using an external frame trigger and entering the correct PN offset If the search range for the start of the power control group and the PN offset are known then fewer possibilities have to be tested This increases the measurement speed Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the input of the R amp S FSV e Connect the reference input EXT REF on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference input of the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC connectors Connect the external trigger input on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV EXT TRIG GER GATE IN to the external trigger output of the signal generator Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMU Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO BTS Pr
226. e center range are defined symmectrically In the Sweep List menu select the Symmetrical Setup softkey to activate symmetrical setup mode The current sweep list configuration is changed to define a symmetrical setup regarding the reference range The number of ranges to the left of the reference range is reflected to the right i e any missing ranges on the right are inserted while superfluous ranges are removed The values in the ranges to the right of the reference range are adapted symmetrically to those in the left ranges For details see Symmetric Setup on page 138 Symmetrical ranges fulfull the conditions required for Fast SEM mode see chap ter 6 4 13 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements on page 193 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements In order to improve the performance of the R amp S FSV for spectrum emission mask measurements a Fast SEM mode is available If this mode is activated several con secutive ranges with identical sweep settings are combined to one sweep internally Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 193 Further Information which makes the measurement considerably more efficient The displayed results remain unchanged and still consist of several ranges Thus measurement settings that apply only to the results such as limits or transducer factors can nevertheless be defined individually for each range Prerequisites Fast SEM mode is available if the following criteria apply e T
227. e entry for Pilot and Preamble channel type each 16 entries for the Data channel type and 128 entries for the MAC channel type 64 on the and Q branch respectively The channels are listed in the following order first the Pilot channel then the MAC and Preamble channels and the Data channel last Within the channel types the channels are sorted by ascending code number The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single slot EH Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 41 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Channel Table IQ 1 Clrw Channel Walsh SymRate Power Power T Offs P Offs Type Ch SF e dut ds ns mrad 19 Fig 6 7 Channel Table result display The R amp S FSV determines the following parameters for the channels e Channel Type Shows the channel type of the active channel Possible values are Pilot Mac and Data For the Preamble channel the length in chips is similarly specified thus resulting in the following options for the Preamble channel type PRE64 PRE128 PRE256 PRE512 or PRE1024 e CHAN SF Channel number including the spreading factor in the form lt Channel gt lt SF gt e Symb Rate Symbol rate with which the channel is transmitted e Modulation Mapping Shows the modulation type of the channel For Data channels possible values are QPSK 8 PSK and 16 QAM For all other channel types possible values are either BPSK I or BPSK Q e Pwr Abs Pwr Rel Absolute a
228. e error is calculated by the differ ence of the phase of received signal and phase of reference signal The reference sig nal is estimated from the channel configuration of all active channels The phase error is given in degrees in a range of 180 to 180 Result data for remote query SCPI command CALC FEED XTIM CDP CHIP PHAS see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 204 TRACe lt 1 4 gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt When the trace data for this mode is queried a list of phase error values of all chips at the selected slot is returned The values are calculated as the phase difference between the received signal and the reference signal for each chip in degrees and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot Symbol Magnitude Error The Symbol Magnitude Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result of calculation is one symbol magnitude error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive values of symbol magnitude error indicate a symbol magnitude that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol magnitude errors indicate a sym bol magnitude that is less than the ideal one The symbol magnitude error is the differ ence of the magnitude of the received symbol and that of the reference symbol related to the magnitude of the reference symbol Result data for remote query SCPI command CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM MAGN see C
229. e error vector is equal to the square root of the ratio of the measured signal to the reference signal The result is given in In the Composite EVM measurement the error is averaged over all channels by means of the root mean square for a given slot The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time On screen the results are shown in a dia gram in which the x axis represents the examined slots and the y axis shows the EVM values Test Setup e Connect the RF output of the Signal Generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cables with N connectors Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF on the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC con nectors e Connect external triggering of the analyzer EXT TRIG GATE to the signal genera tor s trigger TRIGOUT1 at PAR DATA Signal generator settings Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO BTS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and select 1xEV DO BTS Analysis 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a Press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A c Select the Composite EVM measurement 5 Set the center frequency and the
230. e must completely describe the supplied signal Using the softkeys customized channel tables can be defined or existing channel tables can be modified Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog on page 244 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings All three softkeys open a dialog box with the same layout and the same corresponding submenu The New softkey opens the New Channel Table dialog box In this dialog you can build a new channel table All fields are empty The Copy softkey copies all elements of the selected channel table and opens the Copy Channel Table dialog box The name of the new channel table is set to Copy of lt SourceChannelTableName gt The Edit softkey opens the Edit Channel Table dialog box and the corresponding menu In this dialog box you can edit an existing channel table Note that changes are never saved automatically Save your channel tables before ending the application See Save softkey for details The dialog box contains the following items You can modify the white fields as you like The grey fields can not be modified these are automatically calculated by the R amp S FSV Channel Table Settings Name DO16QAM Description 1xEV DO standard table Table 6 2 Channel table settings Item Description Name Enter the name of the selected channel table which wil
231. e peperere n nire ceca CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FIL Ter TYPE encontre rnt tenen rennes GONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGO entero rrt a aara irera a nea aieo GONFigure CDPower EBTS IMEB ASUFSImelE us aont creo ap rrt tue pae ba E EER EUR EATE PE ek TuS GONFigure CDPower BTS PV Time BURSEL tret tetigere t rrr SEENEN GONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime FREStart i init rhe rerit dien CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime LIST RESult E CONFigure CDPower EBTS PVTime LIST STATe iia nett tmr tnter eet eren exert GONFigure CDPower BTS RE VISIOT irent trennen ra e ence e REY hee ERR EE RR Eos d CONFigure CDPower BTS RESLEOL E CONFigure CDPower EBTS SUBType rrt rrt rtr nt n re nr ne n e I Es DlAGnostic n SERVice NSOWUFIGG nier I ener rra chere c FR EEP be etna ri ERR Er c EYE EP EAE UE EE DISPIay MR RUE edu On RE RUE EAR On Re E ee EEN NEE KR DISPlayEWINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt le DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing S EE E De d Re E DISPlay WINDowsn TRACe t Y SCALe AUT Q cootra nnn ennt rn renun DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum cesses ennemis DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MINimum esee nennen DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE essent s DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe PDlVision
232. e pilot channel 0 16 Suffix lt n gt lt m gt 1 4 window irrelevant Example Usage Mode CALCulate Subsystem INST SEL MDO Activate 1XEV DO MS implicitly CDP relative is displayed on Screen A and Result Summary is active on Screen B INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep INIT WAI Start measurement with synchronization CALC MARK FUNC PICH Activate marker and set to pilot CALC MARK Y Query value of the CDP relative to the PICH Event EVDO CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE lt Mode gt This commands defines the method by which the channel power values are calculated from the current trace in the window specified by the suffix lt n gt Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Parameters lt Mode gt Example Manual operation Selects the measurement window Selects the marker WRITe MAXHold WRITe The channel power and the adjacent channel powers are calcu lated directly from the current trace MAXHold The power values are calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algo rithm CALC MARK FUNC POW MODE MAXH Sets the Maxhold channel power mode See Clear Write on page 131 See Max Hold on page 131 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult lt ResultType gt This command queries the result of the performed power measurement in the window specified
233. e stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms Manual operation See Gate Ranges on page 148 SENSe SWEep POINts lt NumberPoints gt This command defines the number of measurement points to be collected during one sweep SENSe Subsystem Note For Spurious Emissions measurements the maximum number of sweep points in all ranges is limited to 100001 Parameters lt NumberPoints gt Range 101 to 32001 RST 691 Example SWE POIN 251 Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 171 SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the sweep time The range depends on the frequency span Parameters lt Time gt refer to data sheet RST automatic Example SWE TIME 10s Manual operation See Sweep Time on page 132 See Sweeptime Manual on page 155 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO lt State gt In realtime mode this command automatically sets the sweep time to 32 ms In analyzer mode this command controls the automatic coupling of the sweep time to the frequency span and bandwidth settings If SENSe SWEep TIME is used auto matic coupling is switched off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example SWE TIME AUTO ON Activates automatic sweep time Manual operation See Sweeptime Manual on page 155 See Sweeptime Auto on page 164 See Default Coupling on page 167 SENSe SWEep TYPE lt Type gt This command selects the sweep type 7 6 2 7 SENS
234. e sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the mea surement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a sin gle sweep end synchronization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 sequences and waits for the end Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 111 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command determines whether the trigger system is continuously initiated contin uous or performs single measurements single The sweep is started immediately Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sequence to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sequence to continuous sweep Mode all Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Manual operation See Continuous Sweep on page 111 See Single Sweep on page 111 INITiate lt n gt ESPectrum This command starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Suffix lt n gt ir
235. e trace a delta marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC DELT3 TRAC 2 Assigns delta marker 3 to trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X lt Position gt This command positions a delta marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis The position is an absolute value Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Position gt 0 to maximum frequency or sweep time Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute frequency time of delta marker 1 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the x value of the selected delta marker relative to marker 1 or to the reference position for CALC DELT FUNC FIX STAT ON The command acti vates the corresponding delta marker if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the measured value of a delta marker The corresponding delta marker is activated if necessary The outp
236. e tren t ete tenaci 98 uu n Y M H 98 L NewiCopwlEdn ttti teetntn instat tain 99 2 i NUT 100 uu 00 Ev 100 2 E aE 101 Ho m 101 S mE 101 lH o TL Ee 101 PU onW C ee E 101 d 101 L Restore Default Tables thi reet al dtd sd Pan 101 Result Demod Setlings 2 reri erit ec EE DRE E SLE E E E ERR E 101 EE 102 L G de Ordet iaia a a Ee 103 LAORE iiie ncttigtt iretur tti rie rie e eaa aet kt reta erbaut dc edit 103 mi 1 103 EEN 103 GE Snr EE 104 L Code POWO eerte orales brio Casio b n Ete ot meis 104 B lui luc RR 104 Display COMM Ge RE 105 EE tee Ee ees ee 106 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Settings Overview This softkey opens the Settings Overview dialog box that visualizes the data flow of the Code Domain Analyzer and summarizes all of the current settings In addition you can change the current settings via this dialog box To reset all values to their default state press the Set to Default button Settings Overview K85 Long Code Mask I 0 Long Code Mask Q Invert Q 0 Capture Length 6 Multi Carrier Off Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Set Count oa Enhanced Algorithm Off Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Set To Analyze 0 Multi Carrier Filter Off Ref Level 10 0 dBm Trigger Source Free Run Filter Type LowPass Ref Le
237. eactivates the RECENT channel table and activates a prede fined channel table CONF CDP CTAB SEL CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 1 Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Channel Search Mode on page 77 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog This command queries the names of all the channel tables stored on the flash disk for the current application CDMA 1xEVDO Parameters lt sum of file sizes of all subsequent files gt lt spare storage space on hard disk gt 1st file name gt 1st file size 2nd file name gt 2nd file size nth file name nth file size Example CONF CDP CTAB CAT Queries catalog Usage Query only Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Channel Tables on page 78 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COMMent Comment This command defines a comment on the selected channel table Parameters Comment lt string gt comment on the channel table CONFigure Subsystem Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME MEN TAB Selects channel table for editing If a channel table with this name does not exist a new channel table is created CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 10 5 3 4 0 0 1 0 0 Defines a table with the following channels PICH 0 64 and data channel with RC4 Walsh code 3 32 CONF CDP CTAB COMM Comment for NEW TAB Specifies Comment for NEW TAB as comment Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY lt TargetFileNa
238. ect a bandclass a Press the Bandclass softkey and select BandClass 0 800 MHz Cellular Band from the list On the screen the spectrum of the signal is displayed including the limit line defined in the standard To understand where and about how much the measurement has failed the List Evaluation table shows the frequencies where spurious emissions occur Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error 3 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error A Code Domain Power measurement analyses the signal over a single slot It also determines the power of all codes and channels The following examples show a Code Domain Power measurement on a test model with 9 channels In this measurement changing some parameters one after the other should demonstrate the resulting effects values adapted to the measurement signal are changed to non adapted values described using the dialog boxes Alternatively most of the settings can also be modi fied by using the corresponding hardkeys as in the base unit e g the center frequency can be either set in the Frontend Settings dialog box or via the FREQ key o In the following examples adjusting the settings of the code domain measurements is Test setup Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV e Connect the reference input EXT REF on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF of the si
239. ect the channel table you want to delete using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 2 for deleting CONF CDP CTAB DEL Deletes channel table CTAB 2 Usage Event Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME lt ChannelTable gt This command selects a channel table for editing or creating To select a command for analysis use the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command Parameters ChanTableName c string name of the channel table Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Selects channel table for editing If a channel table with this name does not exist a new channel table is created Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See New Copy Edit on page 78 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle RESTore This command restores the predefined channel tables to their factory set values In this way you can undo unintentional overwriting Example CONF CDP CTAB REST Restores the channel table Usage Event Mode CDMA EVDO CONFigure Subsystem CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect lt ChannelTable gt This command selects a predefined channel table Parameters ChanTableName c string name of the channel table RST RECENT Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Channel Search Mode on page 77 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe State This command ac
240. ected channel slot TRACe DATA Results Value Description Range Unit lt relative level gt relative level of the channel refer Le el dB enced to total power in the channel type power ID power indication 0 1 0 inactive channel 1 active channel The number of codes that are displayed corresponds to the spreading factor The spreading factor in turn depends on the selected channel types Therefore 32 value triplets are returned for PILOT and PREAMBLE channels 16 value triplets for DATA channels and 64 value triplets for MAC channels see chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 176 In addition the output depends on the mapping settings The output is either the branch the Q branch or the complex signal 7 9 2 Code Domain Power MS mode The command returns four values for each code in a channel in the following order code class code number gt lt absolute level relative level gt lt power ID Value Description Range Unit code class Code class of the channel with Hadamard order it is usually code class 4 code number code number of the channel 0 spreading factor 1 absolute level absolute level of the code channel at the Le el selected channel slot dBm lt relative level gt relative level of the channel referred to the Lo co total or pilot power see the SENSe dB CDPower PREFerence command
241. ed Bandwidth and the CCDF It is also available for Power vs Time measurements Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO on page 289 Video BW Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the video bandwidth The available video bandwidths are specified in the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth For rotary knob or UP DOWN key inputs the bandwidth is adjusted in steps either upwards or down wards The manual input mode of the video bandwidth is indicated by a green bullet next to the VBW display in the channel bar Note RMS detector and VBW R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis If an RMS detector is used the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs How ever the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a lon ger sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to achieve more stable trace curves even when using an RMS detector Normally if the RMS detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves For details on detectors see chapter 6 4 4 Detector Overview on page 178 This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth It is also available for Power vs Time measurements Remote command SENS
242. ed Commands ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system Example ABOR INIT IMM Mode all Manual operation See Meas Start Stop on page 143 DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce lt State gt This command switches the 28 V supply of the noise source on the front panel on or off Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 117 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command defines which decimal separator decimal point or comma is to be used for outputting measurement data to the file in ASCII format Different languages of evaluation programs e g MS Excel can thus be supported Parameters lt Separator gt POINt COMMA RST factory setting is POINt RST does not affect set ting Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See ASCII File Export on page 140 See Decim Sep on page 140 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a measurement that has been stopped in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the first sweep point As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using max hold or averaging functions In singl
243. ee 0 5 RBW span gt 0 on page 153 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines the frequency offset Parameters lt Offset gt Example Manual operation Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Default unit Hz FREQ OFFS 1GHZ See Frequency Offset on page 72 7 6 2 5 SENSe Subsystem SENSe FREQuency SPAN lt Span gt This command defines the frequency span Parameters lt Span gt min span to fmax RST fmax fmax IS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ SPAN 10MHz Manual operation See Span Manual on page 155 SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL This command sets the frequency span to its maximum Example FREQ SPAN FULL Manual operation See Full Span on page 155 SENSe FREQuency STARt lt Frequency gt This command defines the start frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters lt Frequency gt 0 to fmax min span RST 0 fmax IS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREO STAR 20MHz Manual operation See Start on page 154 SENSe FREQuency STOP Frequency This command defines the stop frequency for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters Frequency min span to fmax RST fmax fmax IS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ STOP 2000 MHz Manual operation See Stop on page 154 SENSe POWer subsystem ISENSe POWer ACHapnnel AOPAalIS
244. eeeeseeeeeaaaea 281 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILTer TYPE cniinne ddiaa iiaiaia 281 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STARL ececececeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeeaeeaeenenenes 282 IGENZGelCGbechum RANGe zange tEbREOuencvl GTOb nenene nennen eerrrreerersree 282 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut AT Tenuation ccececeeeceeeeeeeeeaeaeeaeaeeeneneneees 283 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation AUT O cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeed 283 IGENGeJECGbechum RANGe zangez INPuGAIN SGTATe nnn 284 IGENGeJCGbechum RANGe zangez JN ert nnne 284 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STARL cccssesesseeseseeeeeees 284 SENSe ESPectrum RANGez range LIMit source ABSolute STOP suus 285 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LlIMit source RELative STAR 285 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STOP scccccsssssseeeeeeeaees 286 IGENZGelCGbechum RANGe zangez LUMitzsourcez GTATe nere re renne etene 286 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range RLEVel sse nennen nen 286 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep TIME sese 287 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt SWEep TIME AUTO 287 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range TRANSdQUcer sisse nennen 288 SENSe TESPeectrumo REANO tactic eege 288 SENSe TESPeetrm EAR d GE 288 SENSe ESPectrum BWID lt Bandwidth gt This command define
245. el This is the highest value of the I and Q branch of the Data channel Min Power Data Shows the minimum power of the Data channel This is the smallest value of the I and Q Branch of the Data channel e Data Mode Type Shows the modulation type of the Data channel e Active Mac Chs Shows the number of active MAC channels e Active Data Chs Shows the number of active Data channels e Preamble Length Shows the length of the preamble in chips If no preamble is present in the slot this value is 0 e Rho Shows the quality parameter RHO calculated over a slot According to the standard RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideally generated reference signal It is measured over all slots e Max Inactive Power Mac Shows the maximum power of inactive Mac channels This is the highest inactive channel from the I and Q branch of the MAC channels The power is displayed rel ative to the absolute power of the MAC channel R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis SE EE EE EE ra EE EE EEE eS 6 1 3 3 Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR SUMM see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 204 To query these results use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 206 Channel Results The Channel Result
246. el or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements MSE ea chee dk ege ee ae 152 CI SIS E 152 Bp 1 EEN 152 e E MNT 153 L 0 5 Span Span gt Q EE 153 E BP opa Deos E 153 E EE 153 L X RBW Span LT m 153 Ee 153 SE 154 CMAN NETT 154 cc GE 154 colo MEE 154 Fregtenty ONS Esc so 154 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 spanmin 2 feenter S fmax SPAN min 2 span 0 0 HZ lt foenter S fmax fmax and span are specified in the data sheet If the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is active center frequencies above 7 GHz are not available Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 293 CF Stepsize Opens a submenu to set the step size of the center frequency The step size defines the value by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be set to a fraction of the span span gt 0 or a fraction of the resolu tion bandwidth span 0 or it can be set to a fixed value manually Apart from the Center Marker and Manual softkeys the other softkeys are dis played depending on the selec
247. ep COUNt on page 306 RF Slot Full Idle Power vs Time Defines the expected signal Set it to either FULL or IDLE mode The limit lines and the borders for calculating the mean power are set The lower and upper limit line are called DOPVTFL DOPVTFU for FULL and DOPVTIL DOPVTIU for IDLE mode It is possible to change these lines with the standard limit line editor Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS RFSLot on page 254 Burst Fit On Off Power vs Time Activate an automatic burst alignment to the center of the diagram If active the burst fit algorithm searches the maximum and minimum gradient between them the maximum peak is determined and from this point the 7 dB down points are searched If these are within plausible ranges the burst is centered in the screen otherwise nothing happens The default setting is OFF The softkey is only available if the RF Slot is set to idle mode see RF Slot Full Idle on page 150 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime BURSt on page 252 Reference Mean Pwr Power vs Time The standard asks for the sequence to first measure the FULL slot with the limit line relative to the mean power of the averaged time response Therefore you should acti vate the Reference Mean Power for Full slot measurements In this mode the mean power is calculated and the limit lines are relative to that mean power This value should also be used as the reference for the IDLE slot measure
248. equency menu for the base unit P c 107 e 2 o d ME 107 Freet cc M 108 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 fcenter fmax m SPAN pin 2 span 0 0 Hz lt fcenter z fmax fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet If the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is active center frequencies above 7 GHz are not available Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 293 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to enter a fixed step size for the center frequency The step size defines the value by which the center frequency is increased or decreased when the arrow keys are pressed When you use the rotary knob the cen ter frequency changes in steps of 1096 of the Center Frequency Stepsize This softkey is available for code domain and power vs time measurements Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 293 6 2 4 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Frequency Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SE
249. equency in Hz For time domain measurements it is a point in time in s RST Fixed reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHz Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y lt RefPointLevel gt This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram When measuring the phase noise the command defines the level reference for delta marker 2 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt RefPointLevel gt Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference The unit and value range is variable RST Fixed reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed STATe State This command switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off Marker 1 is activated previously and a peak search is performed if necessary If marker 1 is activated its position becomes the reference point for the measurement The reference point can then be modified with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X commands and CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y independently of the position of marker 1 and
250. er Reference on page 104 SENSe CDPower QINVert State This command inverts the Q component of the signal Parameters ON OFF RST OFF SENSe Subsystem Example CDP QINV ON Activates inversion of Q component Mode CDMA EVDO TDS WCDMA Manual operation See Invert Q on page 74 SENSe CDPower SBANd lt Sideband gt This command is used to swap the left and right sideband Parameters lt Sideband gt NORMal INVers RST NORMal Example CDP SBAN INV Swap sidebands Mode EVDO SENSe CDPower SET COUNt lt NumberSets gt This command sets the number of sets to be captured and stored in the instrument s memory Refer to Set Count on page 74 for more information Parameters lt NumberSets gt Range 1 to 490 RST 1 Example CDP SET COUN 10 Sets the number of sets to be captured to 10 Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Set Count on page 74 SENSe CDPower SET VALue lt Set gt This command selects a specific set for further analysis Parameters lt Set gt Range 0 to 1 RST 0 Example CDP SET 20 Selects the 20 set Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Set to Analyze on page 74 SENSe Subsystem SENSe CDPower SLOT lt Slot gt This command selects the slot that is evaluated in the Code Domain Power Diagram and is used for slot based evaluations in the Code Domain Result Summary Parameters lt Slot gt 0 to capture length 1 RST 0 The capture le
251. er Source option to External Setthe Trigger Offset to 100us to compensate analog delays of the trigger event In the two screens the following results are displayed Screen A shows the the same as above In screen B the result summary is displayed In the Trigger to Frame result the offset between the trigger event and the start of the slot has been adjusted 3 4 2 Behaviour With the Wrong PN Offset The last adjustment is setting the PN Pseudo Noise offset correctly The measure ment can only be valid if the PN offset on the analyzer is the same as that of the trans mit signal e Set a PN Offset Open the Result Settings dialog box Inthe PN Offset field enter 200 Again screen A shows the CDP measurement screen B the result summary In the result summary the Trigger to Frame result is not correct Also the error message SYNC FAILED indicates that the synchronization has failed Inthe PN Offset field enter 0 After adjusting it the PN offset on the R amp S FSV is the same as that of the signal In the result summary the Trigger to Frame value is now shown correctly Measuring the Composite EVM 3 5 Measuring the Composite EVM The Error Vector Magnitude EVM describes the quality of the measured signal com pared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSV In the I Q plane the error vector represents the ratio of the measured signal to the ideal signal on symbol level Th
252. er1GHz xml LTE Cat B lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW_05_0_MHz__CFhigher1GHz xm l LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 05 0 MHz CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 10 0 MHz Cfhigher1GHz xml LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 10 0 MHz Cflower1GHz xml LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 15 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm l LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW_15_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB EUTRA LTE DL CategoryB BW 20 0 MHz CFhigher1GHz xm l BW_20_0_MHz__CFlower1GHz xml LTE Cat B gt 1GHz DL LTE Cat B lt 1GHz DL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_05_0_MHz xml LTE UL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_10_0_MHz xml LTE UL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_15_0_MHz xml LTE UL EUTRA LTE UL Standard BW_20_0_MHz xml LTE UL Used abbreviations BC band class UL uplink DL downlink TTA Telecommunications Technology Association Ranges and Range Settings In the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements a range defines a segment for which you can define the following parameters separately e Start and stop frequency e RBW e VBW e Sweep time R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis pm P o 9 P
253. eresis UPPer cesses 275 SENSe ADJust CONFIgure LEVel DUIRAlOn 22222 att rrt oaa aita 275 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE eessssseeeeeeenen enne 276 SENSe AD Eege P SSES EENS 276 SENS JADJ S tL EVel E 276 SENSe Subsystem SENSe JADJust ALL This command determines the ideal frequency and level configuration for the current measurement Example ADJ ALL Manual operation See Auto All on page 115 SENSe JADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis _OWer Threshold This command defines a lower threshold the signal must drop below before the refer ence level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed For more information see SENSe ADJust LEVel Parameters lt Threshold gt Range 0 to 200 RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 116 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold This command defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed For more information see SENSe ADJust LEVel Parameters Threshold Range 0 to 200 RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UP
254. erface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula levelmixer level RF attenuation Note As of firmware version 1 61 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 328 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 329 EI Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 e To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto so
255. ers lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Mapping gt lt Activity gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Status gt lt Reserved2 gt Example Mode The channel type is numerically coded as follows 0 PICH 1 RRI 2 DATA 3 ACK 4 DRC 5 INACTIVE 2 to 4 0 15 0 I branch 1 Q branch 0 65535 decimal The decimal number interpreted as a binary number in 16 bits determines the half slot in which the channel is active value 1 or inactive value 0 See table 7 1 Always 0 reserved 0 inactive 1 active Can be used in a setting command to disable a channel tempo rarily Always 0 reserved INST SEL MDO Activate 1XEV DO MS CONF CDP CTAB NAME NEW TAB Select table to edit CONF CDP CTAB DATA 0 4 0 0 65535 0 1 0 1 4 0 0 43690 0 1 0 2 2 2 1 65535 0 1 0 Selects PICH 0 16 on I with full activity RRI 0 16 on I in each even numbered half slot and DATA 2 4 on Q with full activity EVDO MS CONFigure Subsystem Table 7 1 Examples for lt Activity gt parameter settings Dec Binary Description 65535 1111 1111 1111 1111 Channel is active in each half slot e g DATA 43690 1010 1010 1010 1010 Channel is active in half slot 0 2 4 etc e g RRI 24576 0110 0000 0000 0000 Channel is active in half slot 1 and 2 e g DRC CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DELete This command deletes the selected channel table Sel
256. ers lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ACH STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for adjacent channels CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Switches on the check of absolute limit values for the adjacent channels INIT WAI Starts a new measurement and waits for the sweep end CALC LIM ACP ACH RES Queries the limit check result in the adjacent channels CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt ABSolute lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the absolute limit value for the lower upper alternate adjacent channel power measurement Adjacent Channel Power CALCulate Subsystem Note that the absolute limit value for the limit check has no effect as soon as it is below the relative limit value defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RELative This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values defined in mobile radio standards for the power in adjacent channels Suffix lt n
257. et 116 Sort Channel Table KR ug 81 101 Spam MENU 154 Special Characters one sedente a es 202 Spectrum Emission Mask shristi 134 Nec Power Classes is El dt UE e E Step size Center MEQUENCY ET 152 SLOP MEQUENCY ie ccccitivtesssscresiweseeeneesttsacenseeseatvereeniaccases 154 Subtype K84 K85 supply voltage external noise source 117 171 sweep COUNT sS 112 170 Sweep Continue single sweep ssiri siisi 111 168 Continuous 111 168 le 111 168 E 155 163 168 sweep list Fast SEM remote control AA 278 Sweep List Symmetrical Sweep menu C Sweep time COUPLING M take Symbol Constellation ML SEH 45 327 KES iet 59 Symbol Phase Error 49 65 C IN 328 Synch Multicarrier Settings KGS eset hillary ease ates aha 93 Synchronization AIO certe tip e CUR o aed le 94 Auxiliary pilot ET 94 Channel Power 94 K85 ciones 94 Pilot 1 94 remote COFETO 22i eek anette La td ta ere 272 T Time Phase Estimation EE M leremucalg K84 remote command Go trace power measurement totes retine ee 131 Trace Clear Write iiia tree ceca ec cs etl ea 114 179 Trace menu K84 cien diee siete dione ede 113 Trace mode Average ep posicion orca ed is 114 180 i ae
258. etup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors Signal generator settings Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO MS MS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Activate the 1xEV DO MS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and activate the 1xEV DO MS Analysis option 3 Start the Power measurement a Press the MEAS key b Press the Power softkey 4 Set the center frequency a Press the FREQ key and enter 833 49 MHz 5 Set the reference level a Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm On the screen the spectrum of the signal and the corresponding power levels within the 1 2288 MHz channel bandwidth are displayed In the table below the diagram the numeric values of the channel bandwidth of the TX Channel and power level of the analyzed signal are listed Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask 4 2 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask To detect spurious emissions such as harmonics or intermodulation products the R amp S FSV offers a spectrum emission mask measurement The measurement com pares the power against the spectrum emission mask in the range from 4 MHz to 4 MHz around the carrier The exact measurement settings like the filter that is used depend on the Band Class parameter For a list of supported bandclasses refer to the Bandclass on page 124 softkey in the Spectrum Emissio
259. ew to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSV is not included in the option manuals The following Operating Manuals are available for the R amp S FSV e R amp S FSV base unit in addition R amp S FSV K9 Power Sensor Support R amp S FSV K14 Spectrogram Measurement e R amp S FSV K7 Analog Demodulation and R amp S FSV K7S FM Stereo Measurements e R amp S FSV K10 GSM EDGE Measurement e R amp S FSV K30 Noise Figure Measurement e R amp S FSV K40 Phase Noise Measurement e R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating Manual R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Getting Started First measurements e R amp S FSV K72 3GPP FDD BTS Analysis e R amp S FSV K73 3GPP FDD UE Analysis e R amp S FSV K76 77 3GPP TD SCDMA BTS UE Measurement e R amp S FSV K82 83 CDMA2000 BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K84 85 1xEV DO BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K91 WLAN IEEE 802 11 e R amp S FSV K93 WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM OFDMA Analysis e R amp S FSV K100 K104 EUTRA LTE Downlink Measurement Application e R amp S FSV K101 K105 EUTRA LTE Uplink Measurement Application These manuals are available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the
260. ference level on the display grid When using a tracking generator only with option R amp S FSV B9 or B10 requires active normalization and in Bluetooth mode option R amp S FSV K8 this command defines the position of the reference value for all windows Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corre sponds to the upper display border Range 0 to 100 RST Spectrum mode 100 PCT with tracking generator or time display 50 PCT Default unit PCT Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Manual operation See Ref Level Position on page 160 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid When using a tracking generator this command requires active normalization Suffix n irrelevant t irrelevant Parameters Value RST 0 dB coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Defines a reference position of 20 dBm DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt t gt irrelevant DISPlay Subsystem Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in dB RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC
261. ffix lt n gt lt k gt lt Class gt Parameters lt State gt Example Manual operation irrelevant irrelevant 1 4 the power class to be evaluated ON OFF RST OFF CALC LIM ESP PCL1 ON Activates the first defined power class See Used Power Classes on page 141 See Add Remove on page 142 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt COUNt lt NoPowerClasses gt This command sets the number of power classes to be defined Suffix lt n gt lt k gt lt Class gt Parameters lt NoPowerClasses gt irrelevant irrelevant irrelevant 1 to 4 RST 1 CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC LIM ESP PCL COUN 2 Two power classes can be defined CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt LIMit STATe lt State gt This command defines which limits are evaluated in the measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant lt Class gt 1 4 the power class to be evaluated Parameters lt State gt ABSolute RELative AND OR ABSolute Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values RELative Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values AND Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if both limits fail OR Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if at least one limit failed RST REL Example CALC L
262. ffset 0 0 dB Trigger Polarity Positive Mapping Type DI Preamplifier Off Trigger Offset 0 0 s Mapping Auto On Select Channel Display Table J Configuration CDP Search Mode Auto Search Revision Subtype 0 1 Screen Inactive Threshold 40 0 dB Normalize Off Screen B General Result Time Phase Est Off Screen C Composite Const PN Offset 0 Screen D Channel Table Multi Carrier Off Enhanced Algorithm Off Multi Carrier Filter Off Filter Type LowPass Roll Off Factor 0 02 Geen Cut Off Frequency 1 25 MHz CDP Average Off Code Power Relative Close To change the settings either use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to change the focus to any other block or press one of the following buttons Frontend Settings on page 72 IQ Capture Settings on page 73 Select on page 87 Channel Table Settings on page 77 Result Settings on page 81 Display Config on page 85 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements When using the rotary knob or the cursor keys press the ENTER key to open the cor responding dialog box The Settings Overview dialog box always remains open while settings are modified Frontend Settings This softkey opens the Frontend Settings dialog box to modify the following parame ters Frequency Settings Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Level Settings Ref Level 10 0 dBm Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB
263. fines the occupied bandwidth Values from 1096 to 99 996 are allowed Remote command SENSe POWer BANDwidth BWIDth on page 304 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Channel Bandwidth span gt 0 Occupied Bandwidth Opens an edit dialog box to enter the channel bandwidth for the transmission channel The specified channel bandwidth is used for optimization of the test parameters for details see chapter 6 4 15 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters on page 196 The default setting is 14 kHz For measurements in line with a specific transmission standard the bandwidth speci fied by the standard for the transmission channel must be entered Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth BWIDth CHANnel channel on page 296 Adjust Ref Lvl span gt 0 Occupied Bandwidth Adjusts the reference level to the measured total power of the signal the softkey is activated after the first sweep with active measurement of the occupied bandwidth has been completed and the total power of the signal is thus known Adjusting the reference level ensures that the signal path will not be overloaded and the dynamic range not limited by too low a reference level Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal band width the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is distinctly below the ref erence level If the measured channel power is eq
264. frequency which is at least five times the resolution bandwidth which has been selected Based on the sample values the power is calculated for each measurement point using the following formula P 1l RMS N i where s linear digitized video voltage at the output of the A D converter N 7 number of A D converter values per measurement point Paus power represented by a measurement point When the power has been calculated the power units are converted into decibels and the value is displayed as a measurement point In principle the sample detector would be possible as well Due to the limited num ber of measurement points used to calculate the power in the channel the sample detector would yield less stable results Trace averaging The Adjust Settings softkey switches off this function Averaging which is often performed to stabilize the measurement results leads to a too low level indication and should therefore be avoided The reduction in the displayed power depends on the number of averages and the signal characteristics in the channel to be mea sured Reference level The Adjust Settings softkey does not influence the reference level It can be adjus ted separately using the Adjust Ref Lvl softkey see Adjust Ref Lvl on page 124 7 1 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 2 4 7 3 7 3 1 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 6 1 7 6 2 7 7 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analy sis This chapter describes the remote comman
265. ftkeys e To define the electronic attenuation use the El Atten Mode Auto Man softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 333 El Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the elec tronic attenuator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined The attenuation can be varied i
266. gital Inter face Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is minimized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSV once again Remote command Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURCe EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglIConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 120 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements 6 3 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements 6 3 1 The following chapter describes the softkeys and menus available for RF measure ments in 1XxEVDO BTS Analysis mode All menus not described here are the
267. gnal generator coaxial cable with BNC connec tors Signal generator settings Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO BTS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and select 1xEV DO BTS Analysis 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Display Config softkey b Select the Code Domain Power measurement 5 Setthe center frequency and the reference level a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Frontend Settings softkey R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 IEN b In the Center Frequency field enter 878 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box In the two screens the following results are displayed screen A shows the power of the code domain of the signal The x axis represents the individual channels or codes while the y axis shows the power of each channel In screen B the result summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the code domain power measurement including the frequency error By default the R amp S FSV K84 displays two measurement screens After a preset the first screen A is always the Code Domain Power result display T
268. gt This command defines the delay time between the external gate signal and the contin uation of the sweep Note Using gate mode level see SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE on page 310 and an IFP trigger see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 337 the hold off time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and IQ mode measurements Parameters lt DelayTime gt Osto30s RST Os Example SWE EGAT HOLD 100us SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth lt Timelnterval gt This command defines a gate length SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt Timelnterval gt 125 ns to 30s RST 400us Example SWE EGAT LENG 10ms SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity lt Polarity gt This command determines the polarity of the external gate signal The setting applies both to the edge of an edge triggered signal and the level of a level triggered signal Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example SWE EGAT POL POS Manual operation See Trigger Polarity on page 75 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce Source This command selects the signal source for gated measurements If an IF power signal is used the gate is opened as soon as a signal at 20 dBm is detected within the IF path bandwidth 10 MHz Parameters Source EXTernal IFPower VIDeo RFPower PSEN RST IFPower Example SWE EGAT SOUR IFP Switches the gate source to I
269. gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value 200DBM to 200DBM limit for the lower and the lt UpperLimit gt upper alternate adjacent channel RST 200DBM Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative lt LowerLimit gt lt UpperLimit gt This command defines the limit for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent chan nel power measurements The reference value for the relative limit value is the mea sured channel power Note that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit defined with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt ABSolute This mechanism allows automatic checking of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio stand ards Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt LowerLimit gt first value O to 100dB limit for the lower and the upper alternate lt UpperLimit gt adjacent channel RST 0 DB Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 30DB 30DB Manual operation Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and up
270. hapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 22 Composite Constellation on page 327 6 1 3 14 Mag Error vs Chip Mag Error vs Chip activates the Magnitude Error versus chip display The magnitude error is displayed for all chips of the slected slot The magnitude error is calculated by the difference of the magnitude of received signal and magnitude of reference signal The reference signal is estimated from the channel configuration of all active channels The magnitude error is related to the square root of the mean power of reference sig nal and given in percent Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 47 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Magnitude Error vs Chip 1 Clrw 256 Chips Chip 2047 Result data for remote query SCPI command CALC FEED XTIM CDP CHIP MAGN see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 204 TRACe lt 1 4 gt DATA TRACE lt 1 4 gt When the trace data for this mode is queried a list of magnitude error values of all chips at the selected slot is returned The values are calculated as the magnitude dif ference between the received signal and the reference signal for each chip in and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot 6 1 3 15 Phase Error vs Chip Phase Error vs Chip activates the phase erro
271. he Code Domain Power measurement In case of a frequency error of more than 4 3 kHz the probability of incorrect syn chronization increases This is indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message If the frequency error exceeds approximately 4 3 kHz a Code Domain Power mea surement cannot be performed This is also indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message Reset the center frequency of the signal generator to 833 49 MHz The center frequency of the DUT should not deviate by more than 4 0 kHz from that of the R amp S FSV Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 4 4 Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power If the code domain power measurement is performed without external triggering a sec tion of the test signal is recorded at an arbitrary point of time and the firmware attempts to detect the start of a slot To detect this start all possibilities of the PN sequence location have to be tested in Free Run trigger mode This requires computing time This computing time can be reduced by using an external frame trigger and entering the correct PN offset If the search range for the start of the power control group and the PN offset are known then fewer possibilities have to be tested This increases the measurement speed Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the input of the R amp S FSV e Connect the reference input EXT REF on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference input of
272. he current measure ment You can define a threshold that the signal must exceed before the reference level is adjusted see SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer and SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer Example ADJ LEV Manual operation See Adjust Ref Lvl on page 73 See Auto Level on page 115 7 6 2 2 0 SENSe Subsystem SENSe ESPectrum Subsystem The SENSe ESPectrum subsystem contains the remote commands to configure Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurements The sweep list cannot be configured using remote commands during an on going Sweep operation SENSe ESPectrum BWID sessi nennen rerit tite t nt nen niens 277 PSENSejEsbeetrunzhitTegbRbRClEsS tte tee EHNEN acea E ESENES 278 SENSejJ ESPectram FIETerRRGTEALPHa initi eret brennen heeee 278 IGENGeJECGbectum Hiob beed enne nne n nens 278 SENSe ESPectrum PRESetES TANdatrd EE 279 SENSe ESPecirumPRESebRESTOFe uc cocinero eere ated ete dedu AER di 279 SENSe TESPectrumiPRESeESTORG ac rita urna ern rte ot ENEE ESA 280 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution eseeeeeeeeeeeeeesss 280 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range BANDwidth VIDeo sees 280 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt COUNL cccccecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeed 281 SENSe ESPectrum RANGes lt range gt DELete cccccccceeeeeeceeeeeseteeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
273. he frequency ranges are consecutive without frequency gaps The following sweep settings are identical Filter Type see Filter Type on page 135 RBW see RBW on page 135 VBW see VBW on page 135 Sweep Time Mode see Sweep Time Mode on page 135 Ref Level see Ref Level on page 135 Rf Att Mode see RF Att Mode on page 135 RF Attenuator see RF Att Mode on page 135 Preamp see Preamp on page 136 Activating Fast SEM mode Fast SEM mode is activated in the sweep list see Fast SEM on page 134 or using a remote command Activating the mode for one range automatically activates it for all ranges in the sweep list In the provided XML files for the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Fast SEM mode is activated by default SCPI command SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 278 Consequences When the Fast SEM mode is activated the ranges for which these criteria apply are displayed as one single range The sweep time is defined as the sum of the individual Sweep times initially but can be changed When the Fast SEM mode is deactivated the originally defined individual sweep times are reset If Symmetrical Setup mode is active when Fast SEM mode is activated not all sweep list settings can be configured symmetrically automatically see also Symmetric Setup on page 138 Any other changes to the sweep settings of the combined range are app
274. he measurement bandwidths and the detector as required for the number of channels the channel bandwidths and the chan nel spacings selected in the active power measurement If necessary adjacent chan nel power measurement is switched on prior to the adjustment To obtain correct results a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must be performed after the adjustment Synchronization is possible only in the single sweep mode The result is queried with the CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult command Parameters Setting ACPower CPOWer MCACpower OBANdwidth OBWidth CN CNO Example POW ACH PRES ACP Sets the frequency span the measurement bandwidths and the detector as required for the ACLR measurement INIT CONT OFF Switches over to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end of the sweep CALC MARK FUNC POW RES ACP Queries the result of the adjacent channel power measurement Manual operation See Adjust Settings on page 131 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel This command adapts the reference level to the measured channel power and if required switches on previously the adjacent channel power measurement This ensures that the signal path of the instrument is not overloaded Since the measure ment bandwidth is significantly smaller than the signal bandwidth in channel power measurements the signal path can be overloaded al
275. he other should demonstrate the resulting effects values adapted to the measurement signal are changed to non adapted values described using the dialog boxes Alternatively most of the settings can also be modi fied by using the corresponding hardkeys as in the base unit e g the center frequency can be either set in the Frontend Settings dialog box or via the FREQ key o In the following examples adjusting the settings of the code domain measurements is Test setup Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV e Connect the reference input EXT REF on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF of the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC connec tors Signal generator settings Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO MS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO MS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and select 1xEV DO MS Analysis 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Display Config softkey b Select the Code Domain Power measurement 5 Setthe center frequency and the reference level a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Frontend Settings softkey Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Err
276. he reference signal and therefore the compo site EVM is very large Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active chan nel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 78 field Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP MACCuracy see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 8 Composite EVM on page 320 Channel Table Starts the Channel Occupancy Table analysis Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 56 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis In this result display the main channel table settings of each channel are displayed The channel occupancy table can contain a maximum of 33 entries corresponding to the highest base spreading factor 16 with both and Q branch plus the RRI channel The Channel Table evaluation considers the total signal over precisely one half slot The half slot to be evaluated can be set by means of the Select softkey The channels are listed in ascending code number order within a code number first and then Q branch Unassigned codes are thus always at the end of the table Channel Table 1 Clrw Channel Walsh SymRate Power Power T Offs P Offs A Ch SF ksps TE OD ns mrad Fig
277. he results of a separate or Q analysis This is because 50 of the power values are distributed to and Q respec tively for the complex modulation types of the DATA channel type Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XPOW CDP OrCALC FEED XPOW CDP RAT see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsystem on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 2 Code Domain Power MS mode on page 316 6 1 4 2 Result Summary The Result Summary show the data of various measurements in numerical form for all channels AC iannels Slot Result Half Slot lodulation Fig 6 15 Result Summary The Result Summary is divided in three parts e General results for the selected set e Slot results for the selected half slot e Channel results for the selected channel General Results for all channels The General Results in the upper part of the table show results for all channels and over all half slots of a specific set e Carrier Frequency Error absolute and relative Shows the frequency error referred to the center frequency of the R amp S FSV The absolute frequency error is the sum of the frequency error of the R amp S FSV and that of the device under test Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 52 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Differences of more than 4 0 kHz
278. he second screen B is always the Result Display For more information on the display concept refer to the Display Config on page 85 softkey Synchronization of the reference frequencies The frequency error can be reduced by synchronizing the transmitter and the receiver to the same reference frequency gt Press the SETUP key a Press the Reference Int Ext softkey to switch to an external reference Screen A again shows the Code Domain Power measurement and screen B the result summary After the synchronization of the reference frequencies of the devices the frequency error should now be smaller than 10 Hz Behavior with deviating center frequency setting A measurement can only be valid if the center frequency of the DUT and the analyzer are balanced gt On the signal generator change the center frequency in steps of 0 1 kHz and observe the analyzer screen Up to a frequency error of approximately 1 0 KHz a Code Domain Power measure ment on the R amp S FSV is still possible A frequency error within this range causes no apparent difference in the accuracy of the Code Domain Power measurement In case of a frequency error of more than 1 0 kHz the probability of incorrect syn chronization increases This is indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message If the frequency error exceeds approximately 1 5 kHz a Code Domain Power mea surement cannot be performed This is also indicated by the SYNC FAILED error message Reset th
279. he selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 329 El Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 e To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys To define the electronic attenuation use the El Atten Mode Auto Man softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 3
280. he two screens the following results are displayed by default screen A shows the diagram of the Peak Code Domain Error In screen B the result summary is displayed Displaying RHO Make sure that all channels except the pilot channel code 0 64 are OFF so that only the pilot channel is available in the measurement No specific measurement is required to get the value for RHO The R amp S FSV always calculates this value automatically regardless of the code domain measurement per formed Besides the results of the code domain measurements the numeric result of the RHO measurement is shown in the result summary by default shown in screen B 5 Test Setup for Base Station and Mobile Sta tion Tests This section describes the default settings of the R amp S FSV if it is used as a 1xEV DO base station or mobile station tester Before starting the measurements the R amp S FSV has to be configured correctly and supplied with power as described in the Quick Start Guide Preparing For Use Furthermore the application firmware of the R amp S FSV K84 base station tests or K85 mobile station tests must be enabled Installation and enabling of the application firmware are described in the Quick Start Guide chapter 3 Risk of instrument damage during operation An unsuitable operating site or test setup can cause damage to the instrument and to connected devices Ensure the following operating conditions before you switch on the instrument
281. i carrier mode is automatically switched off Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 249 Filter Type Result Settings Selects the filter type if Multi Carrier Filter on page 84 is activated Two filter types are available for selection a low pass filter and a RRC filter By default the low pass filter is active The low pass filter affects the quality of the measured signal compared to a measurement without a filter The frequency response of the low pass filter is shown below Frequency response of low pass filter Multi Carrier On Int in dB D 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 O89 1 Frequency in MHz The RRC filter comes with an integrated Hamming window If selected two more set tings become available for configuration the Roll Off Factor on page 84 and the Cut Off Frequency on page 85 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 249 Roll Off Factor Result Settings Defines the roll off factor of the RRC filter The roll off factor defines the slope of the filter curve and therefore the excess bandwidth of the filter Possible values are between 0 01 and 0 99 in 0 01 steps The default value is 0 02 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 250 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 250 Cut
282. ich you want to display help To close the help window press the ESC key For further infor mation refer to chapter 1 3 How to Use the Help System on page 8 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer menu in BTS mode 70 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Menu in MS Mode 87 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu for CDA Measurements ee 107 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu for CDA Measurementz ee 108 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu for CDA Measurements reren 111 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu for CDA Meaesurements reene 112 Softkeys of the Trace Menu for CDA Measurements sss 113 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu for CDA Measurements ssssnnssssrreneerrreeeerr rrenen 115 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measuremente neee 116 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements 6 2 1 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer menu in BTS mode The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the main menu of the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option ED You can also access the main menu via the MEAS CONFIG hardkey EHS COVERVIQW a 71 Frontend Settings icis cena seed EROR a E t Hed 72 b EE 72 L Frequency ON OE test err pee pl pubem ads gegen 72 2 72 L Ref Level 73 L Preamp EE 73 EE 73 IQ Capture Seting E 73 DEE 74 Eegenen eege 74 EE ler ME M 74 BE 017 057 MERE RENT 74 L Trigger Source Free Run 74 L Trigger Source E 74 L Tigger s NC 75 EG dtr N
283. ides the following result display configurations for base station measurements in the code domain e Code Domain eau sirensis eren rupe o yr vui x eve da i dE erre unen 35 NEE 36 Channel RESUS mm 38 e jPowerwvs CIM DEE 39 e FONS VS 0 E 40 Composte EVM era ier pp ree to saith yon en REX ERA TR adaa Eaire a a aiaiai Siah 40 e TTT 41 Channel Bitstream P anae Ea na na aii 43 Peak Code Domain rer s i remet REIR EEGENEN 43 e Code Domai In e EE 44 e Symbol Constellation iiie rire e eco h eec SEET Age 45 E El EE 46 e Composite Constellaton nennen nennen 47 e Mag Enor vS e EE 47 e Phase Error vo CRI i ecce Prid e eese EES 48 e Symbol Magnitude TEE 49 e Symbol Phase EE eher ctae de reda peint crede tern ota ERR qe eR tenes 49 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 1 3 1 Code Domain Power This result display determines the power of all codes of a specific channel and plots it in a diagram The x axis represents the code number The number of codes depends on the Channel Type on page 76 Each bar in the diagram represents one code The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the power of each code By default the scaling is relative The measurement evaluates the total signal of a specific channel over a single slot Start Code 0 4 Code Stop Code 63 Fig 6 1 Code Domain Power result display The standard requires an averaged code domain analysis Select CDP Aver
284. in the DATA channel type e PICH MS mode only Channel table with the pilot channel as it exists in Access mode at least during the first slot 16 e PICHRRI MS mode only Channel table with pilot channel and RRI with the name PICHRRI The channels are active on the same code but at different times If the RRI and the PICH are active it is assumed that for the first 256 chips 1 4 of the half slot 1 8 of the entire slot only the RRI and then the PICH is active in this half slot If only the PICH is active RRI activity 0 the PICH is active for the entire 1024 chips of the half slot e 5CHANS MS mode only Channel table with 5 channels PICH RRI DRC ACK DATA Table 6 3 Base station channel table DOQPSK with QPSK modulation in DATA area Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I 3 64 BPSK I 4 64 BPSK I 34 64 BPSK Q 35 64 BPSK Q Further Information Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Preamble 64 chips long 1 3 32 BPSK I Data 16 0 16 QPSK 1 16 QPSK 2 16 QPSK 13 16 QPSK 14 16 QPSK 15 16 QPSK Table 6 4 Base station channel table DO8PSK with 8 PSK modulation in DATA area Channel Type Number of Code Channel Walsh Modulation Channels Code SF Mapping Pilot 1 0 32 BPSK I Mac 5 2 64 RA BPSK I 3 64 BPSK I 4 64 BPSK I 34 64 BPSK Q 35 64 BPSK Q
285. in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected bandwidth and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF or Power vs Time measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 311 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 311 Sweeptime Auto Couples the sweep time to the span video bandwidth VBW and resolution bandwidth RBW not available for zero span If you change the span resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth the sweep time is automatically adjusted The R amp S FSV always selects the shortest sweep time that is possible without falsifying the signal The maximum level error is lt 0 1 dB compared to using a longer sweep time This softkey is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask and the Occupied Bandwidth Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 311 Sweep Type Opens a submenu to define the sweep type This softkey is available for measuring the Signal Power the Adjacent Channel Power and the Occupied Bandwidth This function is not available in IQ Analyzer mode or for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S F
286. ing The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the reference level Absolute scaling is the default setting Rel Relative scaling The upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB The scaling is in dB whereas the reference level is always in the set unit for details on unit settings see the Unit softkey Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 259 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 329 6 3 5 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Bandwidth menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is pro vided in the corresponding softkey description For Spurious Emission Measurements the settings are defined in the Sweep List dia log see the description in the base unit PROS BW Manualer n OT TCTHT T TILES 162 E EE 162 Mideo BW ET TEE 162 vdeo BW AUTO EE 163 SWeeptime Man E 163 SWS SUMS AUD pest EE 164 IWRC RK I 164 EE 164 RE EE 164 EG 165 Lucil c 4520 EE 165 o o NP TE 165 BEL DRE A E E AT 165 Goupling Sr E 165 L RBW VBW Sine DI 165 L RBW VBW
287. ings used for SEM measurements Reference Range x Power Reference Type Power Reference Type Channel Power Peak Power Channel Power Settings 1 Tx Bandwidth 3 84 MHz RRC Filter State ON C OFF RRC Filter Settings 1 Alpha 0 22 Two different power reference types are supported e Peak Power Measures the highest peak within the reference range Channel Power Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Measures the channel power within the reference range integral bandwidth method If the Channel Power reference power type is activated the dialog box is exten ded to define additional settings e Tx Bandwidth Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power minimum span lt value s span of reference range e RRC Filter State Activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter e RRC Filter Settings Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter This window is only available if the RRC fil ter is activated For further details refer to chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 192 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 288 SENSe ESPectrum BWID on page 277 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe on page 278 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa on page 278 List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a submenu to edit the list evaluation settings List Evaluation On Off List Evaluation Spectru
288. ion channel with the lowest power MAXimum Transmission channel with the highest power LHIGhest Lowermost transmission channel for the lower adjacent chan nels uppermost transmission channel for the upper adjacent channels Example POW ACH REF TXCH AUTO MAX The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a reference channel Manual operation See ACLR Reference on page 127 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANual lt ChannelNumber gt This command selects a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in relative adjacent channel power measurements The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 212 SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt ChannelNumber gt 1 to 18 RST 1 Example POW ACH REF TXCH MAN 3 Transmission channel 3 is used as a reference channel Manual operation See ACLR Reference on page 127 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel lt Spacing gt This command defines the spacing between the carrier signal and the adjacent chan nel ADJ The modification of the adjacent channel spacing ADJ causes a change in all higher adjacent channel spacings ALT1 ALT2 they are all multiplied by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value Parameters lt Spacing gt 100 Hz to 20 GHz RST 14 kHz Example POW ACH SPAC 33kHz
289. ion of the maximum error between the test signal and the reference signal Code Domain Error Power Code Domain Error Power result display For details on the displayed results and default settings refer to chapter 6 1 Measure ments and Result Displays on page 32 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements You can configure the result displays via the Result Settings on page 81 dialog box Select Opens a dialog box to select a specific channel and or slot for evaluation Enter the channel number and slot number to be evaluated as a decimal in the respective field The number of available channels depends on the specified channel type For channel type PILOT and PREAMBLE values between 0 and 31 are valid For channel type MAC the range is between 0 and 63 and for DATA channels the range is 0 to 15 The slot range is from 0 to Capture Length 1 Refer to Capture Length for further details For the following measurements an evaluation on code level is possible chapter 6 1 3 8 Channel Bitstream on page 43 chapter 6 1 3 3 Channel Results on page 38 chapter 6 1 3 12 EVM vs Symbol on page 46 chapter 6 1 3 5 Power vs Symbol on page 40 chapter 6 1 3 11 Symbol Constellation on page 45 For the following measurements an evaluation on slot level is possible chapter 6 1 3 8 Channel Bitstream on page 43 chapter 6 1 3 3 Channel Results on page 38 chapter 6 1 3 7 Channel Table on page 4
290. irst off active channels are separated from inactive channels Within these categories sorting is then done first by the channel type special channels like F SYNC first then data channels and next by the spreading factor in ascending order Last the sorting is done by the code number also in ascending order Save New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Saves the table under its specified name in the xml format If you edit a channel table and want to keep the original channel table change the name of the edited channel table before saving it Cancel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Closes the dialog box and returns to the Channel Table Settings dialog box Changes applied to the channel table are lost Reload New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Reloads the original content of the copied channel table This softkey is available for the New Channel Table dialog box and the Edit Channel Table dialog box Delete Channel Table Settings Deletes the selected channel table The currently active channel table cannot be deleted Restore Default Tables Channel Table Settings Restores the predefined channel tables see chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 173 to their factory set values Existing channel tables with the same name as default channel tables are replaced by this action In this way you can undo unintentional overwriting Result Demod Settings This softkey opens the Resul
291. is shows the EVM values Test Setup e Connect the RF output of the Signal Generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cables with N connectors e Connect the reference input EXT REF IN OUT on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV to the reference output REF on the signal generator coaxial cable with BNC con nectors Connect external triggering of the analyzer EXT TRIG GATE to the signal genera tor s trigger TRIGOUT1 at PAR DATA Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 25 4 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error Signal generator settings Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO MS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO MS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and select 1xEV DO MS Analysis 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a Press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A c Select the Composite EVM measurement 5 Set the center frequency and the reference level a Open the Frontend Settings dialog box b Inthe Center Frequency field enter 833 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box 6 Setan external trigger source a Open the IQ Capture Settings dialog box b Setthe Trigger Source option to External In the two scree
292. is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi ble Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 257 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Count determines the number of averaging procedures All available detectors can be selected If the detector is automatically selected the sample detector is used see chapter 6 4 4 Detector Overview on page 178 This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 257 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see
293. ithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 260 Preamp On Off Frontend Settings Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 334 Adjust Ref Lvl Frontend Settings Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 276 IQ Capture Settings This softkey opens the IQ Capture Settings dialog box Common Settings Invert Q On e ott Data Capture Settings Capture Length E Set Count 1 Set To Analyze 0 Trigger Settings Trigger Source External 6 Free Run Trigger Polarity Positive C Negative 0 0 s Trigger Offset Invert Q IQ Capture Settings Inverts the sign of the signal s Q component The default setting is OFF Remote command SENSe CDPower QINVert on page 270 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA
294. ive channel in the channel type e Phase Offset Shows the phase offset between the selected channel and the first active channel in the channel type e Channel Pwr Rel Shows the relative channel power referred to the total power of the channel type e Channel Pwr Abs Shows the absolute channel power referred to the total power of the channel type e Modulation Type Shows the modulation type of the channel Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR SUMM see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 204 To query these results use the command CALC MARK FUNC CDP RES see CALCulate n MARKer cm FUNCtion CDPower BTS RESult on page 206 6 1 3 4 Power vs Chip This result display shows the power for all chips in a specific slot Therefore a trace consists of 2048 power values The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single slot Power vs Chip ei Clrw Start Sym 0 256 Chip Stop Sym 2047 Fig 6 4 Power vs Chip result display Select the slot to be analyzed via the Select softkey Due to the symmetric structure of the 1xEV DO forward link signal it is easy to identify which channel types in the slot have power EH Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 39 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EEE EE EE SE EEE EE EEE rr EE EEE Se a Remote control In remote control this displ
295. l 1176 7632 02 04 60 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis TET Bu 6 1 4 12 6 1 4 13 Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 21 EVM vs Symbol on page 327 Composite Constellation This result display provides information about the constellation points at chip level For each chip a constellation point is displayed in the diagram The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single half slot Composite Constellation ei Clrw Fig 6 25 Composite Constellation result display Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP COMP CONSt see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 22 Composite Constellation on page 327 Channel Bitstream This result display provides information on the demodulated bits for the selected chan nel type All bits that are part of inactive channels are marked as being invalid by means of dashes For 64QAM modulation is displayed for 16QAM modulation for 8PSK modulation for QPSK and for BPSK The measurement evaluates a single
296. l be saved under lt name gt xml The name is case sensitive and may not contain spaces It must be a valid MS Windows file name Note that the old channel table file is not deleted Description Enter further information about the channel table Channel Type Select one of the channel types from the dropdown menu Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Item Description Walsh Ch SF Enter the Channel Number Ch and Spreading Factor SF For some channel types the possible values are limited or preset e g F PICH F TDPICH and F PDCH Symbol Rate ksps Display of the symbol rate Modulation Enter the modulation type for the channel Power dB Contains the measured relative code domain power The unit is dB The fields are filled with values after pressing the Meas on page 80 softkey State Indicates whether a channel is active or inactive DomainConflict A red bullet indicates if there s a conflict of any sorts between two or more channels e g two conflicting channel codes Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 248 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY on page 245 Add Channel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Inserts a new channel below the one selected For a description of the parameters of the channel refer to the New Copy Edit softkey The default values for a new channel are ChannelType MAC Walsh Ch
297. l change in the different code channels In the Power vs half slot result display with enabled power control and reference to the total power of the signal the power control of the selected channel is not necessarily reflected Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Example There is just one data channel in the signal and its power is controlled The power is referred to the total power of the signal which consists only of the contri bution from this one data channel In the Power vs Half Slot diagram a straight line is displayed instead of the expected power staircase For relative result displays the reference value Total Power is therefore only mean ingful if the signal does not contain power control For signals with enabled power con trol use the Pilot Channel setting since the pilot channel is not subject to power con trol under any circumstances Remote command SENSe CDPower PREFerence on page 270 Display Config This softkey opens the Display Config dialog box to select the result display In the Code Domain Analyzer the results are displayed in up to four screens Any result can be displayed in either screen Display Configuration Screen A iy Screen A active Result Diagram for Screen A Code Domain Power Symbol Constellation Result Sum mary EVM vs Symbol Power vs Half Slot Composite Constellation Power vs Symbol Channel Bitstream Composite EV
298. l for adja cent channel power measurements The reference value for the relative limit value is the measured channel power CALCulate Subsystem It should be noted that the relative limit value has no effect on the limit check as soon as it is below the absolute limit value defined with the CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel ABSolute command This mechanism allows automatic check ing of the absolute basic values of adjacent channel power as defined in mobile radio standards Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt LowerLimit gt O to 100dB the value for the lower limit must be lower than the lt UpperLimit gt value for the upper limit RST 0 dB Example CALC LIM ACP ACH 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult This command queries the result of the limit check for the upper lower adjacent chan nel when adjacent channel power measurement is performed If the power measurement of the adjacent channel is switched off the command pro duces a query error Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant Return values Result The result is returned in the form lt result gt lt result gt where lt result gt PASSED FAILED and where the first returned value denotes the lower the se
299. l help gt To display the general help dialog box press the HELP key on the front panel The help dialog box View tab is displayed A topic containing information about the current menu or the currently opened dialog box and its function is displayed For standard Windows dialog boxes e g File Properties Print dialog etc no context sensitive help is available gt Ifthe help is already displayed press the softkey for which you want to display help A topic containing information about the softkey and its function is displayed If a softkey opens a submenu and you press the softkey a second time the submenu of the softkey is displayed Contents of the help dialog box The help dialog box contains four tabs e Contents contains a table of help contents e View contains a specific help topic e Index contains index entries to search for help topics e Zoom contains zoom functions for the help display To change between these tabs press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the table of contents To move through the displayed contents entries use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys Entries that contain further entries are marked with a plus sign To display a help topic press the ENTER key The View tab with the correspond ing help topic is displayed Tochange to the next tab press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the help topics To scroll through a page use the rotary knob o
300. l of the R amp S FSV Note Video output does not return valid values in IQ or FFT mode Remote command OUTP IF VID SeeOUTPut IF SOURce on page 341 Further Information Power Sensor For precise power measurement a power sensor can be connected to the instrument via the front panel USB connector or the rear panel power sensor option R amp S FSV B5 The Power Sensor Support firmware option R amp S FSV K9 provides the power measurement functions for this test setup This softkey is only available if the R amp S FSV option Power Sensor R amp S FSV K9 is installed For details see the chapter Instrument Functions Power Sensor K9 in the base unit description This softkey is available for RF measurements Trigger Out Sets the Trigger Out port in the Additional Interfaces option R amp S FSV B5 only to low or high Thus you can trigger an additional device via the external trigger port for example This softkey is available for RF measurements Remote command OUTPut TRIGger on page 341 6 4 Further Information 64 1 Predefined Channel Tables eniro ent td ee tee ien 173 6 44 2 Working with Channel Tables itd etna enc eene uud 176 64 3 Channel Type Characteristles 21er rct tii tete 177 6 4 4 Detector Overview scie fre dna eae nia a Ld E CY Ye EE Eod e Eo a Lud dae 178 645 Trace Mode OVGrVIGW inier rendi sadi teda seeded caver a aa a a RR RE 179 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Tvpe n
301. l power measurements the Adjust Settings softkey sets the frequency span as follows No of transmission channels 1 x transmission channel spacing 2 x transmis sion channel bandwidth measurement margin For adjacent channel power measurements the Adjust Settings softkey sets the frequency span as a function of the number of transmission channels the trans mission channel spacing the adjacent channel spacing and the bandwidth of one of adjacent channels ADJ ALT 1 or ALT2 whichever is furthest away from the transmission channels No of transmission channels 1 x transmission channel spacing 2 x adja cent channel spacing adjacent channel bandwidth measurement margin The measurement margin is approx 10 of the value obtained by adding the channel spacing and the channel bandwidth e Resolution bandwidth RBW To ensure both acceptable measurement speed and required selection to sup press spectral components outside the channel to be measured especially of the adjacent channels the resolution bandwidth must not be selected too small or too large As a general approach the resolution bandwidth is to be set to values between 196 and 496 of the channel bandwidth A larger resolution bandwidth can be selected if the spectrum within the channel to be measured and around it has a flat characteristic In the standard setting e g for standard IS95A REV at an adjacent channel bandwidth of 30 kHz a resolution bandwidth
302. ld are regarded as inactive The parameter is available in the Auto Search mode of the Channel Table Settings dialog box The default value is 40 dB With this value all channels with signals such as the 1xEV DO test models are located by the Code Domain Power analysis Decrease the Inac tive Channel Threshold value if not all channels contained in the signal are detected Remote command SENSe CDPower ICTReshold on page 266 Channel Tables Channel Table Settings In this field a list of the available channel tables is shown To activate a predefined channel table select the table name by using either the touchscreen or the the cursor keys and pressing the ENTER key The selected channel table is the basis for future measurements until you choose another or select Auto Search An active channel table must completely describe the supplied signal Using the softkeys customized channel tables can be defined or existing channel tables can be modified Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle CATalog on page 244 New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings All three softkeys open a dialog box with the same layout and the same corresponding submenu The New softkey opens the New Channel Table dialog box In this dialog you can build a new channel table All fields are empty The Copy softkey copies all elements of the selected channel table and opens the Copy Channel Table dialog box The name of the ne
303. le SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAT1 ON Activates tracing for range 1 of trace 1 Manual operation See Gate Ranges on page 148 SENSe Subsystem SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE lt Type gt This command sets the type of triggering by the external gate signal A delay between applying the gate signal and the start of recording measured values can be defined see SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDof f on page 307 Parameters lt Type gt LEVel EDGE LEVel The gate is level triggered After detection of the gate signal the gate remains open until the gate signal disappears The gate opening time cannot be defined with the command SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff Note Using gating with gate mode level and an IFP trigger see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 337 the holdoff time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and IQ mode measurements EDGE The gate is edge triggered After detection of the set gate signal edge the gate remains open until the gate delay SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff has expired RST EDGE Example SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt STOP lt range gt Value This command defines the stopping point for the range to be traced using gated trig gering Suffix lt k gt 1 6 trace lt range gt 1 3 range Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 us Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STOP1 5ms Sets th
304. lect the transmission channel to which the relative adjacent channel power values should be referenced TX Channel 1 Transmission channel 1 is used Min Power TX Channel The transmission channel with the lowest power is used as a refer ence channel Max Power TX Channel The transmission channel with the highest power is used as a refer ence channel Lowest amp Highest Channel The outer left hand transmission channel is the reference channel for the lower adjacent channels the outer right hand transmission channel that for the upper adjacent channels Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel MANual on page 302 S ENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO on page 302 Spacing Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Define the channel spacings for the TX channels and for the adjacent channels TX channels left column Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements TX1 2 spacing between the first and the second carrier TX2 3 spacing between the second and the third carrier The spacings between all adjacent TX channels can be defined separately When you change the spacing for one channel the value is automatically also defined for all sub sequent TX channels in order to set up a system with equal TX channel spacing quickly For different spacings a setup from top to bottom is necessary If the spacings are not equal the channel distributi
305. lied to each included range and remain changed even after deactivating Fast SEM mode 6 4 14 Example Sweep List Range Start 12 75 MHz 4 MHz Further Information 3 515 MHz Range Stop 8 MHz Filter Type Channel 3 515 MHz Gaussian 2 715 MHz 1 MHz 30 kHz 10 MHz 10 MHz Sweep Time 10 ms 30 ms Ref Level 10 dBm 10 dBm RF Att Mode Auto Auto RF Attenuator 10 dB 10 dB Sweep Time Mode Preamp off Transd Factor None off None None None Limit Check 1 Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Absolute Abs Limit Start 1 23 5 dBm 19 5 dBm 32 5 dBm 32 5 dBm 20 5 dBm Abs Limit Stop 1 23 5 dBm 19 5 dBm 32 5 dBm 20 5 dBm 20 5 dBm Rel Limit Start 1 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc Rel Limit Stop 1 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc 50 dBc Limit Check 2 Relative Relative Relative Relative Fig 6 30 Sweep list using Fast SEM mode In figure 6 30 a sweep list is shown for which Fast SEM is activated The formerly 5 separately defined ranges are combined to 2 sweep ranges internally Predefined CP ACLR Standards When using predefined standards for ACLR measurement the test parameters for the channel and adjacent channel measurements are configured automatically The availa ble standards are listed below Predefined standards are selected usi
306. low 6 1 5 5 6 1 5 6 Measurements and Result Displays Setting Default value Occupied Bandwidth ON Frequency Span 4 2 MHz Sweep Time 100 ms RBW 30 kHz VBW 300 kHz Detector RMS For details on the softkeys of the Occupied Bandwidth measurement see Occupied Bandwidth on page 143 in the Measurement menu Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF The CCDF measurement displays the CCDF and the Crest factor The CCDF shows distribution of the signal amplitudes For the measurement a signal section of settable length is recorded continuously in a zero span The measurement is useful to deter mine errors of linear amplifiers The Crest factor is defined as the ratio of the peak power and the mean power Beneath the measurement screen a table containing the number of included samples mean and peak power and the Crest factor is displayed The default settings of the CCDF measurement are listed in the table below Setting Default value CCDF ON RBW 10 MHz Detector Sample For details on the softkeys of the CCDF measurement see CCDF on page 144 in the Measurement menu Power vs Time The Power vs Time measurement examines a specified number of half slots Up to 36 half slots can be captured and processed simultaneously That means that for a stand ard measurement of 100 half slots only three data captures are necessary After the capturing of the data the R amp
307. low pass filter affects the quality of the measured signal compared to a measurement without a filter The frequency response of the low pass filter is shown below Frequency response of low pass filter Multi Carrier On Int in dB D 01 02 03 04 05 06 OF 08 09 1 Frequency in MHz Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements The RRC filter comes with an integrated Hamming window If selected two more set tings become available for configuration the Roll Off Factor and the Cut Off Fre quency Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 250 Roll Off Factor Synch Multicarrier Settings Defines the roll off factor of the RRC filter The roll off factor defines the slope of the filter curve and therefore the excess bandwidth of the filter Possible values are between 0 01 and 0 99 in 0 01 steps The default value is 0 02 This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on page 250 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer ROFF on page 250 Cut Off Frequency Synch Multicarrier Settings Defines the cut off frequency of the RRC filter The cutoff frequency is the frequency at which the passband of the filter begins Possible values are between 0 1 MHz and 2 4 MHz in 1 Hz steps The default value is 1 25 MHz This parameter is available for the RRC filter Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer TYPE on
308. lt adjacent channel gt ABS 10dBm 10dBm CALC LIM ACP lt adjacent channel gt ABS STAT ON see CALCulate lt n gt LIMit k ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe on page 224 Check Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Activate or deactivate the limit to be considered during a limit check The check of both limit values can be activated independently Chan Pwr Hz CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR If deactivated the channel power is displayed in dBm If activated the channel power density is displayed instead Thus the absolute unit of the channel power is switched from dBm to dBm Hz The channel power density in dBm Hz corresponds to the power inside a bandwidth of 1 Hz and is calculated as follows channel power density channel power log channel bandwidth Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements By means of this function it is possible e g to measure the signal noise power density or use the additional functions ACLR Abs Rel on page 131 and ACLR Reference on page 127 to obtain the signal to noise ratio Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ on page 211 Power Mode CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens a submenu to select the power mode Clear Write Power Mode CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR If this mode is activated the channel power and the adjacent channel powers are cal culated directly from the cur
309. lt displays are accessed via the MEAS key LEES o uber o P 32 Gonftigutring the DISpIay E 33 e Code Domain Analysis Results BTS Mode 34 e Code Domain Analysis Results MS Model 50 e RF Measurement Results ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeeeeeeeseesecaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 66 6 1 1 Display Concept Measurement results The code domain analyzer can show up to four result diagrams in four different screens windows at one time For each screen you can define which type of result diagram is to be displayed or deactivate the screen temporarily The current configura tion of the display i e which screens are displayed and which result diagram is dis played in which screen can be stored and retrieved later Thus you can easily switch between predefined display configurations The available measurement results are described in the following sections All results are calculated from the same dataset of the recorded signal Thus it is not necessary to restart the measurement in order to switch the display mode Measurement settings The most important measurement settings are displayed in the diagram header For Code Domain Analyzer measurements the following settings are shown Ref Level 10 00 dBm Freq 15 0 GHz Channel 0 16 Att 10 dB HalfSlot 0 of 6 Code Power Rel SGL Label Description Ref level Reference level defined in Ref Level on page 72 Freq Center frequency defined in Center
310. lta marker to the current trace minimum The corre sponding delta marker is activated first if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC DELT3 MIN Sets delta marker 3 to the minimum value of the associated trace CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If the corresponding marker was a normal marker it is turned into a delta marker No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT1 ON Switches marker 1 to delta marker mode CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command selects th
311. lter Type Application 1 MHz CFILter CDMAone 1 228 MHz CFiLter CDMAone 1 28 MHz a 0 22 RRC 1 5 MHz CFiLter DAB 2 MHz CFiLter 3 MHz CFiLter 3 75 MHz CFiLter 3 84 MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA 3GPP 4 096 MHz a 0 22 RRC W CDMA NTT DOCoMo 5 MHz CFiLter 20 MHz CFiLter 28 MHz CFiLter 40 MHz CFiLter 6 4 8 ASCII File Export Format The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt lt n gt number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on measurement which are also separated by a semico lon File contents header and data section Description Type FSV Instrument model Version 1 50 Date 01 Apr 2010 Firmware version Date of data set storage Screen A Instrument mode Points per Symbol 4 Points per symbol x Axis Start 13 sym Start value of the x axis x Axis Stop 135 sym Stop value of the x axis Ref value y axis 10 00 dBm Y axis reference value Ref value position 100 96 Y axis reference position Trace 1 Trace number Meas Result Result type Meas Signal Magnitude Result display Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type Further Information File contents header and data section Description ResultMode Trace Result mode
312. lue in dB gt The number of returned value pairs corresponds to the IQ capture length Power vs Symbol The command returns one value for each symbol value in dBm gt In BTS mode the number of results depends on the number of symbols and is between 2 and 100 In MS mode the number of values depends on the spreading factor Spreading factor 16 64 values Spreading factor 8 128 values Spreading factor 4 256 values Composite EVM The command returns two values for each half slot in the following order lt Half Slot number gt lt value in gt The number of value pairs that is displayed corresponds to the IQ capture length Therefore the number of results is between 2 and 12 TRACe DATA Results 7 9 9 Composite Data EVM MS Mode The command returns the error vector magnitude for each despreaded chip of the composite data channel The number of returned values is 1024 7 9 10 Composite Data Constellation MS Mode The command returns the real and imaginary parts from each despreaded chip of the composite data channel 7 9 11 Composite Data Bitstream MS Mode The command returns the bitstream of one half slot for the composite data channel The number of returned bits depends on the modulation type of the composite data channel Modulation Type Number of returned bits Q4Q2 1536 E4E2 2304 7 9 12 Channel Table Trace BTS mode The command returns 8 values for all active channels i
313. m lt relative level gt relative level of the channel referenced to total power in the ve co channel type dB lt timing offset gt Timing offset of the channel to the frame start Referred to the s first active channel in seconds If the evaluation of the timing and phase offset is not active see SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 274 or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the value 9 is returned For inactive channels the value 9 is returned lt phase offset gt Phase offset Referred to the first active channel in rad If the rad TRACe DATA Results 7 9 13 Channel Table Trace MS mode The command returns 8 values for each channel in the following order lt channel type gt lt code class gt lt code number gt lt mapping gt lt absolute level gt lt rela tive level gt lt timing offset gt lt phase offset gt Value Description Range Unit lt channel type gt The channel type is coded with numbers as follows 0 7 0 PICH lt channel type gt 1 RRI 2 DATA 3 ACK 4 DRC 5 INACTIVE 6 DSC 7 Auxiliary Pilot lt code class gt code class of the channel specifies the spreading factor of 2 4 the channel Class 4 corresponds to spreading factor 16 symbol rate 76 8 ksps class 2 to the lowest permissible spreading factor 4 symbol rate 307 2 ksps lt code number gt code number of the channel 0 spreading factor 1 lt mapping gt Modulation t
314. m Emission Mask Activates or deactivates the list evaluation Remote command Turning list evaluation on and off CALCulate lt n gt PEAKsearch PSEarch AUTO on page 234 Querying list evaluation results TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 314 Margin List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Opens an edit dialog box to enter the margin used for the limit check peak search Remote command CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSEarch MARGin on page 235 Show Peaks List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask In the diagram marks all peaks with blue squares that have been listed during an active list evaluation Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ESPectrum PSEarch PEAKsearch PSHow on page 240 Save Evaluation List List Evaluation Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the ASCII File Export Name dialog box to save the result in ASCII format to a specified file and directory For further details refer also to the ASCII File Export soft key ASCII File Export on page 140 Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST on page 340 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements ASCII File Export Save Evaluation List List Evaluation Spectrum Emis sion Mask Opens the ASCII File Export Name dialog box and saves the active peak list in ASCII format to the specified file and directory The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data sec tion containing the marker
315. m5 IQIN 12 07 2010 11 10 10 Fig 6 17 Power vs Symbol result display Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP PVSYmbol see on page 204 T Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 55 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 1 4 5 6 1 4 6 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 7 Power vs Symbol on page 320 Composite EVM RMS This result display is used to measure the modulation accuracy It determines the error vector magnitude EVM over the total signal The EVM is the root of the ratio of the mean error power to the power of an ideally generated reference signal To calculate the mean error power the root mean square average of the real and imaginary parts of the signal is used The EVM is shown in The diagram consists of a composite EVM for each half slot Set the number of slots via the Capture Length on page 74 field The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The selected half slot is displayed red Composite EVM ei Clrw Start Slot 0 1 Half Slots Stop Slot 5 Fig 6 18 Composite EVM result display Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and t
316. mand sets the number of peaks per range that are stored in the list Once the selected number of peaks has been reached the peak search is stopped in the current range and continued in the next range Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt NumberPeaks gt 1 to 50 RST 25 CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC PSE SUBR 10 Sets 10 peaks per range to be stored in the list 7 2 4 5 CALCulate STATistics subsystem GAL Gulate n STATistics CODF S TATe 2 212222222222 Letonia edere hn SE mp cake a a eI LER DS 236 CAL Culate nz GTATeticehNGAMples cece eee ee eee ae ae ae tnn enne enne nnn nnns nnn nn nnn nn 236 e e HIE ENNEN TEE 237 CAL Culate nz GTATlstceREGultTracez seen aa senes AES 237 CAL Culate nz GTATlsttce GCAleATOoONCE 238 CALCulate nz GTATlstceGCAlexhbRAaNGe hen esnnenss arse stis nasa sns saa 238 GALCulatesm ssSTATIsticssSCALe2CREEWVel 2 2 a ie anaa e adam enit rents 238 CALCu late lt n gt STATistics SCALe N LOWE crrr aered ai or aa aeeiiaii ii E 239 CAL Culate nz GTATlstce GCALexv UNITA 239 CAL CGulatesn STAMIstics SCALE YUP EEN 239 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe lt State gt This command switches on or off the measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution function CCDF On activating this function the APD measurement is switched off Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC STAT CCDF O
317. me gt This command copies one channel table to another Select the channel table you want to copy using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command Parameters lt TargetFileName gt lt string gt name of the new channel table Example CONF CDP CTAB NAME CTAB 1 Selects channel table CTAB 1 for copying CONF CDP CTAB COPY CTAB 2 Copies CTAB 1 to CTAB 2 Usage Event Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See New Copy Edit on page 78 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA lt ChannelType gt lt CodeClass gt lt CodeNumber gt lt Modulation gt lt Reserved1 gt lt Reserved2 gt lt Status gt lt CDPRelative gt This command defines a channel table The following description applies to EVDO BTS mode K84 only For MS mode see CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle DATA on page 247 Before using this command you must set the name of the channel table using the CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect command For a detailed description of the parameters refer to New Copy Edit on page 78 CONFigure Subsystem Parameters lt ChannelType gt The channel type is numerically coded as follows 0 PILOT 1 MAC 2 PREAMBLE with 64 chip length 3 PREAMBLE with 128 chip length 4 PREAMBLE with 256 chip length 5 PREAMBLE with 512 chip length 6 PREAMBLE with 1024 chip length 7 DATA lt CodeClass gt Depending on channel type the following values are allowed PILOT 5
318. ment Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 214 Reference Manual Power vs Time Select the reference value for the limits manually Also refer to the description of the Reference Mean Pwr andSet Mean to Manual soft keys Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 214 Remote CALC LIM PVT RVAL numeric value Set Mean to Manual Power vs Time Pressing the softkey leads to the usage of the current mean power value of the aver aged time response as the fixed reference value for the limit lines The mode is Switched to Reference Manual Now the IDLE slot can be selected and the measure ment sequence can be finished 6 3 2 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Also refer to the description of the Reference Mean Pwr and Reference Manual soft keys Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime REFerence on page 214 Restart on Fail Power vs Time Evaluates the limit line over all results at the end of a single sweep The sweep restarts if the result is FAIL On a PASS or MARGIN result the sweep ends This softkey is only available in single sweep mode Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime FREStart on page 253 Restore STD Lines Power vs Time Restores the limit lines defined in the standard to the state they were in when the device was supplied In this way unintended overwriting of the standard lines c
319. mission chan nel The definition of the adjacent channel spacing in standards IS95C and CDMA 2000 is different These standards define the adjacent channel spacing from the center of the transmission channel to the closest border of the adjacent channel This defini tion is also used for the R amp S FSV if the standards marked with an asterisk are selected 6 4 15 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameters The Adjust Settings softkey see Adjust Settings on page 131 automatically optimi zes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration as described in the following p Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 196 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Frequency span The frequency span must at least cover the channels to be measured plus a mea surement margin of approx 10 96 If the frequency span is large in comparison to the channel bandwidth or the adja cent channel bandwidths being examined only a few points on the trace are avail able per channel This reduces the accuracy of the waveform calculation for the channel filter used which has a negative effect on the measurement accuracy It is therefore strongly recommended that the formulas mentioned be taken into consid eration when selecting the frequency span For channe
320. mit Start on page 137 SENSe Subsystem SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STOP Limit This command sets a relative limit value at the stop frequency of the specified range Different from manual operation this setting is independently of the defined limit check type Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Limit gt 400 to in 400 dBc RST 50 dBc Example ESP RANG3 LIM REL STOP 20 Sets a relative limit of 20 dBc at the stop frequency of the range Manual operation See Rel Limit Stop on page 137 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt STATe State This command sets the type of limit check for all ranges Suffix lt range gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ABSolute RELative AND OR ABSolute Checks only the absolute limits defined RELative Checks only the relative limits Relative limits are defined as rel ative to the measured power in the reference range AND Combines the absolute and relative limit The limit check fails when both limits are violated OR Combines the absolute and relative limit The limit check fails when one of the limits is violated RST REL Example ESP RANG3 LIM STAT AND Sets for all ranges the combined absolute relative limit check Manual operation See Limit Check 1 4 on page 136 SENSe JESPectrum RANGe lt range gt RLEVel Value This command sets the reference level for the specified range
321. mote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsystem on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 17 Peak Code Domain Error on page 325 6 1 4 15 Code Domain Error This result display shows the difference in power of the test signal and an ideally gen erated reference signal In the diagram the codes are plotted on the x axis The num ber of codes corresponds to the base spreading factor which depends on the channel type Refer to chapter 6 4 3 Channel Type Characteristics on page 177 for an over view of the spreading factors for each channel type The y axis is a logarithmic level axis that shows the error power of each channel Since it is an error power active and inactive channels can be rated jointly at a glance The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single half slot Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 63 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Code Domain Error Power IQ 1 Clrw Start Code 0 2 Code Stop Code 31 Fig 6 28 Code Domain Error result display The power values of the active and inactive codes are displayed in different colors e Yellow active code e Cyan inactive code Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XPOW CDEP see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate
322. multiplied by factor 1 5 to result in 180 kHz ALT5 210 kHz ALT6 240 kHz ALT7 If a ACLR or MC ACLR measurement is started all settings according to the stand ard including the channel bandwidths and channel spacings are set and can be adjusted afterwards Remote command ENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel channel on page 304 ENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel on page 303 ENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate lt channel gt on page 303 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Names lt Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Define user specific channel names for each channel The names defined here are dis played in the result diagram and result table Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ACHannel on page 300 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate lt channel gt on page 300 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel lt channel gt on page 300 Weighting Filter Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Define weighting filters for all channels Weighting filters are not available for all sup ported standards and cannot always be defined manually where they are available The dialog contains the following fields Field Description Channel TX 1 18 TX channels e ADJ Adjacent channel ALT1 11 Alternate channels Active Activates Deactivates the weighting filter for the selected and any subsequent channels of the same type Alpha Defi
323. n Enter the name of the selected channel table which will be saved under lt name gt xml The name is case sensitive and may not contain spaces It must be a valid MS Windows file name Note that the old channel table file is not deleted Enter further information about the channel table Channel Type Select one of the channel types from the dropdown menu Walsh Ch SF Enter the Channel Number Ch and Spreading Factor SF For some channel types the possible values are limited or preset e g F PICH F TDPICH and F PDCH Symbol Rate ksps Modulation Display of the symbol rate Enter the modulation type for the channel Power dB Contains the measured relative code domain power The unit is dB The fields are filled with values after pressing the Meas on page 80 softkey Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Item Description State Indicates whether a channel is active or inactive DomainConflict A red bullet indicates if there s a conflict of any sorts between two or more channels e g two conflicting channel codes Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle NAME on page 248 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle COPY on page 245 Add Channel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Inserts a new channel below the one selected For a description of the parameters of the channel refer to the New Copy Edit softkey The default values for a new channel
324. n 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definition select the Man mode again If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 333 INPut EATT on page 333 Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 260 Ref Level Position Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis The setting range is from 200 to 200 0 corresponding to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Only available for RF measurements except for Power vs Time measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 261 Grid Abs Rel Switches between absolute and relative scaling of the level axis not available with Linear range Only available for RF measurements except for Power vs Time measurements Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Abs Absolute scal
325. n Mask menu Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors Signal generator settings Frequency 833 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO MS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO MS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and select the 1xEV DO MS Analysis option 3 Start the measurement a Press the MEAS key b Press the Spectrum Emission Mask softkey 4 Set the center frequency a Press the FREQ key and enter 833 49 MHz 5 Set the reference level a Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm 6 Select a bandclass a Press the Bandclass softkey and select BandClass 0 800 MHz Cellular Band from the list On the screen the spectrum of the signal is displayed including the limit line defined in the standard To understand where and about how much the measurement has failed the List Evaluation table shows the frequencies where spurious emissions occur Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error 4 3 Measuring the Relative Code Domain Power and the Frequency Error A Code Domain Power measurement analyses the signal over a single slot It also determines the power of all codes and channels The following examples show a Code Domain Power measurement on a test model with 9 channels In this measurement changing some parameters one after t
326. n the following order lt channel type gt lt code class gt lt code number gt lt modulation gt lt absolute level gt lt rela tive level gt lt timing offset gt lt phase offset gt The channels are listed in the following channel type order PILOT MAC PREAMBLE DATA Within the channel types the channels are sorted in ascending code number order TRACe DATA Results Value Description Range Unit lt channel type gt channel type indication The channel type is coded with numbers as follows 0 PILOT 1 MAC 2 PREAMBLE with 64chip 3 PREAMBLE with 128chip 4 PREAMBLE with 256chip 5 PREAMBLE with 512chip 6 PREAMBLE with 1024chip 7 DATA 0 7 channel type code class code class of the channel Code class depends on channel type PILOT 5 MAC 6 PREAMBLE 5 DATA 4 spreading factor 2 0 class 2 7 lt code number gt code number of the channel 0 spreading evaluation of the timing and phase offset is not active see SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 274 or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the value 9 is returned For inactive channels the value 9 is returned factor 1 modulation Modulation type including mapping 0 BPSK I 1 BPSK Q 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM 10 64 QAM lt absolute level gt absolute level of the code channel at the selected channel Le sel slot dB
327. na ceveesteceees 263 SENSe Subsystem irri nne iria na dnvar aaan asinina urai nda duindu duunaa 264 SENSe CDPower S bsystem a reti aei n a Ec 264 Other SENSe Commands Referenced in this Manual 274 STATUS subsystem eniin ene seras Pa annud ek atra au ie teg en anas Eua eO Da aai 313 7 8 TRAC Subsystem cecctes ce cccctessceseectes cevesctted cesseaneceessentecavescteedeeescetteceess 314 7 9 TRACe DATA ReSUItS us EeEKEEEEESESEEEEEEEEEEREEHERREEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEEREEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEESSEREEEEEE EEN 314 7 9 1 Code Domain Power BTS mode 315 7 9 2 Code Domain Power MS mode 316 7 9 3 General Results Channel Results BTS Mode 317 7 9 4 Result Summary MS Mode 318 1 9 5 Power vs Chip BTS Mode eerte iR dere idea ed ek 320 7 9 6 Power vs Halfslot MS Mode 320 TOT Power ve Symbols chere rette e eta cen rte ee a ree ee rr e c dde 320 9 8 Composite GE 320 7 9 9 Composite Data EVM MS Mode 321 7 9 10 Composite Data Constellation MS Mode 321 7 9 11 Composite Data Bitstream MS Mode 321 7 9 12 Channel Table Trace BTS model 321 7 9 13 Channel Table Trace MS model 323 7 9 14 Channel Table CTABle BTS Mode 324 7 9 15 Channel Table CTABle MS Mode nennen 324 F 9 16 esucuDm 325 T917 Peak Code Domain EITOF iore n rere eo rti ned tere cade e ta ed ened 325 7 9 18 Code Domain Error BTS Mode 325 7 9 19 Code Domain Error MS Mode 326 7 9 20
328. nction is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt Value gt RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Sets the attenuation on the attenuator to 30 dB and switches off the coupling to the reference level Mode all Manual operation See RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual on page 109 INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level state ON or switches the input attenuation to manual entry state OFF This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation set on the attenuator to the reference level Manual operation See RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto on page 110 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC DC RST AC Example INP COUP DC Manual operation See Input AC DC on page 111 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital baseband input from the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 For details see the section Interface Status Information for the R amp S Digital UO Inter face
329. nd channel bandwidths are configured in the SENSe POWer subsystem Note If CPOWer is selected the number of adjacent channels SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs is set to 0 If ACPower is selected the number of adjacent channels is set to 1 unless adjacent channel power measurement is switched on already The channel adjacent channel power measurement is performed for the trace selected with SENSe POWer TRACe The occupied bandwidth measurement is performed for the trace on which marker 1 is positioned To select another trace for the measurement marker 1 is to be positioned on the desired trace by means of CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker CALCulate Subsystem Parameters lt MeasType gt ACPower CPOWer MCACpower OBANdwidth OBWidth CN CNO ACPower Adjacent channel power measurement with a single carrier sig nal CPOWer Channel power measurement with a single carrier signal equiv alent to adjacent channel power measurement with NO OF ADJ CHAN 7 0 MCACpower Channel adjacent channel power measurement with several car rier signals OBANdwidth OBWidth Measurement of occupied bandwidth CN Measurement of carrier to noise ratio CNO Measurement of carrier to noise ratio referenced to 1 Hz band width Example CALC MARK FUNC POW SEL ACP Switches on adjacent channel power measurement CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt
330. nd relative power referred to the total power in the channel type of the channel e T Offs Shows the timing offset between the current channel and the first active channel It can be enabled by means of Time Phase Estimation On Off e Ph Offs Phase offset between this channel and the first active channel It can be enabled by means of Time Phase Estimation On Off Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR CTABle see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub System on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 12 Channel Table Trace BTS mode on page 321 p M r 1 Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 42 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis 6 1 3 8 Channel Bitstream This result display provides information on the demodulated bits for the selected chan nel type All bits that are part of inactive channels are marked as being invalid by means of dashes For 64QAM modulation is displayed for 16QAM modulation for 8PSK modulation for QPSK and for BPSK The measurement evaluates a single channel type over a single slot Bitstream Table IQ 1 Clrw ES BS ee eee eee HERES Fig 6 8 Channel Bitstream
331. nes the alpha value for the weighting filter for the selected and any subsequent chan nels of the same type Remote command POW ACH FILT CHAN1 ON see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel lt channel gt on page 299 Activates the weighting filter for TX channel 1 POW ACH FILT ALPH CHAN1 0 35 see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel lt channel gt on page 298 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for TX channel 1 to 0 35 POW ACH FILT ACH ON see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel on page 298 Activates the weighting filter for the adjacent channel POW ACH FILT ALPH ACH 0 35 see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel on page 298 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the adjacent channel to 0 35 POW ACH FILT ALT1 ON see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate lt channel gt on page 299 Activates the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate channel 1 POW ACH FILT ALPH ALT1 0 35 see SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate channel on page 298 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate channel 1 to 0 35 Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Activate and define the limits for the ACLR measurement Limit Checking Limits Channel Setup CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Activate or deactivate limit checking for the ACLR measurement Softkeys and
332. ng remote control ACLR Ref Spacing remote control Add Channel K84 te Adjust Ref Level 2 tnter Adjust Ref Level remote control Adjust Ref Ev rtr etie ttr trt ens Adjust Settings remote control APD remote control ASCII File Export ASCII File Export remote control Auto remote control Auto All eene Barldclass 4 emn treten Burst ee geed NEE EE C N remote control C No remote control Cancel K84 CGBF 2t CCDF remote control S Center Mkr Freq remote control CF Stepsize remote control ssss Ch Power ACLR Chan Pwr Hz eene Chan Pwr Hz remote control Channel Bandwidth Channel Bandwidth remote control ge Channel Settings 29 2 rrt rt enge 126 Channel Spacing remote control 303 304 Channel Table Settings K84 77 97 Gleat Write snenia herr ren eee 131 Code Domain Analyzer esee 123 Cont Meas remote control sssssss 340 Continue Single Sweep remote control 339 340 Continuous Sweep remote control Coupling Ratio ee etes CP ACP MC ACLR remote control 210 212 CP ACLR Config Decim
333. ng the CP ACLR Standard softkey or the CALC MARK FUNC POW PRES command Standard GUl Parameter SCPI Parameter EUTRA LTE Square EUTRA LTE Square EUTRa EUTRA LTE Square RRC EUTRA LTE Square RRC REUTRa W CDMA 3 84 MHz forward W CDMA 3GPP FWD FW3G W CDMA 3 84 MHz reverse W CDMA 3GPP REV RW3G R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Standard GUI Parameter SCPI Parameter CDMA IS95A forward CDMA IS95A FWD F8CD FIS95a CDMA IS95A reverse CDMA IS95A REV R8CD RIS95a CDMA IS95C Class 0 forward CDMA IS95C Class 0 FWD FIS95c0 CDMA IS95C Class 0 reverse CDMA IS95C Class 0 REV RIS95c0 CDMA J STD008 forward CDMA J STD008 FWD F19C FJ008 CDMA J STD008 reverse CDMA J STD008 REV R19C RJO08 CDMA IS95C Class 1 forward CDMA IS95C Class 1 FWD FIS95c1 CDMA IS95C Class 1 reverse CDMA IS95C Class 1 REV RIS95c1 CDMA 2000 CDMA 2000 S2CD TD SCDMA forward TD SCDMA FWD FTCD TCDMa TD SCDMA reverse TD SCDMA REV RTCD WLAN 802 11A WLAN 802 11A AWLan WLAN 802 11B WLAN 802 11B BWLan WiMAX WiMAX WiMAX WIBRO WIBRO WIBRO GSM GSM GSM RFID 14443 RFID 14443 RFID14443 TETRA TETRA TETRA PDC PDC PDC PHS PHS PHS CDPD CDPD CDPD APCO 25 Phase 2 APCO 25 P2 PAPCo25 For the R amp S FSV the channel spacing is defined as the distance between the center frequency of the adjacent channel and the center frequency of the trans
334. nge remote control 284 Insert before Range tenerent 137 Insert before Range remote control 284 Last Spalt eerte rene tr Peer rire 156 Limit Chk On Off remote control 225 229 Link Mrk1 and Delta remote control 218 List Evaluation nete 139 List Evaluation On Off re 139 Load KEE MEET 143 Manual e raana 154 Manual remote control A 293 de Ur EE 139 Marker 1 remote coritrol 2 rte 221 Marker 1 to 4 remote control 222 Marker 2 remote control ern 221 Marker 3 remote Control sonst 221 Marker 4 remote control seeseesss 221 Marker Norm Delta remote control 221 Marker Table Off On Aut remote control 255 Marker to Trace remote control 221 Max TR 131 Meas K84 nint treten tns 80 101 Meas Start Stop o nemen rendi ti reddis 143 Meas Start Stop remote control 340 Meas Time A to teneret 276 Meas Time Manual 276 Min remote control 220 Next Min remote control 0 cece eee eee 220 Next Peak remote control 221 No of HalfSlots 5 retenti 150 Noise GOFFeCtlon iie toten rt ten nen 133 Noise Source Noise Src On Off remote contr
335. nge 3 Example ESP RANG1 STAR 100000000 Sets the start frequency for range 1 to 100 MHz Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop on page 134 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FREQuency STOP Frequency This command sets the stop frequency for the specified range For further details refer to the SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range FREQuency STARt command SENSe Subsystem Note the rules for the lt Frequency gt parameter specified in chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 192 Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt Frequency gt numeric value RST 2 52 MHz range 1 2 52 MHz range 2 250 0 MHz range 3 Example ESP RANG3 STOP 10000000 Sets the stop frequency for range 2 to 10 MHz Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop on page 134 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation Value This command sets the attenuation for the specified range Note that this parameter can not be set for all ranges if Fast SEM mode is activated see SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed on page 278 Suffix range 1 20 range Parameters Value Refer to the data sheet RST 0 dB Example ESP RANG3 INP ATT 10 Sets the attenuation of range 3 to 10 dB Manual operation See RF Attenuator on page 136 SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command activates or deactivates the automatic RF attenuation setting for the
336. ngly Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range LIMit source STATe on page 286 CALCulate n LIMit k FAIL on page 229 Abs Limit Start Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets an absolute limit value at the start frequency of the range dBm This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Limit Check 1 4 on page 136 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STARt on page 284 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Abs Limit Stop Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets an absolute limit value at the stop frequency of the range dBm This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Limit Check 1 4 on page 136 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt ABSolute STOP on page 285 Rel Limit Start Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets a relative limit value at the start frequency of the range dBc This parameter is only available if the limit check is set accordingly see Limit Check 1 4 on page 136 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt LIMit lt source gt RELative STARt on page 285 Rel Limit Stop Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Sets a relative limit value at the stop frequency of the
337. ngth is defined via the SENSe CDPower IOLength on page 266 command Example CDP SLOT 2 Selects power control group 2 Mode EVDO Manual operation See Select on page 87 See Select on page 106 SENS CDP SMODe Mode The mehtod used for the two synchronization stages the frame synchronization detection of the first chip of the frame and the rough frequency phase synchroniza tion R amp S FSV K84 K85 Remote Commands of the 1xEV DO Analysis Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO The following modes are tried sequentially until synchronization was successful If none of the methods was successful a failed synchronization is reported If the result of the correlation meth ods sync on Pilot and Auxiliary Pilot becomes increasingly worse due to bad power conditions the non data aided syn chronization works optimally and synchronization should be suc cessful BIL ot For frame synchronization this method uses the correlation characteristic of the known pilot channel i e pilot channel sequence spreading code including scrambling sequence The correlation must be calculated for all hypotheses of the scrambling code 32768 for external triggers only 2048 in order to get the correct peak at the position where the frame begins This correlation method may fail if the power of the underlying pilot channel is too low compared to the total power In this case the expected correlation peak is hidden by the upcoming auto cor
338. nnel Tables on page 176 Remote command SENSe CDPower CTYPe on page 266 Mapping Type Select Channel Settings The mapping mode determines whether the complex signal the or the Q branch is analyzed in the measurement Use manual mapping to obtain the option of examining any channel type as either a complex signal or in the and Q branch This setting is valid for any channel type Also refer to Mapping Auto on page 76 Remote command SENSe CDPower MMODe on page 268 Mapping Auto Select Channel Settings Automatically sets the type of mapping to be used in the measurement according to the following table Channel type Mapping Pilot lor Q MAC lor Q Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Channel type Mapping Preamble lorQ Data Complex Remote command SENSe CDPower MMODe on page 268 Channel Table Settings Opens the Channel Table Settings dialog box and the corresponding submenu Predefined Channel Table Settings Channel Search Mode Predefined 6 Auto Search Inactive Channel Threshold 40 0 dB Channel Tables DO16QAM DOS8PSK DO IDLE DOQPSK l1xEV DO standard table Predefined channel tables are a way to customize measurements The RECENT chan nel table contains the last configuration used before switching from Auto Search to Predefined The DOQPSK DO8PSK DO16QAM and DO I
339. nnel type The number of results then changes in most analyses such as code domain power symbol EVM and bit stream because either a different spreading factor or a different number of symbols is available for the analysis Parameters lt ChannelType gt PILot MAC PREamble DATA RST PILOT Example CDP CTYP MAC Select MAC channel type Mode EVDO Manual operation See Channel Type on page 76 SENSe CDPower ICTReshold lt ThresholdLevel gt This command defines the minimum power which a single channel must have com pared to the total signal in order to be regarded as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive Parameters lt ThresholdLevel gt Range 100 to 10 RST 40 dB Default unit dB Example CDP ICTR 10 Sets the minimum power threshold to 10 dB Mode EVDO Manual operation See Inactive Channel Threshold on page 78 SENSe CDPower IQLength lt CaptureLength gt This command sets the capture length in multiples of the slot Parameters lt CaptureLength gt Range 2 to 12 RST 3 Example CDP IQL 10 Sets the capture length to 10 Mode EVDO Manual operation See Capture Length on page 74 SENSe CDPower LCODe Mask Defines the long code mask of the branch of the mobile in hexadecimal form SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt Mask gt Range HO to H4FFFFFFFFFF RST HO Example CDP LCOD I HF Define long code mask Mode CDMA EV
340. nob Inthe range from 101 to 1001 the sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 100 points Inthe range from 1001 to 32001 the sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 1000 points e Entry via keypad All values in the defined range can be set The default value is 691 sweep points This softkey is available for RF measurements Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 310 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for RF Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Input Output menu for RF measurements For CDA measurements see chapter 6 2 9 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu for CDA Measurements on page 116 Mput ACDC ERE 171 NOLE SOUE ocra a a EE cuts 171 hu eje EE 171 POWER SemBOF cisco dice aa student ied eh row tuned c er does d dades e ga SA E FRU OO 172 direi gei EE 172 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 329 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off For details on con nectors refer to the R amp S FSV Quick Start Guide Front and Rear Panel chapter Remote command DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce on page 338 Video Output Sends a video output signal according to the measured level to the connector on the rear pane
341. ns the following results are displayed by default Screen A shows the diagram of the Composite EVM measurement result In screen B the result summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the Code Domain Power measurement including the values for the Composite EVM Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error The Code Domain Error Power describes the quality of the measured signal compared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSV In the I Q plane the error vec tor represents the difference of the measured signal and the ideal signal The Code Domain Error is the difference in power on symbol level of the measured and the refer ence signal projected to the class of of the base spreading factor The unit of the result is dB Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error In the Peak Code Domain Error PCDE measurement the maximum error value over all channels is determined and displayed for a given slot The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time On screen the results are shown in a diagram in which the x axis represents the slots and the y axis shows the PCDE val ues A measurement of the RHO factor is shown in the second part of the example RHO is the normalized correlated power between the measured and the ideal reference sig nal The maximum value of RHO is 1 In that case the measured signal and the refer ence signal are identical When measuring RHO it is required that only the pilot ch
342. nt softkey Sweep Count on page 112 Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 339 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggering starts the number of sweeps that are defined by using the Sweep Count softkey The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 339 Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey without deleting the trace of the last measurement This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 339 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either downwards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display
343. ntains the settings infor mation of the range There have to be at least three defined ranges one reference range and at least one range to either side of the reference range The maximum num ber of ranges is 20 Note that the R amp S FSV uses the same ranges in each power class Therefore the contents of the ranges of each defined power class have to be identical to the first power class An exception are the Start and Stop values of the two Limit nodes that are used to determine the power class Note also that there are two Limit nodes to be defined one that gives the limit in absolute values and one in relative values Make sure units for the Start and Stop nodes are identical for each Limit node For details refer to the Sweep List softkey Sweep List on page 134 and the corre sponding parameter description The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in table 6 14 The following tables show the child nodes and attributes of each element and show if a child node or attribute is mandatory for the R amp S FSV to interpret the file or not Since the hierarchy of the XML can not be seen in the tables either view one of the default files already stored on the R amp S FSV in the C Nr s instr sem_std directory or check the structure as shown below Below a basic example of the structure of the file is shown containing all mandatory attributes and child nodes Note that the PowerClass element and the range element are them
344. nted in the basic unit For the other modes the corresponding options are required Upper Lower Case Notation Upper lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Special Characters A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands These keywords are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these key words needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is inde pendent of which of the keywords is used Example SENSe FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands with identical meaning can be created They set the fre quency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz SENSe FREQuency CW 1E3 SENSe FREQuency FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Selection of the parameters for the command SENSe 1 4 AVERage 1 4 TYPE VIDeo LINear Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the
345. nu For details refer to chapter 6 2 1 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer menu in BTS mode on page 70 or chapter 6 2 2 Softkeys of the Code Domain Analyzer Menu in MS Mode on page 87 For details on the measurements in the code domain initial configuration and screen layout refer to chapter 6 1 Measurements and Result Dis plays on page 32 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 251 Power Starts the Signal Channel Power measurement in which the power of a single channel is determined Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 251 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 210 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Adjust Ref Lvl Power Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the set tings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSV or limiting the dynamic range by a too small S N ratio For details on manual settings see Settings of CP ACLR test parameters in the description of the base unit The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a standard To achieve an opti mum dynamic range the reference level has to be set in a way that places the signal maximum close to the reference level without forcing an overload message Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lowe
346. nual 5 nns Mech Atten Manual remote control MINION oa riii etr tren Preamp On Off de EE Preamp On Off remote control Ref Level 2e tereti Ref Level remote Control ssssss Ies BW Auto netter ee tree tre ts Res BW Manual RE Atten AUTO errore ent RF Atten Auto remote control RF Atten Manual sssrinin RF Atten Manual remote control Save remote control Soale iod rte Single Meas remote control le UE EE 111 168 Single Sweep remote control 339 SWEEP side eidi 164 169 Sweep Count remote control sssss 306 Sweep List sssri irean 134 Sweep Time remote Control 311 Sweep Type eet 164 169 Sweeptime Auto we eee ttd ein 164 169 Sweeptime Manual oeseeeeeeseseeeseseree 155 163 168 Sweeptime Manual remote control 311 Trace Mode remote control sssss 257 Trg Gate Source remote control 335 337 Trigger Offset ani ses 75 93 113 Trigger TE 172 Video BW Autos coti icit tte tH tees 163 Video BW Manual saires issira 162 VIEW ssion 114 180 Y AXIS Maxim ecu ctr e rtp ales 109 Y AXIS MINIMUM 22i wei etait 109 Softkeys Lower Level Hysteresis onere 116 Upper Level Hysteresis e
347. o enter the frequency span The center frequency remains the same when you change the span The following range is allowed span 0 0 Hz span gt 0 SpaNnmin S f span S f max fmax and span are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency SPAN on page 295 Sweeptime Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time Sweep time absolute max sweep time value 16000 s absolute min sweep time value zero span 1 us span gt 0 depends on device model refer to data sheet Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time For rotary knob or UPARROW DNARROW key inputs the sweep time is adjusted in steps either downwards or upwards The manual input mode of the sweep time is indicated by a green bullet next to the SWT display in the channel bar If the selected sweep time is too short for the selected bandwidth and span level measurement errors will occur due to a too short settling time for the resolution or video filters In this case the R amp S FSV displays the error message UNCAL and marks the indicated sweep time with a red bullet This softkey is available for RF measurements but not for CCDF or Power vs Time measurements Remote command SWE TIME AUTO OFF see SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 311 SENSe SWEep TIME on page 311
348. ocedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Select the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis Mode a Press the MODE key and select 1xEV DO BTS Analysis 3 Select the Code Domain Analyzer a Press the MEAS key b Press the Code Domain Analyzer softkey 4 Start the measurement a In the Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Display Config softkey b Select the tab for Screen A c Select the Code Domain Power measurement Measuring the Triggered Relative Code Domain Power 5 Set the center frequency and the reference level a Inthe Code Domain Analyzer menu press the Frontend Settings softkey b In the Center Frequency field enter 878 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box In the two screens the following results are displayed by default screen A shows the code domain power of the signal Compared to the measurement without an external trigger see previous example the repetition rate of the measurement increases In screen B the result summary is displayed In the row Trigger to Frame the offset between the trigger event and and the start of the slot is shown 3 4 4 Adjusting the Trigger Offset The delay between the trigger event and the start of the slot can be compensated for by adjusting the trigger offset e Set an external trigger source and the trigger offset Open the IQ Capture dialog box Setthe Trigg
349. ode ee rr c ecd 320 7 9 8 Composite GE 320 7 9 9 Composite Data EVM MS Mode 321 7 9 10 Composite Data Constellation MS Mode 321 7 9 11 Composite Data Bitstream MS Mode 321 7 9 12 Channel Table Trace BTS model 321 7 9 13 Channel Table Trace MS model 323 7 9 14 Channel Table CTABle BTS Mode 324 7 9 15 Channel Table CTABle MS Mode 324 75 9 16 Channel Bltstreain eio TEEN chance retia eerte n cha eure thee ka re e dee xk de 325 9 17 Peak Code Doman EITOF iod ted crecer ee deti eda recetas aco e to EEEE 325 7 9 18 Code Domain Error BTS Mode ene eene 325 7 9 19 Code Domain Error MS Mode 326 7 920 Symbol Constellatiohi 1r nitidi race din Yes orae ipe ata Ld ED jo 327 6921 EVM Vs Symbolic nre ide d rer dra de aac ui ede 327 7 9 22 Composite Constellatton kk 327 9 23 Magnitude Error vs Clip datore eorr Eed ei Edda 327 7 9 24 Phase Error vs e DE 328 9 25 Symbol Magnitude Error ssc ecc eibi tees cena eot FER ud eire eda Lud ed o 328 69 26 Symbol Phase Ego iie eene tege race andi redes d E ense NEE 328 7 9 1 Code Domain Power BTS mode The command returns three values for each code in a channel in the following order code number gt lt absolute level relative level gt lt power ID Value Description Range Unit code number code number of the channel 0 spreading factor 1 absolute level absolute level of the code channel dBm at the sel
350. of 30 kHz is used This yields correct results since the spectrum in the neighborhood of the adjacent channels normally has a constant level With the exception of the IS95 CDMA standards the Adjust Settings softkey sets the resolution bandwidth RBW as a function of the channel bandwidth RBW lt 1 40 of channel bandwidth The maximum possible resolution bandwidth with respect to the requirement RBW lt 1 40 resulting from the available RBW steps 1 3 is selected e Video bandwidth VBW For a correct power measurement the video signal must not be limited in band width A restricted bandwidth of the logarithmic video signal would cause signal averaging and thus result in a too low indication of the power 2 51 dB at very low video bandwidths The video bandwidth should therefore be selected at least three times the resolution bandwidth VBW 23 x RBW The Adjust Settings softkey sets the video bandwidth VBW as a function of the channel bandwidth see formula above and the smallest possible VBW with regard to the available step size will be selected e Detector Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 197 Further Information The Adjust Settings softkey selects the RMS detector This detector is selected since it correctly indicates the power irrespective of the characteristics of the signal to be measured The whole IF envelope is used to calculate the power for each measurement point The IF envelope is digitized using a sampling
351. of a trace It applies to all delta markers as long as the function is active Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX ON Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHZ CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise AUTO lt State gt This command turns an automatic peak search for the fixed reference marker at the end of a sweep on and off Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO AUTO ON Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in a phase noise measurement CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe lt State gt This command turns the phase noise measurement at the delta marker position on and off The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the measurement The reference marker for phase noise measurements is either a normal marker or a fixed reference If necessary the command turns on the reference marker A fixed reference point can be modified with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt
352. offset from the beginning of the recorded signal section to the start of the first slot In case of triggered data acquisition this corresponds to the timing offset frame to trigger trigger offset start of first slot If it was not possible to synchronize the R amp S FSV to the 1xEV DO signal this mea surement result is meaningless For the Free Run trigger mode dashes are displayed e Rho Pilot Shows the quality parameter RHO for the pilot channel Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 36 Measurements and Result Displays e Rho Overall 1 2 Shows the quality parameter RHO for all chips and over all slots According to the standard the averaging limit is on the half slot limit e Rho Mac Shows the quality parameter RHO for the MAC channel e Rho Data Shows the quality parameter RHO for the Data channel Slot specific results The Code Results in the lower part of the table show results specific to the selected slot Power Pilot Shows the absolute power of the Pilot channel in dBm e Power Mac Shows the absolute power of the Mac channel in dBm e Power Data Shows the absolute power of the Pilot channel in dBm Power Preamble Shows the absolute power of the Preamble channel in dBm e Composite EVM The composite EVM is the difference between the test signal and ideal reference signal For further details refer to the Composite EVM result display Max Power Data Shows the maximum power of the Data chann
353. og box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 260 Preamp On Off Frontend Settings Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 334 Adjust Ref Lvl Frontend Settings Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 276 IQ Capture Settings This softkey opens the IQ Capture Settings dialog box Common Settings Invert Q C On e ott Data Capture Settings Capture Length 3 Set Count 1 0 Set To Analyze Trigger Settings Trigger Source External 6 Free Run Trigger Polarity Positive C Negative Trigger Offset 0 0 s Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Invert Q IQ Capture Settings Inverts the sign of the signal s Q component The default setting is OFF Remote command SENSe CDPower QINVert on
354. ol OBW remote control 2 re 212 Occupied Bandwidth Peak remote control Ph Noise On Off remote control Ph Noise Ref Fixed remote control POWGEP P Power Mode trt teer trees Power Mode remote control in Power VS TIME drurit etre ge dee d e R amp S SUpDOIt rrr rr eter tene res Range Range Lin Unit Range Lin Unit remote control Range Linear 96 Range Linear 96 remote control Range Log remote control Range Log 1 dB Range Log 5 dB Range Log 10 dB etes Range Log 50 GB Range Log 100 dB Range Log Manual RBW VBW Manual RBW VBW Noise 10 RBW VBW Pulse 1 RBW VBW Sine 1 3 Recall remote control Ref Level remote control 5 mte Ref Level Offset eee Ref Level Offset remote control Ref Level Positloli 2 reme Ref Level Position remote control Ref Point Frequency remote control Ref Point Level remote control Ref Point Time remote control Ref Value remote control sssssss Ref Value Position remote control 261 Reference Manual Reference Mean Pwr Reference Position remote control 261 Reload K84 ee BW ee S Res BW remote control eerte 289 Res BW Auto remote control
355. on according to the center frequency is as follows Odd number of TX channels The middle TX channel is centered to center frequency Even number of TX channels The two TX channels in the middle are used to calculate the fre quency between those two channels This frequency is aligned to the center frequency e Adjacent channels right column Since all the adjacent channels often have the same distance to each other the modification of the adjacent channel spacing ADJ causes a change in all higher adjacent channel spacings ALT1 ALT2 they are all multiplied by the same factor new spacing value old spacing value Thus only one value needs to be entered in case of equal channel spacing A modification of a higher adjacent channel spacing ALT1 ALT2 causes a change by the same factor in all higher adjacent channel spacings while the lower adjacent channel spacings remain unchanged Example In the default setting the adjacent channels have the following spacing 20 kHz ADJ 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 100 kHz ALT4 If the spacing of the first adjacent channel ADJ is set to 40 kHz the spacing of all other adjacent channels is multiplied by factor 2 to result in 80 kHz ALT1 120 kHz ALT2 160 kHz ALT3 If starting from the default setting the spacing of the 5th adjacent channel ALTA is set to 150 kHz the spacing of all higher adjacent channels is
356. on page 162 See Video BW Auto on page 163 See Default Coupling on page 167 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio Ratio This command defines the ratio between video bandwidth Hz and resolution band width Hz Note that the ratio defined with the remote command VBW RBW is reciprocal to that of the manual operation RBW VBW 7 6 2 4 SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt Ratio gt Range 0 01 to 1000 RST 3 Example BAND VID RAT 3 Sets the coupling of video bandwidth to video bandwidth 3 resolution bandwidth Manual operation See RBW VBW Sine 1 1 on page 165 See RBW VBW Pulse 1 on page 165 See RBW VBW Noise 10 on page 166 See RBW VBW Manual on page 166 See Span RBW Auto 100 on page 166 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo TYPE Mode This command selects the position of the video filter in the signal path Changing the video filter position is possible only if the resolution bandwidth is 100 kHz Parameters Mode LiNear The video filter is applied in front of the logarithmic amplifier In linear mode measurements with a logarithmic level scale result in flatter falling edges compared to logarithmic mode The reason is the conversion of linear power values into logarithmic level values if you halve the linear power the logarithmic level decreases by 3 dB LOGarithmic The video filter is applied after the logarithmic amplifier RST LINear Example BAND VID TYPE LI
357. or b Inthe Center Frequency field enter 833 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box In the two screens the following results are displayed screen A shows the power of the code domain of the signal The x axis represents the individual channels or codes while the y axis shows the power of each channel In screen B the result summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the code domain power measurement including the frequency error Synchronization of the reference frequencies The frequency error can be reduced by synchronizing the transmitter and the receiver to the same reference frequency gt Press the SETUP key a Press the Reference Int Ext softkey to switch to an external reference Screen A again shows the Code Domain Power measurement and screen B the result summary After the synchronization of the reference frequencies of the devices the frequency error should now be smaller than 10 Hz Behavior with deviating center frequency setting A measurement can only be valid if the center frequency of the DUT and the analyzer are balanced gt On the signal generator change the center frequency in steps of 0 1 kHz and observe the analyzer screen Up to a frequency error of approximately 4 0 kHz a Code Domain Power measure ment on the R amp S FSV is still possible A frequency error within this range causes no apparent difference in the accuracy of t
358. or the measurements Parameters lt Subtype gt 0 1 2 3 0 1 subtype 0 1 2 subtype 2 3 subtype 3 RST 0 Example CONF CDP SUBT 3 Subtype 3 signal is analyzed Mode EVDO Manual operation See Subtype on page 82 See Subtype on page 102 DISPlay Subsystem The DISPLay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual and graphic information as well as of measurement data on the display DISPIAYIMITA Ble e a 255 DiSPlayp Te ER KEE 256 DISPlay WINDowc r SSELetct rli anei eeepc b neon enn Ln hann nen oho kae run Rau 256 DISPlayEWVINDOWsnF ST AVC ct cei aerea uda tet ene tereti pntat nt nta ott ttu etn 257 DISPlayE WINDow en TRAGest MODE iscissi ditenn rana co iier ote uriia 257 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe cessere rere 258 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe seesssssssesssssseee eene nnne 258 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelAUlTO enne 259 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE essent 259 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectz lt SCALelb Dhvislon een 260 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelRLEVel rnrn nnn nnnnnne 260 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet ueeeessssssesse 260 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition seen 261 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue esses nennen 261 bISPlayDWINDowens
359. or the selected channel configuration channel bandwidth channel spacing within a specific frequency range channel band width The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the instrument settings can be changed later R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis For details on the settings of span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth detector and trace averaging see chapter 6 4 15 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Param eters on page 196 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 301 Sweep Time Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the sweep time With the RMS detector a longer sweep time increases the stability of the measurement results The function of this softkey is identical to the Sweeptime Manual softkey in the Band width menu Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 311 Fast ACLR On Off Ch Power ACLR Switches between the IBW method Fast ACLR Off and the zero span method Fast ACLR On When switched on the R amp S FSV sets the center frequency consecutively to the differ ent channel center frequencies and measures the power with the selected measure ment time sweep time number of channels The RBW filters suitable for the selected standard and frequency offset are automatically used e g root raised cos with IS 136 For details on available channel filters see chapter 6 4 6 Selecting the Appropriate Filter Type
360. ox This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 337 Trigger Source External IQ Capture Settings Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel An edit dialog box is displayed to define the external trigger level For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 337 Trigger Polarity IQ Capture Settings Sets the polarity of the trigger source Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default set ting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode This softkey is available for code domain measurements Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restarted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a O to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 337 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 308 Trigger Offset IQ Capture Settings Opens an edit dialog
361. pan 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretrigger 4 sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Ana lyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trig ger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 336 Softkeys of the Trace Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Trace menu in 1xEV DO Analysis modes for Code Domain Analysis measurements For RF measurements see the description for the base unit GIG ON WMO oreet en cer Sinne eria aei N O iaeasasuaanneiaeiadaaadaads 114 MaX EON E 114 Di e EE 114 PROV AG gece E 114 MIG a PEE 114 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting All available detectors can be selected Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 257 Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis
362. pe and all other channel types is analyzed in complex mode Mode EVDO Manual operation See Mapping Type on page 76 See Mapping Auto on page 76 This command activates or deactivates the elimination of the IQ offset from the signal Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CDPower NORMalize ON Activates the elimination of the I Q offset Mode EVDO Manual operation See Normalize on page 83 See Normalize on page 103 SENSe CDPower OPERation lt Mode gt The operation mode is used for the channel search SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt Mode gt ACCess TRAFfic ACCess Only PICH always available and DATA channels can exist TRAFfic All channels PICH RRI DATA ACK and DRC can exist PICH and RRI are always in the signal RST TRAFfic For further details refer to Code Order on page 103 Example CDP ORD HAD Sets Hadamard order TRAC TRACE2 Reads out the results in Hadamard order CDP ORD BITR Sets BitReverse order TRAC TRACE2 Reads out the results in BitReverse order Mode EVDO SENSe CDPower ORDer lt SortOrder gt This command sets the channel sorting for the Code Domain Power and Code Domain Error Power result displays Parameters lt SortOrder gt HADamard BITReverse RST HADamard For further details refer to Code Order on page 103 Example CDP ORD HAD Sets Hadamard order TRAC TRACE2 Reads out the results in Hadamard order CDP ORD BITR Sets Bi
363. pens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital out put to a connected device Transmitter Type Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 119 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis RX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital input from a connected device Receiver Type Send To EXIQ The configuration settings defined in the dialog box are transferred to the R amp S EX IQ BOX Firmware Update EXIQ If a firmware update for the R amp S EX IQ BOX is delivered with the R amp S FSV firmware this function is available In this case when you select the softkey the firmware update is performed R amp S Support EXIQ Stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors This data is stored in the C R_S Instr user Support directory on the instru ment If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster DiglConf EXIQ Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is only available if the optional software is installed To return to the R amp S FSV application press any key on the front panel The applica tion is displayed with the EXIQ menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Di
364. per second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power See Limit Checking on page 129 CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt Channel gt RELative STATe lt State gt This command activates the limit check for the alternate adjacent channels for adjacent channel power measurements Before the command the limit check must be activated using CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower STATe The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate lt channel gt RELative Note that a complete measurement must be performed between switching on the limit check and the result query since otherwise no correct results are obtained Suffix n Selects the measurement window lt k gt irrelevant lt Channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM ACP ALT2 30DB 30DB Sets the relative limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 30 dB below the channel power CALC LIM ACP ALT2 ABS 35DBM 35DBM Sets the absolute limit value for the power in the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel to 35 dBm CALC LIM ACP ON Switches on globally the limit check for the channel adjacent channel measurement CALC LIM ACP ALT2 STAT ON Switches on the check of the relative limit values for the lower and upper second alternate adjacent channel CA
365. peration See Sweep Time Mode on page 135 7 6 2 3 SENSe Subsystem SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt TRANsducer lt TransducerName gt This command sets a transducer for the specified range You can only choose a trans ducer that fulfills the following conditions e The transducer overlaps or equals the span of the range The x axis is linear The unit is dB Suffix lt range gt 1 20 range Parameters lt TransducerName gt string name of the transducer Example ESP RANG1 TRAN test Sets the transducer called test for range 1 Manual operation See Transd Factor on page 136 SENSe ESPectrum RRANge This command returns the current position number of the reference range Example ESP RRAN Returns the current position number of the reference range SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe Type This command sets the power reference type Parameters Type PEAK CPOWer PEAK Measures the highest peak within the reference range CPOWer Measures the channel power within the reference range integral bandwidth method RST CPOWer Example ESP RTYP PEAK Sets the peak power reference type Manual operation See Edit Reference Range on page 138 SENSe BANDwidth subsystem SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution ccnccenctntt tete 289 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO eccccctn ttt 289 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT
366. played The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to Positive Peak This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of enve lope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 257 Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to Negative Peak This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visi ble Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 257 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Count determines the number of averaging procedures All available detectors can be selected If the detector is automatically selected the sample detector is used see chapter 6 4 4 Detector Overview on page 178 This mode is not available fo
367. ple POW ACH BWID ALT2 30 kHz Manual operation See Bandwidth on page 126 SENSe Subsystem SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel lt Alpha gt This command defines the roll off factor for the weighting filter of the adjacent channel Parameters lt Alpha gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 22 Example POW ACH FILT ALPH ACH 0 35 Manual operation See Weighting Filter on page 129 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate lt channel gt Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the weighting filter of the specified alternate channel Suffix lt channel gt 1 11 the alternate channel Parameters Alpha numeric value RST 0 22 Example POW ACH FILT ALPH ALT3 0 35 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the alternate channel 3 to 0 35 Manual operation See Weighting Filter on page 129 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel channel Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the weighting filter of the specified TX channel Suffix channel 1 11 the TX channel Parameters Alpha numeric value RST 0 22 Example POW ACH FILT ALPH CHAN3 0 35 Sets the alpha value for the weighting filter for the TX channel 3 to 0 35 Manual operation See Weighting Filter on page 129 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel lt State gt This command activates the weighting filter for the adjacent channel SENSe Subsystem Parameters l
368. power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas lt mean power gt lt peak power gt lt crest factor gt The required result is selected via the following parameters CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm CREST factor 13 69 dB CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE This command optimizes the level setting of the instrument depending on the mea sured peak power in order to obtain maximum instrument sensitivity To obtain maximum resolution the level range is set as a function of the measured spacing between peak power and the minimum power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement In addition the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with WAI OPC or OPC to the end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted Suffix n irrelevant Example CALC STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE WAI Adapts the level setting for statistical measurements Manual operation See Adjust Settings on page 148 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RANGe lt Value gt This command defines the level range for the x axis of the measurement diagram The setting is identical to the level range setting defined with
369. power reference type is selected With logarithmic scaling RANGE LOG the channel power is output in the currently selected level unit with linear scaling RANGE LIN dB or LIN 96 the channel power is output in W Manual operation See Power on page 123 See Ch Power ACLR on page 124 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 143 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult PHZ State This command switches the query response of the power measurement results between output of absolute values and output referred to the measurement bandwith The measurement results are output with the CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult command CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON Results output channel power density in dBm Hz OFF Results output channel power is displayed in dBm RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC POW RES PHZ ON Output of results referred to the channel bandwidth For details on a complete measurement example refer to CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 210 Manual operation See Chan Pwr Hz on page 130 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect lt MeasT ype gt This command selects and switches on the specified power measurement type in the window specified by the suffix lt n gt The channel spacings a
370. quence spreading code of the auxiliary pilot channel The bene fits and problems of this approach are therefore identical to the syn chronization on pilot This mode is useful if the signal does not con tain a pilot channel Channel This frame synchronization method does not require a pilot channel Power because it analyzes the power of any specified channel currently code 3 with spreading factor 4 which is the data channel 2 Again the channel power must be calculated for all hypotheses of the scrambling code 32768 for external triggers only 2048 Only for the correct position the result is low inactive channel or high active channel in contrast to the wrong hypothesis Obviously a small band exists for which we will not get a power drop or peak if the power of the tested channel is nearly equal to the noise of the other hypothe ses from total signal The frequency phase synchronization works in the same way as for the methods above with the difference that here both pilot channels are tried consecutively Remote command SENS CDP SMODe on page 272 Long Code Mask Synch Multicarrier Settings Defines the long code mask for the branch of the mobile in hexadecimal form The value range is from 0 to 4FFFFFFFFFF Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe I on page 266 Long Code Mask Q Synch Multicarrier Settings Defines the long code mask for the Q branch of the mobile in hexadecimal form The value
371. r measurement is activated The reference value is displayed in the Tx1 Ref Power field the default value is 0 dBm Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 132 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements The softkey is available only for multi carrier ACLR measurements In adjacent channel power measurement with one or several carrier signals the power is always referenced to a transmission channel i e no value is displayed for Tx1 Ref Power Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE on page 302 Noise Correction Ch Power ACLR If activated the results are corrected by the instrument s inherent noise which increa ses the dynamic range ON A reference measurement of the instrument s inherent noise is carried out The noise power measured is then subtracted from the power in the channel that is being examined The inherent noise of the instrument depends on the selected center frequency resolution bandwidth and level setting Therefore the cor rection function is disabled whenever one of these parameters is changed A disable message is displayed on the screen Noise cor rection must be switched on again manually after the change OFF No noise correction is performed AUTO Noise correction is performed After a parameter change noise cor rection is restarted automatically and a new correction measurement is performed Remote command SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 305 Adj
372. r further details refer to chapter 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings on page 192 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range DELete on page 281 Symmetric Setup Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask If activated the current sweep list configuration is changed to define a symmetrical setup regarding the reference range The number of ranges to the left of the reference range is reflected to the right i e any missing ranges on the right are inserted while superfluous ranges are removed The values in the ranges to the right of the reference range are adapted symmetrically to those in the left ranges Any changes to the range settings in active Symmetric Setup mode lead to symmetri cal changes in the other ranges where possible In particular this means Inserting ranges a symmetrical range is inserted on the other side of the reference range Deleting ranges the symmetrical range on the other side of the reference range is also deleted Editing range settings the settings in the symmetrical range are adapted accord ingly Note If Fast SEM mode is deactivated while Symmetric Setup mode is on Sym Setup mode is automatically also deactivated If Fast SEM mode is activated while Symmetric Setup mode is on not all range set tings can be set automatically Edit Reference Range Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Opens the Reference Range dialog box to edit the additional sett
373. r nennen nnne 274 SENSe ESPectrum Subsystem sss eene 277 SENSe BANDwidth eubeystem eene nennen 288 SENSe FREQuency subsvstenm sse eene nennen 292 SENSe POWer subesvstem nennen nnns 295 SENSe SWEep subevstem enne nennen nennen nnns 306 Other Commands in the SENSe Subsystem sss 312 SENSe CDPower Subsystem This subsystem sets the parameters for the code domain measurements mode SENSeTODPOWeITAVERGAG 2 td td deter oer d eee eet ci e V REX cg eeu dd eR uad 265 SENSe CDPower CODE coi reto ede ooo e a Re ER a Xa eZ xa cc d D a aoo De ai Rye gud 265 SENSE CDPOwer OT iu EE 266 SENSe CDPow r eg DE 266 SENSeJTODPowerlOLength i eoi rediere ae e eate ne ey Rr reae crea dete run 266 SENSe CDPower ECODe l 2 uideo se ENEE o eere xk p ce dod da oe eu TEL EE 266 SENSE JCD Power EG ODS Qe eurer odes o pieles eret RM E a AM ua ice 267 ie Ell Re TT 267 SENSe ICDPowet MAPPihg 25 2 oi tedeeeetsiccsateilestieechesiaureieiieataariisesd 267 SENSeJOCDPoOWeEMMODI 2 1 1 eite E A HOA END OCR IRR E ese IR EXPE c ERU 268 IGENGeJCDbowerNOhMaltze eene enne enen nne nh erret r nihit nnns 268 SENS COP GWerOPE RGU OW EE 268 SENSe ICDPower ORDBU E 269 SENSe CDPoWeE OVERVIEW dei ctae erp cete pp ne e bate ana bk ande mamie m ERR nda 269 SENSeTCDPONWEEPNORIGU iiia rdg ct aot Ret te ette och et ene gea 270 SENSe CDPowetrPREFeLernCS cocotte nocet ree duae ke daa AER 270 E
374. r statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 257 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed 6 2 8 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 257 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Auto Set menu in 1xEV DO Analysis modes for CDA measurements For RF measurements refer to the description of the AUTO SET key in the base unit pop m 115 AWO ie eC ERE 115 PONE VE P ee EAR 115 MOO ULING EE 116 L Meas Time EE 116 Scheer TIME NEL 116 L Upper Level Hvsteresls rnnt nns 116 L Lower Level Hvsteresls treten tette tens 116 Auto All Performs all automa
375. r than the signal bandwidth the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is still sig nificantly below the reference level Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel on page 301 Ch Power ACLR Activates the Adjacent Channel Power measurement In this measurement the power of the carrier and its adjacent and alternate channels is determined Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 251 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult on page 210 Bandclass Ch Power ACLR Opens a dialog box to select the bandclass The following bandclasses are available Band Class 0 800 MHz Cellular Band Band Class 1 1 9 GHz PCS Band Band Class 2 TACS Band Band Class 3A JTACS Band 2832 MHz and lt 834 MHz 2838 MHz and lt 846 MHz 2860 MHz and lt 895 MHz Band Class 3B JTACS Band 2810 MHz and lt 860 MHz except 2832 MHz and lt 834 MHz 2838 MHz and lt 846 MHz Band Class 3C JTACS Band 810 MHz and gt 895 MHz Band Class 4 Korean PCS Band Band Class 5 450 MHz NMT Band Band Class 6 2 GHz IMT 2000 Band Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Band Class 7 700 MHz Band Band Class 8 1800 MHz Band Band Class 9 900 MHz Band Band Class 10 Secondary 800 MHz Band Class 11 400 MHz European PAMR Band Band Class 12 800 MHz PAMR Band Band Class 13 2 5 GHz IMT 2000 Extension Band Band Class 14
376. r the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys Notes for Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx Models To jump to the linked topic press the link text on the touchscreen Searching for a topic 1 Change to the Index tab 2 Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in The entries starting with these characters are displayed 3 Change the focus by pressing the ENTER key 4 Selectthe suitable keyword by using the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys or the rotary knob 5 Press the ENTER key to display the help topic The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed Changing the zoom 1 Change to the Zoom tab 2 Setthe zoom using the rotary knob Four settings are available 1 4 The smallest size is selected by number 1 the largest size is selected by number 4 Closing the help window P Press the ESC key or a function key on the front panel 1 4 Notes for Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx Models Users of R amp S FSV 1307 9002Kxx models should consider the following differences to the description of the newer R amp S FSV 1321 3008Kxx models e Functions that are based on the Windows operating system e g printing or set ting up networks may have a slightly different appearance or require different set tings on the Windows XP based models For such functions refer to the Windows documentation or the documentation originally provided with the R amp S FSV instru ment e The R amp S FSV 1307 9002K0
377. r versus chip display The phase error is displayed for all chips of the slected slot The phase error is calculated by the differ ence of the phase of received signal and phase of reference signal The reference sig nal is estimated from the channel configuration of all active channels The phase error is given in degrees in a range of 180 to 180 Phase Error vs Chip ei Clirw 256 Chips Chip 2047 Result data for remote query SCPI command CALC FEED XTIM CDP CHIP PHAS see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 204 TRACe lt 1 4 gt DATA TRACE 1 4 When the trace data for this mode is queried a list of phase error values of all chips at the selected slot is returned The values are calculated as the phase difference EH Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 48 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis between the received signal and the reference signal for each chip in degrees and are normalized to the square root of the average power at the selected slot 6 1 3 16 Symbol Magnitude Error The Symbol Magnitude Error is calculated analogous to symbol EVM The result of calculation is one symbol magnitude error value for each symbol of the slot of a special channel Positive values of symbol magnitude error indicate a symbol magnitude that is larger than the expected ideal value negative symbol magnitude errors indicate a sym bol magnitude that is less than the ide
378. race data for this mode is queried the phase error in degrees of each sym bol at the selected slot is transferred The number of the symbols depends on the spreading factor of the selected channel NOFSymbols 10 2 amp CodeClass 6 1 4 Code Domain Analysis Results MS Mode Basically the measurement results for code domain analysis are very similar for base station and mobile station tests The main difference is that while base station tests are performed on slots mobile station tests are performed on half slots Furthermore mobile station tests provide measurements on composite data For these measure ments a special channel contains two codes whose results are displayed simultane ously These measurements are only available for subtypes 2 or higher The Code Domain Analyzer provides the following result display configurations for mobile station measurements in the code domain o RF measurement results are described in chapter 6 1 5 RF Measurement Results on page 66 e Code DomoalltP DWOEL s act cederet ege t e ll etes dude ete Rue RR ERE RAS 51 ELUCET 52 Powervs Ee E 54 E VS SYMDOl EE 55 e Composite EVMTIRIMS icti ere endi deena adie a Nine denis 56 e Channel Table uicit Pr eR ts deine EE EXER LEER RE EERSTEN 56 e Composite Data EVM ceit erret rrt RE ERR ERG EX RAE RES TA Ae AANEREN Axa PRG 58 Composite Data Constellation icto eei c d e ah etd epos 58 e
379. ram code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters How to Use the Help System The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration 1 3 How to Use the Help System Calling context sensitive and genera
380. rame Sync failed This bit is set when synchronization is not possible within the application Possible rea sons Incorrectly set frequency Incorrectly set level Incorrectly set PN Offset Incorrectly set values for Swap IQ Invalid signal at input 2103 These bits are not used 4 K84 Preamble Current Slot missing This bit is set when the Preamble channel type is being investigated within the application and there is no preamble in the current slot The measurement results that can be read out for the Preamble channel type are not valid 5 K84 Preamble Overall missing This bit is set when the Preamble channel type is being investigated within the application and there is no preamble in at least one of the slots being examined The measurement results that can be read out for the Preamble channel type are not valid if the analysis takes all slots into account CDP with Average Peak Code Domain Error Composite EVM 6to 14 These bits are not used 15 This bit is always 0 List of Commands SENSE JADJUSTAL es eise Ed eda eel nea d EECH datas 275 SENSe ADJust CONFig ration HYS Teresis L OWer 5 aiaa eere tope ern rene Poche Rana agn 275 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer esses ener 275 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation eot tr rere e re te PR fene rr een 275 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE AE 276 SENSe ADJust F REQuency SENSe IADJUSED
381. rameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR MALG OFF Deactivates the enhanced algorithm Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Enhanced Algorithm on page 83 See Enhanced Algorithm on page 96 CONFigure C DPower BTS MEASurement Measurement This command selects the measurement type CONFigure Subsystem Parameters lt Measurement gt ACLR CCDF CDPower ESPectrum OBWidth POWer ACLR Adjacent Channel Power measurement CCDF measurement of the complementary cumulative distribution function signal statistics CDPower Code Domain Analyzer measurement ESPectrum check of signal power Spectrum Emission Mask OBWidth measurement of the occupied bandwidth POWer Signal Channel Power measurement PVTime measurement of power versus time RST CDPower Example CONF CDP MEAS POW Selects Signal Channel Power measurement Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Code Domain Analyzer on page 123 See Power on page 123 See Ch Power ACLR on page 124 See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 134 See Occupied Bandwidth on page 143 See CCDF on page 144 See Power vs Time on page 149 CONFigure CDPower BTS PVTime BURSt State This command activates an automatic burst alignment to the center of the diagram Parameters State
382. range is from 0 to 4FFFFFFFFFF Remote command SENSe CDPower LCODe 0Q on page 267 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Multi Carrier Synch Multicarrier Settings Selects or deselects the multi carrier mode The mode improves the processing of multi carrier signals It allows the measurement on one carrier out of a multi carrier sig nal Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier STATe on page 249 Enhanced Algorithm Synch Multicarrier Settings Activates or deactivates the enhanced algorithm that is used for signal detection on multi carrier signals This algorithm slightly increases the calculation time If both the Enhanced Algorithm and the Multi Carrier Filter are deactivated the multi carrier mode is automatically switched off Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier MALGo on page 251 Multi Carrier Filter Synch Multicarrier Settings Activates or deactivates the usage of a filter for signal detection on multi carrier sig nals If both the Enhanced Algorithm and the Multi Carrier Filter are deactivated the multi carrier mode is automatically switched off Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe on page 249 Filter Type Synch Multicarrier Settings Selects the filter type if Multi Carrier Filter is activated Two filter types are available for selection a low pass filter and a RRC filter By default the low pass filter is active The
383. redef Performs the code domain measurement on the basis of the active predefined channel table All channels of a channel table are assumed to be active For further details also refer to the Channel Tables field and the chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 173 Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle STATe on page 244 CONFigure CDPower BTS CTABle SELect on page 249 Inactive Channel Threshold Channel Table Settings Defines the minimum power which a single channel must have compared to the total signal in order to be recognized as an active channel Channels below the specified threshold are regarded as inactive The parameter is available in the Auto Search mode of the Channel Table Settings dialog box The default value is 40 dB With this value all channels with signals such as the 1xEV DO test models are located by the Code Domain Power analysis Decrease the Inac tive Channel Threshold value if not all channels contained in the signal are detected Remote command SENSe CDPower ICTReshold on page 266 Channel Tables Channel Table Settings In this field a list of the available channel tables is shown To activate a predefined channel table select the table name by using either the touchscreen or the the cursor keys and pressing the ENTER key The selected channel table is the basis for future measurements until you choose another or select Auto Search An active channel tabl
384. refer to Channel Table Settings on page 77 6 4 3 Channel Type Characteristics The following table provides an overview of channel type characteristics for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option K84 Channel Spreading Symbol Modulation Type Chips per Slot Symbols Bits per slot and Code Type Factor Rate per Slot and Mapping or Q Mapping Com Code plex PILOT 32 38 4 ksps BPSK I 96 2 192 6 6 12 MAC Subt 0 1 64 19 2ksps BPSK l BPSK Q 64 4 256 4 4 8 OOK ACK I OOK Subt 2 3 9 6 ksps ACK Q OOK 2 2 4 128 NAK I OOK NAK Q PREAMBLE Subt 0 1 32 38 4 ksps BPSK I Preamble length 2 4 64 4 8 128 8 16 256 16 16 32 512 32 32 64 1024 Subt 2 64 19 2 ksps BPSK I 64 1 1 2 128 2 2 4 256 4 4 8 512 8 8 16 1024 16 16 32 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EH Channel Spreading Symbol Modulation Type Chips per Slot Symbols Bits per slot and Code Type Factor Rate per Slot and Mapping orQ Mapping Com Code plex Subt 3 128 9 6 ksps BPSK I or BPSK Q 64 0 5 0 5 1 128 1 1 2 256 2 2 4 512 4 4 8 1024 8 8 16 DATA Subt 0 1 2 76 8ksps QPSK 8 PSK 400 4 Mapping always Complex 16 16QAM PreambleChips Modulation Type Subt 3 16 76 8 ksps 64QAM DataNettoChips QPSK 8 PSK 46QAM 64QAM 1600 0 21600 100 200 300 400 500 1600 64 71536 96 192 288 384 480 1600 128 1472 92 184 276 368 460 160
385. reference level R amp S FSV K84 K85 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 a Open the Frontend Settings dialog box b Inthe Center Frequency field enter 878 49 MHz c In the Ref Level field enter 10 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box 6 Setan external trigger source a Open the IQ Capture Settings dialog box b Set the Trigger Source option to External In the two screens the following results are displayed by default Screen A shows the diagram of the Composite EVM measurement result In screen B the result summary is displayed It shows the numeric results of the Code Domain Power measurement including the values for the Composite EVM 3 6 Measuring the Peak Code Domain Error The Code Domain Error Power describes the quality of the measured signal compared to an ideal reference signal generated by the R amp S FSV In the I Q plane the error vec tor represents the difference of the measured signal and the ideal signal The Code Domain Error is the difference in power on symbol level of the measured and the refer ence signal projected to the class of of the base spreading factor The unit of the result is dB In the Peak Code Domain Error PCDE measurement the maximum error value over all channels is determined and displayed for a given slot The measurement covers the entire signal during the entire observation time On screen the results are shown in a diagram in which the
386. relation noise of the bad hypothesis The frequency phase synchronization also takes advantage of the known linear phase of the pilot channel AUXiliary Pilot Similar to synchronization on pilot but with the different known sequence spreading code of the auxiliary pilot channel The benefits and problems of this approach are therefore identical to the synchronization on pilot This mode is useful if the signal does not contains a pilot channel POWer This frame synchronization method does not require a pilot channel because it analyzes the power of any specified channel currently code 3 with spreading factor 4 which is the data chan nel 2 Again the channel power must be calculated for all hypotheses of the scrambling code 32768 for external triggers only 2048 Only for the correct position the result is low inactive channel or high active channel in contrast to the wrong hypothesis Obviously a small band exists for which we will not get a power drop or peak if the power of the tested channel is nearly equal to the noise of the other hypotheses from total sig nal The frequency phase synchronization works in the same way as for the methods above with the difference that here both pilot channels are tried consecutively RST PILot Mode EVDO MS mode Manual operation See Sync To on page 94 Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 273 7 6 2 7 6 2 1 7 6 2 2 7 6 2 3 7 6 2 4 7 6 2 5 7 6 2 6 7 6 2 7 7 6 2
387. relevant Example INIT ESP Starts a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Manual operation See Meas Start Stop on page 143 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate The command initiates a new measurement sequence With sweep count gt 0 or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the indicated num ber of measurements With trace functions MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the pre vious results are reset on restarting the measurement In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the mea surement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a sin gle sweep end synchronization Suffix n irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Mode all MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST lt FileName gt This command stores the current list evaluation results ina lt file name gt dat file The file consists of a data section containing the list evaluation results Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt FileName gt lt file name gt Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Example MMEM STOR LIST
388. rent trace default mode Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW MODE WRIT see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE on page 210 Max Hold Power Mode CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR If this mode is activated the power values are calculated from the current trace and compared with the previous power value using a maximum algorithm The higher value is retained If activated the enhancement label Pwr Max is displayed Remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW MODE MAXH see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer MODE on page 210 Select Trace CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Opens an edit dialog box to enter the trace number on which the CP ACLR measure ment is to be performed Only activated traces can be selected For details on trace modes see chapter 6 4 5 Trace Mode Overview on page 179 Remote command SENSe POWer TRACe on page 305 ACLR Abs Rel CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Switches between absolute and relative power measurement in the adjacent channels Abs The absolute power in the adjacent channels is displayed in the unit of the y axis e g in dBm dByV Rel The level of the adjacent channels is displayed relative to the level of the transmission channel in dBc Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE on page 299 Adjust Settings CP ACLR Settings Ch Power ACLR Automatically optimizes all instrument settings f
389. requency entered via SENSe FREQuency CENTer OFF Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt CouplingType gt Example Manual operation SENSe Subsystem SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain OFF Decouples the step size manual input RST SPAN FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN See 0 1 Span span gt 0 on page 152 See 0 1 RBW span gt 0 on page 153 See 0 5 Span span gt 0 on page 153 See 0 5 RBW span gt 0 on page 153 See x Span span gt 0 on page 153 See x RBW span gt 0 on page 153 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor lt Factor gt This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt Factor gt Example Manual operation Range 1 to 100 RST 10 Default unit PCT FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT See 0 1 Span span gt 0 on page 152 See 0 1 RBW span gt 0 on page 153 See 0 5 Span span gt 0 on page 153 S
390. rtial span is the span which is covered by one FFT analysis Auto FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type The firmware determines whether to use wide or narrow filters to obtain the best mea surement results Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 289 Narrow FFT Filter Mode Sweep Type For an RBW x 10kHz the FFT filters with the smaller partial span are used This allows you to perform measurements near a carrier with a reduced reference level due to a narrower analog prefilter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution FFT on page 289 Coupling Ratio Opens a submenu to select the coupling ratios for functions coupled to the bandwidth This softkey and its submenu is available for measuring the Adjacent Channel Power the Spectrum Emission Mask the Occupied Bandwidth and the CCDF RBW VBW Sine 1 1 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio video bandwidth resolution bandwidth This is the default setting for the coupling ratio resolution bandwidth video bandwidth This is the coupling ratio recommended if sinusoidal signals are to be measured This setting takes effect if you define the video bandwidth automatically Video BW Auto Remote command BAND VID RAT 1 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio on page 291 RBW VBW Pulse 1 Coupling Ratio Sets the following coupling ratio Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements video bandwidth 10
391. s Sorts the table according to the following rules First off active channels are separated from inactive channels Within these categories sorting is then done first by the channel type special channels like F SYNC first then data channels and next by the spreading factor in ascending order Last the sorting is done by the code number also in ascending order Save New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Saves the table under its specified name in the xml format If you edit a channel table and want to keep the original channel table change the name of the edited channel table before saving it Cancel New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Closes the dialog box and returns to the Channel Table Settings dialog box Changes applied to the channel table are lost Reload New Copy Edit Channel Table Settings Reloads the original content of the copied channel table This softkey is available for the New Channel Table dialog box and the Edit Channel Table dialog box Delete Channel Table Settings Deletes the selected channel table The currently active channel table cannot be deleted Restore Default Tables Channel Table Settings Restores the predefined channel tables see chapter 6 4 1 Predefined Channel Tables on page 173 to their factory set values Existing channel tables with the same name as default channel tables are replaced by this action In this way you can undo unintentional overwriting
392. s 181 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Eilters se 181 648 ASCII File een let eri RR xa ep i aiaa tene e ade oda 183 6 4 9 ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask 184 6 4 10 Format Description of Spectrum Emission Mask XML Eiles 184 6 4 11 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement 190 6 4 12 Ranges and Range Settings enne nnns 192 6 4 13 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measurements 193 6 4 14 Predefined CP ACLR Giandarde sese nnns 195 6 4 15 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Parameterg 196 Further Information 6 4 4 Predefined Channel Tables Predefined channel tables offer access to a quick configuration for the channel search The 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option provides the following set of channel tables com pliant with the 1xEV DO specification e DOQPSK Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC PREAMBLE DATA with modulation type QPSK in channel type DATA and the following listed active codes in channel types e DO8PSK Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC PREAMBLE DATA with modulation type 8 PSK in channel type DATA and the following listed active codes in channel types e DO16QAM Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC PREAMBLE DATA with modulation type 16 QAM in channel type DATA and the following listed active codes in chan nel types e DO IDLE Channel table with channel types PILOT MAC known as IDLE slot since it does not contain any active channels
393. s in one step Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt Limits gt 1 3 numeric values between 200 and 200 separated by com mas 200 lt 0 3 numeric values between 200 and 200 in ascending order separated by commas gt 200 Example CALC LIM ESP LIM 50 50 70 Defines the following power classes lt 200 50 50 50 gt lt 50 70 gt UO 200 gt Query CALC LIM ESP LIM Response 200 50 50 70 200 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum MODE lt Mode gt This command activates or deactivates the automatic selection of the limit line in the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt k gt Parameters lt Mode gt Example CALCulate Subsystem irrelevant AUTO MANUAL AUTO The limit line depends on the measured channel power MANUAL One of the three specified limit lines is set The selection is made with the chapter 7 2 4 3 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem on page 230 command RST AUTO CALC LIM ESP MODE AUTO Activates automatic selection of the limit line CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt EXCLusive lt State gt This command sets the power classes used in the spectrum emission mask measure ment It is only possible to use power classes for which limits are defined Also either only one power class at a time or all power classes together can be selected Su
394. s on the calculation of the maximum peak for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps DISPlay Subsystem Manual operation See Clear Write on page 114 See Max Hold on page 114 See Min Hold on page 114 See Average on page 114 See View on page 114 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command switches on or off the display of the corresponding trace The other measurements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt trace Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON for TRACe1 OFF for TRACe2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Manual operation See Blank on page 180 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis with logarithmic scaling The command works only for a logarithmic scaling You can select the scaling with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 261 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Range gt Range 10 to 200 RST 100 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Manual operation See Range Log 100 dB on page 145 See Range Log 50 dB on page 146 See Rang
395. s produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MAX RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum to the left of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum The corre sponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MIN NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next higher minimum value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command positions the de
396. s show the data of various measurements in numerical form for a specific channel Channel Result I ei Clrw Power Fig 6 3 Channel results result display Channel results The Channel Results show common results for the selected channel e Power Shows the total power of the selected channel type e IQ Imbalance Shows the IQ imbalance of the signal in percent e Pk CDE SF xx IQ The Peak Code Domain Error measurement specifies a projection of the difference between test signal and ideal reference signal to the spreading factor that belongs to the channel type This spreading factor is shown in brackets e IO Offset Shows the DC offset of the signal in percent Code results The Code Results show results specific to the selected channel type and the selected slot e Symbol Rate Shows the symbol rate with which the channel is transmitted e Channel GF Shows the code number and its associated spreading factor m Rail Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 38 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis Tr n e Symbol EVM Shows the peak and the mean values of the Error Vector Magnitude For further details refer to the EVM vs Symbol result display e Timing Offset Shows the timing offset between the selected channel and the first act
397. s the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power refer ence range This setting takes only effect if channel power is selected as power refer ence type see SENSe ESPect rum RTYPe on page 288 Parameters lt Bandwidth gt minimum span lt value lt span of reference range RST 3 84 MHz SENSe Subsystem Example ESP RTYP CPOW Sets the power reference type to channel power ESP BWID 1 MHZ Sets the Tx bandwidth to 1 MHz Manual operation See Edit Reference Range on page 138 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe State This command activates or deactivates the use of an RRC filter This setting only takes effect if channel power is selected as power reference type see SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe on page 288 Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example ESP RTYP CPOW Sets the power reference type to channel power ESP FILT OFF Deactivates the use of an RRC filter Manual operation See Edit Reference Range on page 138 SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC ALPHa Value This command sets the alpha value of the RRC filter This setting takes only effect if channel power is selected as power reference type SENSe ESPectrum RTYPe command and if the RRC filter is activated SENSe ESPectrum FILTer RRC STATe command Parameters Value 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Example ESP RTYP CPOW Sets the power reference type to channel power ESP FILT ON Activa
398. same as for the base unit see the description there Softkeys of the Measurement Menu The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Measurement menu in CDMA2000 Analysis or 1xEV DO Analysis mode It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is delivered in the correspond ing softkey description Code Domain ANaly Zen doti ree Rt e mr RH ERA REUS 123 POWER iiec stie SEENEN 123 L Adjust Ref EU occi re dave c debui tne Vaf da dads soins ers ED dn 124 Gh Power E EE 124 L Bandclass ccsccsccsscccceccssccccsccescscseccassscseccascsnsseceecenesseesecteseccaeceeceacaceucsess 124 Exec ERG I NIIT 125 ECT Hbi E 125 El pt MSN 125 Bec Lr NND 126 L Bandwidth 126 L ACLR Reference earnest aeta data nautas 127 ac MP 127 L NAMES csccccssccescecsecsesseccecsscsessessessssceseceestecacsaccaccacceccasenccecses 129 L il 129 Eege 129 E Limit OWN ME 129 L Relative EE 130 L Absolute lenit ceto ettet etri sette 130 Hielo MERE 130 t Chan Pudet dota d aat ba da eR n 130 L Power Mode 131 BEC nili NERONE 131 5 71 MENT 131 L Select Trace 131 BT EE 131 L Adjust SENGS IDQNE 131 L Sweep TUS ecccsscnccscssnssestiasssseduaeeuoaantianasinadsavaciiibubsdaaunobacdenngndanestnavenatieunseds 132 L EE 132 L Set CP E ET 132 L Noise Correcthon tnnt ense teas
399. selves elements of the BaseFormat element and are to be inserted where noted The separation is done here simply for reasons of a better overview Also no example values are given here to allow a quick reference to the tables above Italic font shows the placeholders for the values e The BaseFormat element is structured as follows RS SEM ACP FileFormat Version 1 0 0 0 gt lt Name gt Standard lt Name gt lt Instrument gt lt Type gt Instrument Type lt Type gt lt Application gt Application lt Application gt lt Instrument gt LinkDirection Name Name gt lt ReferencePower gt lt Method gt Method lt Method gt lt ReferencePower gt PowerClass Index n gt I For contents of the PowerClass node see table 6 13 gt lt Define up to four PowerClass nodes gt lt PowerClass gt lt LinkDirection gt lt RS_SEM_ACP_File gt The PowerClass element is structured as follows lt PowerClass Index n gt lt StartPower Unit dBm InclusiveFlag true Value StartPowerValue gt lt StopPower Unit dBm InclusiveFlag false Value StopPowerValue gt lt DefaultLimitFailMode gt Limit Fail Mode lt DefaultLimitFailMode gt Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 186 Further Information Range Index n gt lt For contents of the Range node see table 6 14 gt lt Define up to twenty Range nodes gt lt Range gt lt PowerClass gt
400. sk The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement shows the quality of the measured signal by comparing the power values in the frequency range near the carrier against a spec tral mask that is defined by the 3GPP2 specifications The limits depend on the selected bandclass In this way the performance of the DUT can be tested and the emissions and their distance to the limit be identified Note that the 3GPP2 standard does not distinguish between spurious and spectral emissions Beneath the measurement screen a table showing the peak list In the peak list the val ues for the worst spectral emissions are displayed including their frequency and power The default settings of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement are listed in the table below Setting Default value Frequency Span 8 MHz Sweep Time 100 ms Detector RMS For details on the softkeys of the Spectrum Emission Mask measurement refer to the Spectrum Emission Mask on page 134 softkey in the Measurement menu 6 1 5 4 Occupied Bandwidth The Occupied Bandwidth measurement determines the bandwidth in which the signal power can be found By default the bandwidth is displayed in which 99 of the signal is found The percentage of the signal power included in the measurement can be modified In the top right corner of the screen the bandwidth and frequency markers are displayed The default settings of the Occupied Bandwidth measurement are listed in the table be
401. slot number gt level value in dB The number of results corresponds to the IQ capture length The number of results is between 2 and 12 Code Domain Error 7 9 18 Code Domain Error BTS Mode The command returns three values for each code in a channel in the following order code number gt lt error power gt lt power ID TRACe DATA Results Value Description Range Unit lt code number gt number of the code lt error power gt value of the composite EVM lt power ID gt power indication 0 1 0 inactive channel 1 active channel The number of results corresponds to the spreading factor The spreading factor in turn depends on the selected channel types Therefore 32 value triplets are returned for PILOT and PREAMBLE channels 16 value triplets for DATA channels and 64 value triplets for MAC channels see chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 176 In addition the output depends on the mapping settings The output is either the branch the Q branch or the complex signal 7 9 19 Code Domain Error MS Mode The command returns four values for each channel in the following order code class code number gt lt error power power ID Value Description Range Unit code class Code class of the channel usually 4 since the CDEP is displayed in base code number code number of the channel 0 spreading factor 1 error power
402. smo9LINK dest iier eo o teta rcc discesa oco ds 218 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M AimumlEEFT 219 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT esee nn nnns 219 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK cessisse 219 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiIMUM RIGHL cc cccecesceceseeeeceseceeceseeseseeeeseneeeaes 219 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINiIMUM LEFT cccccssscececececesceceeeseeceneceeceseecenees 220 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimumNENT enses nn nnns nn nnn nnns 220 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eee 220 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 221 CAL Culate nz DEIL TamarkercmztSTATel nennen ntn inan 221 CALCulatesms DELTamarkersms TRAQG 2 2 aaron de Red 221 ee DE RT NEE E E EE 222 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative enne eren 222 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzN sisse nisi sse t 222 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X Reference This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram When measuring the phase noise the command defines the frequency reference for delta marker 2 Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Parameters Reference Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the refer ence For frequency domain measurements it is a fr
403. square The configuration is according to the 1XEV DO requirements Beneath the measurement screen the bandwidth and the associated channel power are displayed The other screen elements match that of the screen of the Spectrum Analyzer mode The default settings are in accordance with the 3GPP2 specifications Setting Default value Frequency Span 2 MHz ACP Standard 1xEV DOO MC1 Number of adjacent channels 0 Adjacent Channel Power On For details on the softkeys of the Signal Channel Power measurement refer to the Power on page 123 softkey in the Measurement menu Adjacent Channel Power The Adjacent Channel Power measurement analyses the power of the TX channel and the power of adjacent and alternate channels on the left and right side of the TX chan nel The number of TX channels and adjacent channels can be modified as well as the band class Beneath the measurement screens the bandwidth and power of the TX channel and the bandwidth spacing and power of the adjacent and alternate channels are displayed The default settings are in accordance with the 3GPP2 specifications Measurements and Result Displays Setting Default value Adjacent Channel Power On ACP Standard 1xEV DOO MC1 Number of adjacent channels 2 For details on the softkeys of the Adjacent Channel Power measurement refer to the Ch Power ACLR on page 124 softkey in the Measurement menu 6 1 5 3 Spectrum Emission Ma
404. st on page 134 Add Remove lt Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Activates or deactivates power classes to be defined Up to four power classes can be defined The number of active power classes affects the availability of the items of the Used Power Classes dropdown menu Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt EXCLusive on page 231 Bandclass Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a dialog box to select a specific bandclass For a list of predefined bandclasses refer to the Bandclass softkey in the ACP menu Bandclass on page 124 The settings for each bandclass are provided in xml files that are located in the direc tory C R_S INSTR sem_std evdo dl The files themselves are named DO DL BCO1 XML bandclass 1 to DO DL BC17 XML bandclass 17 By selecting one of the bandclasses from the dialog box the correct file is loaded automatically The file can also be loaded manually see Load Standard softkey Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS BCLass BANDclass on page 242 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Load Standard Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a dialog box to select an XML file which includes the desired standard specifi cation For details on the provided XML files refer to chapter 6 4 11 Provided XML Files for the Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement on page 190 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STANdard on page 279 Sav
405. support FFT mode 6 4 7 List of Available RRC and Channel Filters For power measurement a number of especially steep edged channel filters are availa ble see the following table The indicated filter bandwidth is the 3 dB bandwidth For RRC filters the fixed roll off factor a is also indicated Table 6 11 Filter types Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 100 Hz CFiLter 200 Hz CFiLter AO 300 Hz CFILter 500 Hz CFILter 1 kHz CFiLter 1 5 kHz CFiLter Further Information Filter Bandwidth Filter Type Application 2 kHz CFILter 2 4 kHz CFiLter SSB 2 7 kHz CFiLter 3 kHz CFiLter 3 4 kHz CFiLter 4 kHz CFILter DAB Satellite 4 5 kHz CFiLter 5 kHz CFILter 6 kHz CFiLter 6 kHz a 0 2 RRC APCO 8 5 kHz CFiLter ETS300 113 12 5 kHz channels 9 kHz CFILter AM Radio 10 kHz CFiLter 12 5 kHz CFiLter CDMAone 14 kHz CFiLter ETS300 113 20 kHz channels 15 kHz CFiLter 16 kHz CFiLter ETS300 113 25 kHz channels 18 kHz a 0 35 RRC TETRA 20 kHz CFiLter 21 kHz CFiLter PDC 24 3 kHz a 0 35 RRC IS 136 25 kHz CFiLter 30 kHz CFiLter CDPD CDMAone 50 kHz CFiLter 100 kHz CFiLter 150 kHz CFiLter FM Radio 192 kHz CFiLter PHS 200 kHz CFiLter 300 kHz CFILter 500 kHz CFiLter J 83 8 VSB DVB USA Further Information Filter Bandwidth Fi
406. surement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt k gt limit line Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only 7 2 4 3 CALCulate Subsystem Manual operation See Spectrum Emission Mask on page 134 See Limit Check 1 4 on page 136 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem The CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subsystem defines the limit check for the Spec trum Emission Mask CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechumLlMits kanran aa 230 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechumMODE enne snnt naar nnne 230 CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class EXCLusive e suus 231 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class COUNt assesses nete 231 CALOCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class LIMit S TATe sss 232 CALCulate n LIMit k ESPectrum PCLass Class MAXimum esee 232 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechum PClLass Cassz MiNimum 233 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechumbRtGtore enenatis 233 CAL Culate nz LUlMitcks E bechumVAl ue 233 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum LIMits lt Limits gt This command sets or queries up to 4 power classe
407. symbol level EVM vs Symbol Error Vector Magnitude result display Composite Constellation Composite Constellation result display Channel Bitstream Display of demodulated bits Peak Code Domain Error Projection of the maximum error between the test signal and the reference signal Code Domain Error Power Code Domain Error Power result display For details on the displayed results and default settings refer to chapter 6 1 4 Code Domain Analysis Results MS Mode on page 50 You can configure the result displays via the Result Demod Settings on page 101 dialog box Select Opens a dialog box to select a specific channel half slot or branch for evaluation Enter the channel number and half slot number to be evaluated as a decimal in the respective field The slot range is from 0 to Capture Length 1 Refer to Capture Length for further details Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Select Channel Half Slot Branch Common Settings A Select Channel Select Half Slot Select Branch Remote command SENSe CDPower SLOT on page 272 SENSe CDPower CODE on page 265 6 2 3 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Frequency menu in 1xEV DO Analysis modes for CDA measurements For other measurements see the description of the Fr
408. t DMTYpe gt lt MAC Tive gt lt DACTive gt lt PLENGth gt lt RHO gt lt PCDerror gt lt IQIMbalance gt lt IQOFfset gt lt SRATe gt lt CHANnel gt lt SFACtor gt lt TOFFset gt lt POFFset gt lt CDPRelative gt lt CDPabsolute gt lt EVMRms gt lt EVMPeak gt lt MTYPe gt Value Description Range Unit lt FERRor gt Frequency error Hz lt FERPpm gt Frequency error ppm lt CERRor gt Chip rate error ppm lt TFRame gt Trigger to frame Note The Trigger to Frame value TFRame supplies a 9 if the trig ger is at FREE RUN The Timing Phase Offset values TOFF set POFFset supply a 9 if timing and phase measurement is disabled refer to CDP TPM or the number of active channels is higher than 50 lt RHOPilot gt RHO over all slots for the pilot area 0 1 lt RHO1 gt RHOoverall 1 over all slots over all chips with start of averag 0 1 ing at the half slot limit lt RHO2 gt RHOoverall 2 over all slots over all chips with start of averag 0 1 ing at the quarter slot limit lt PPILot gt Absolute power in the PILOT channel type dBm lt PMAC gt Absolute power in the MAC channel type dBm lt PDATa gt Absolute power in the DATA channel type dBm lt PPReamble gt Absolute power in the PREAMBLE channel type dBm lt MACCuracy gt Composit EVM lt DMTYpe gt Modulation type in the DATA channel type 2 QPSK 3 8 PSK 4 16 QAM 10 64
409. t Demodulation Settings dialog box to modify the follow ing parameters Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Result Demodulation Settings E x Common Settings Revision SubType 0 1 SubType 2 SubType 3 Code Order Hadamard Bit Reverse Normalize C On off Time Phase Est On e off Operation Mode Traffic Access Despread C On e off Power Settings CDP Average C On e off Code Power Absolute Relative Power Reference Total Pilot Close Subtype Result Demod Settings Specifies the characteristics of the signal you want to analyze In subtype 2 the number of active users increases That means that the spreading fac tor number of orthogonal codes doubles for channel types MAC and PREAMBLE The amount of returned trace data in the MAC and PREAMBLE channels is different for subtype 0 1 and 2 depending on the channel type and selected evaluation see chapter 6 4 3 Channel Type Characteristics on page 177 The R amp S FSV detects all the channels on a per slot basis Therefore the R amp S FSV recognizes changes in the channel configuration and modulation over the recorded slots In subtype 2 the following modulation types are added within some of the MAC chan nels ON OFF keying ACK on the branch OOKA I ON OFF keying ACK on the Q branch OOKA Q ON OFF keying NACK on the I branch OOKN I and the ON OFF keying NACK on the Q branch
410. t State gt If enabled the digital input fullscale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG AUTO ON Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling lt State gt If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the fullscale level changes This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG COUP OFF Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 118 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer lt Level gt Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 It can be defined either in dBm or Volt see Full Scale Level on page 118 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R
411. t State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example POW ACH FILT ACH ON Manual operation See Weighting Filter on page 129 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate channel State This command activates the weighting filter for the specified alternate channel Suffix channel 1 11 the alternate adjacent channel Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example POW ACH FILT ALT3 ON Activates the weighting filter for alternate channel 3 Manual operation See Weighting Filter on page 129 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel lt channel gt lt State gt This command activates the weighting filter for the specified TX channel Suffix lt channel gt 1 18 the TX channel Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example POW ACH FILT CHA3 ON Activates the weighting filter for TX channel 3 Manual operation See Weighting Filter on page 129 SENSe POWer ACHannel MODE lt Mode gt This command switches between absolute and relative adjacent channel measure ment The command is only available with span gt 0 and if the number of adjacent channels is greater than O For the relative measurement the reference value is set to the currently measured channel power using the command SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute RELative ABSolute absolute adjacent channel measurement RELative relative adjacent channel measurement RS
412. t the Peak Code Domain Error softkey and start the measurement 5 Set the center frequency and the reference level a Open the Frontend Settings dialog box b Inthe Center Frequency field enter 878 49 MHz c Inthe Ref Level field enter 0 dBm d Close the Frontend Settings dialog box 6 Set an external trigger source a Open the IQ Capture Settings dialog box b Set the Trigger Source option to External In the two screens the following results are displayed by default screen A shows the diagram of the Peak Code Domain Error In screen B the result summary is displayed Displaying RHO Make sure that all channels except the pilot channel code 0 64 are OFF so that only the pilot channel is available in the measurement No specific measurement is required to get the value for RHO The R amp S FSV always calculates this value automatically regardless of the code domain measurement per formed Besides the results of the code domain measurements the numeric result of the RHO measurement is shown in the result summary by default shown in screen B Measuring the Signal Channel Power 4 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO 4 1 MS Analysis K85 Measuring the Signal Channel Power In the Power measurement the total channel power of the 1xEV DO signal is dis played The measurement also displays spurious emissions like harmonics or intermo dulation products that occur close to the carrier Test s
413. tReverse order TRAC TRACE2 Reads out the results in BitReverse order Mode EVDO Manual operation See Code Order on page 103 SENSe CDPower OVERview lt State gt This command switches to an overview display of a code domain measurement CDP rel CDP abs CDEP If enabled the branch of the code power is displayed in screen A and the Q branch in screen B Both results can be read using TRACE DATA TRACE1 and TRACE DATA TRACE2 respectively If disabled screen A displays the branch and screen B provides the result summary display SENSe Subsystem Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CDP OVER OFF Mode CDMA EVDO WCDMA This command sets the PN offset of the base station in multiples of 64 chips Parameters Offset Range 0 to 511 RST 0 Example CDP PNOF 45 Sets PN offset Mode EVDO Manual operation See PN Offset on page 83 SENSe CDPower PREFerence Power This command specifies the reference power for the relative power result displays e g Code Domain Power Power vs PCG Parameters Power PICH TOTal PICH The reference power is the power of the pilot channel TOTal The reference power is the total power of the signal referred per PCG to the corresponding PCG RST PICH For further information refer to Power Reference on page 104 Example CDP PREF TOT Sets total power as reference power Mode EVDO Manual operation See Pow
414. table of softkeys with the assignment of commands are provided at the end of this chapter chapter 8 Status Reporting System of the 1xEV DO Analysis on page 345 Contains device specific error messages for R amp S FSV K84 K85 This part of the documentation includes only functions of the Application Firmware R amp S FSV K84 K85 For all other descriptions please refer to the description of the base unit Measuring the Signal Channel Power 3 Measurement Examples for the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis K84 3 1 Measuring the Signal Channel Power In the Power measurement the total channel power of the 1xEV DO signal is dis played The measurement also displays spurious emissions like harmonics or intermo dulation products that occur close to the carrier Test setup e Connect the RF output of the signal generator to the RF input of the R amp S FSV coaxial cable with N connectors Signal generator settings Frequency 878 49 MHz Level 0 dBm Standard 1xEV DO BTS Procedure 1 Set the R amp S FSV to its default state a Press the PRESET key 2 Activate the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis mode a Press the MODE key and activate the 1xEV DO BTS Analysis option 3 Start the Power measurement a Press the MEAS key b Press the Power softkey 4 Set the center frequency a Press the FREQ key and enter 878 49 MHz 5 Set the reference level a Press the AMPT key and enter 0 dBm On the screen the spectrum of the signal
415. tal input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Other Commands Referenced in this Manual Mode all TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Value This command sets the holding time before the next IF power trigger event Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Value RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis Value This command sets the limit that the hysteresis value for the IF power trigger has to fall below in order to trigger the next measurement Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Value RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Delay This command defines the length of the trigger delay A negative delay time pretrigger can be set in zero span only Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Delay Range zero span sweeptime see data sheet to 30 s span 0 to 30 s RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 75 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt TriggerLevel gt
416. te nes 167 Coupling Resolution bandwidth sss 162 Sweep Tim cerit Seed Ee dd See 164 169 Video bandwidth simiri iia CERS Ee 163 Crest Factor x K84 eto ottiene pepe Is ee d d un CSymbol Magnitude Error GUMMI 328 Cut off frequency K84 ET 85 Go 97 D Data Channel KOA IR 76 default scalings of x and y axis 0 eee eee 148 Delete Channel Co E 80 100 Delete Channel Table Gu C 81 101 detector OVGIVIQW 178 DiglConf fepe PITE 120 Digital IQ data Dr 117 Digital IQ Info Remote control rae rece three 329 ife iP 118 display configuration Display configuration remote commarid isimse ausa ieaiaia 204 display mode Symbol Magnitude Error sess 49 65 display range E 145 146 147 157 158 Display range Frequency o te eiat ete 72 90 107 152 E Electronic input attenuation du M M 333 Enhanced Algorithm KW 83 KES 96 EVM vs Symbol K84 K85 2ganio dX Em 119 DiglConf 120 export format external noise source F FFT Filter Mode AUTO iios cete erede ct tdt dee aora 165 170 NGUIOW a E RM 165 170 SOfIKGV i einen eee bipes e deed ddr ites 165 170 filter types K84 des DG MER Filter types Elsen s t eed Det Ea
417. ted frequency span This softkey is available for RF measurements 0 1 Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 293 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 10PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 294 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements 0 1 RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the resolution bandwidth This is the default setting Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 293 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 10PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 294 0 5 Span span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the span Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 293 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 50PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 294 0 5 RBW span gt 0 CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the resolution bandwidth Remote command FREQ CENT STEP LINK RBW see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 293 FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 50PCT see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 294
418. tes the use of an RRC filter ESP FILT ALPH 0 5 Sets the alpha value of the RRC filter to 0 5 Manual operation See Edit Reference Range on page 138 SENSe ESPectrum HighSPeed State This command activates Fast SEM mode to accelerate spurious emission mask meas urements For details see chapter 6 4 13 Fast Spectrum Emission Mask Measure ments on page 193 Note that in Fast SEM mode the following parameters cannot be changed in all ranges SENSe Subsystem Filter type see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt FILTer TYPE on page 281 e RBW see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth RESolution on page 280 e VBW see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt BANDwidth VIDeo on page 280 Sweep Time Mode see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep TIME AUTO on page 287 e Sweep Time see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range SWEep TIME on page 287 e Reference level see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe lt range gt RLEVel on page 286 e RF Att Mode see SENSe ESPect rum RANGe lt range gt INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 283 e RfAttenuation see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut ATTenuation on page 283 e Preamp see SENSe ESPectrum RANGe range INPut GAIN STATe on page 284 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example ESP HSP ON Manual operation See Fast SEM on page 134 SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STANdard
419. the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe command Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 10dB to 200dB RST 100dB Example CALC STAT SCAL X RANG 20dB Manual operation See x Axis Range on page 145 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X RLEVel Value This command defines the reference level for the x axis of the measurement diagram The setting is identical to the reference level setting using the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel command With the reference level offset lt gt 0 the indicated value range of the reference level is modified by the offset The unit depends on the setting performed with CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 120dBm to 20dBm RST 20dBm CALCulate Subsystem Example CALC STAT SCAL X RLEV 60dBm Manual operation See x Axis Ref Level on page 145 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer lt Value gt This command defines the lower limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical meas urements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix lt n gt selects the screen Parameters lt Value gt 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 Manual operation See y Axis Min Value on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT lt Unit gt This command defines the scaling
420. the fixedreference value for the limit lines The mode is switched from AUTO to MANUAL Now the IDLE slot can be selected and the measurement sequence can be finished Suffix n irrelevant lt k gt irrelevant Parameters lt Mode gt AUTO ONCE MANual RST AUTO Example CALC LIM PVT REF AUTO Automatic reference value for limit lines The value should be set to mean power CALC LIM PVT REF MAN Manual reference value for limit lines CALC LIM PVT RVA 33 5 Set manual reference value to 33 5 CALC LIM PVT REF ONCE Set reference value to mean power CALC LIM PVT RVA Query reference value for limit lines The value should be set to mean power value Mode EVDO Manual operation See Reference Mean Pwr on page 150 See Reference Manual on page 150 See Set Mean to Manual on page 150 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime RESTore This command restores the standard limit lines for the power versus time measure ment All changes made to the standard limit lines are lost and the state of these limit lines as they left the factory is restored Suffix lt n gt irrelevant CALCulate Subsystem lt k gt irrelevant Example CALC LIM PVT REST Reset the PVT limit lines to their default setting Mode EVDO Manual operation See Restore STD Lines on page 151 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt PVTime RVALue lt RefLevel gt This command sets the reference level in
421. this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic Manual CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to enter a fixed step size for the center frequency Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 293 Start Opens an edit dialog box to define the start frequency The following range of values is allowed fmin s fstart Z fmax y Spanmin fiin fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency STARt on page 295 Stop Opens an edit dialog box to define the stop frequency The following range of values for the stop frequency is allowed fmin SPanmin s fstop s fmax f min f max aNd Span min are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency STOP on page 295 Frequency Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 294 6 3 3 Softkeys of the Span Menu for RF Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Span menu for RF meas urements except for Power and Power vs Time measurements Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements reese eise ee 155 SWESMUME En ET 155 Eje WEE 155 AGUS EE 156 Span Manual Opens an edit dialog box t
422. though the trace is still signifi cantly below the reference level If the measured channel power equals the reference level the signal path is not overloaded Subsequent commands have to be synchronized with WAI OPC or OPC to the end of the auto range process which would otherwise be aborted Example POW ACH PRES RLEV WAI Adapts the reference level to the measured channel power SENSe Subsystem Manual operation See Adjust Ref Lvl on page 124 See Adjust Ref Lvl span gt 0 on page 144 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence AUTO ONCE This command sets the reference value to the currently measured channel power for the relative measurement Example POW ACH REF AUTO ONCE Manual operation See Set CP Reference on page 132 SENSe POWer ACHannel REFerence TXCHannel AUTO lt Channel gt This command activates the automatic selection of a transmission channel to be used as a reference channel in relative adjacent channel power measurements The transmission channel with the highest power the transmission channel with the lowest power or the transmission channel nearest to the adjacent channels can be defined as a reference channel The command is available only for multicarrier channel and adjacent channel power measurements with span gt 0 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer SELect on page 212 Parameters lt Channel gt MINimum MAXimum LHIGhest MINimum Transmiss
423. tic settings e Auto Freq on page 115 e Auto Level on page 115 Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 275 Auto Freq Defines the center frequency and the reference level automatically by determining the highest frequency level in the frequency span This function uses the signal counter thus it is intended for use with sinusoidal signals This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 This function is not available for 1xEV DO MS Analysis mode K85 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 276 Auto Level Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically 6 2 9 Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements The measurement time for automatic leveling can be defined using the Settings soft key Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 276 Settings Opens a submenu to define settings for automatic leveling Possible settings are e Meas Time Manual on page 116 e Meas Time Auto on page 116 Meas Time Manual Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the duration of the level measurement in seconds The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey Auto Level on page 115 The default value is 1 ms Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation on page 275 Meas Time Auto lt Settings
424. tion are included as well The options and operating modes for which a command can be used are indicated by the following abbreviations Abbreviation Description A spectrum analysis A F spectrum analysis span gt 0 only frequency mode A T spectrum analysis zero span only time mode ADEMOD analog demodulation option R amp S FSV K7 BT Bluetooth option R amp S FSV K8 CDMA CDMA 2000 base station measurements option R amp S FSV K82 EVDO 1xEV DO base station analysis option R amp S FSV K84 GSM GSM Edge measurements option R amp S FSV K10 IQ IQ Analyzer mode OFDM WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM measurements option R amp S FSV K93 OFDMA WiBro WiMAX IEEE 802 16e OFDMA WiBro measurements option R amp S FSV K93 NF Noise Figure measurements R amp S FSV K30 PHN Phase Noise measurements R amp S FSV K40 PSM Power Sensor measurements option R amp S FSV K9 SFM Stereo FM measurements optionR amp S FSV K7S SPECM Spectogram mode option R amp S FSV K14 TDS TD SCDMA base station UE measurements option R amp S FSV K76 K77 VSA Vector Signal Analysis option R amp S FSV K70 Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 201 Notation WCDMA 3GPP Base Station measurements option R amp S FSV K72 3GPP UE measure ments option R amp S FSV K73 WLAN WLAN TX measurements option R amp S FSV K91 The spectrum analysis mode is impleme
425. tion to remote control is given The manual includes general information e g Safety Instruc tions and the following chapters Chapter 1 Introduction General information Chapter 2 Front and Rear Panel Chapter 3 Preparing for Use Chapter 4 Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options Chapter 5 Basic Operations Chapter 6 Basic Measurement Examples Chapter 7 Brief Introduction to Remote Control Appendix LAN Interface Operating Manuals The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide Operating Manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional software option The Operating Manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSV in general and the Spectrum mode in particular Furthermore the software options that enhance the basic functionality for various measurement modes are described here The set of measurement examples in the Quick Start Guide is expan ded by more advanced measurement examples In addition to the brief introduction to remote control in the Quick Start Guide a description of the basic analyzer commands and programming examples is given Information on maintenance instrument interfa ces and error messages is also provided In the individual option manuals the specific instrument functions of the option are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parameters refer Documentation Overvi
426. tions of the 1xEV DO Analysis TEET is automatically set by the channel type Set the number of slots via the Capture Length on page 74 field In the diagram each bar of the x axis represents one PCG The y axis represents the error power The measurement evaluates the total signal over the entire period of observation The currently selected slot is marked in red Peak Code Domain Error IQ 1 Clrw Start Slot 0 1 Slot Stop Slot 2 Fig 6 9 Peak Code Domain Error result display Only the channels detected as being active are used to generate the ideal reference signal If a channel is not detected as being active e g on account of low power the difference between the test signal and the reference signal is very large The result dis play therefore shows a peak code domain error that is too high for all slots Distortions also occur if unassigned codes are wrongly given the status of active chan nel To obtain reliable measurement results select an adequate channel threshold via the Inactive Channel Threshold on page 78 field Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP ERR PCDomain see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsystem on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 17 Peak Code Domain Error on page 325 6 1 3 10 Code Domain Error This result display shows the difference in power of
427. tivates or deactivates the multi carrier mode Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates the multi carrier settings Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Multi Carrier on page 83 See Multi Carrier on page 96 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer STATe State This command activates or deactivates the usage of a filter for multi carrier measure ments Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT OFF Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Multi Carrier Filter on page 84 See Filter Type on page 84 See Multi Carrier Filter on page 96 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FILTer COFRequency Frequency This command sets the cut off frequency for the RRC filter CONFigure Subsystem Parameters lt Frequency gt Range 0 1 MHz to 2 4 MHz RST 1 25 Example CONF CDP MCAR ON Activates multi carrier mode CONF CDP MCAR FILT ON Activates an additional filter for multi carrier measurements CONF CDP MCAR FILT TYPE RRC Activates the RRC filter CONF CDP MCAR FILT COFR 1 5MHZ Sets the cut off frequency to 1 5 MHz Mode CDMA EVDO Manual operation See Cut Off Frequency on page 85 See Cut Off Frequency on page 97 CONFigure CDPower BTS MCARrier FlLTer ROFF lt RollOffFactor gt This command sets the roll off fa
428. to be used from this dropdown menu It is only possible to select either one of the defined power classes or all of the defined power classes together Only power classes for which limits are defined are available for selection Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements If All is selected the power class that corresponds to the currently measured power in the reference range is used The limits assigned to that power class are applied see PMin PMax on page 142 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt EXCLusive on page 231 To define all limits in one step CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt LIMit STATe on page 232 PMin PMax Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask Defines the level limits for each power class The range always starts at 200 dBm INF and always stops at 200 dBm INF These fields cannot be modified If more than one Power Class is defined the value of PMin must be equal to the value of PMax of the last Power Class and vice versa Note that the power level may be equal to the lower limit but must be lower than the upper limit P min SP lt P max Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MINimum on page 233 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ESPectrum PCLass lt Class gt MAXimum on page 232 Sweep List Edit Power Classes Spectrum Emission Mask See Sweep Li
429. trol In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB CCONst see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsystem on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 10 Composite Data Constellation MS Mode on page 321 Composite Data Bitstream This result display provides information on the demodulated bits for the composite data channel and selected half slot This measurement result is only available for subtypes 2 or higher The results are dis played for the special composite data channel regardless of which channel is selected Composite Data Bitstream ei Clrw Fig 6 22 Composite Data Bitstream result display Select a specific symbol using the MKR key Enter a number and press the ENTER key the marker jumps to the selected symbol If there are more symbols than the screen is capable of displaying use the marker to scroll inside the list Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP CBSTReam see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 11 Composite Data Bitstream MS Mode on page 321 Symbol Constellation This result display shows the channel constellation of the modulated signal at symbol level You can select a specific code and half slot with the
430. type of the y axis Suffix n selects the screen Parameters Unit PCT ABS RST ABS Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale Manual operation See y Unit Abs on page 148 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer Value This command defines the upper limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical meas urements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Value 1E 8 to 1 0 RST 1 0 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 0 01 Manual operation See y Axis Max Value on page 147 CALCulate Subsystem 7 2 4 6 Other Referenced CALCulate Commands CAL Culate nz M bkercmz TR ACe nn tsssasesst ii asses sn ss sa saisis ans 240 CAL Culate nzEGbechum P tarchlbEAksearch PGtow 240 CALC HEN e RES EE 240 CAL Culate lt nie UNIT POW Cro oa 1 reuse stevens conum ron ette na a aA rrada EAEE Ra AEAEE 241 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace a marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the corresponding marker is switched on prior to the assignment Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Parameters lt Trace gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2
431. ual to the reference level the signal path cannot be overloaded Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel on page 301 Adjust Settings Occupied Bandwidth Automatically optimizes all instrument settings for the selected channel configuration channel bandwidth channel spacing within a specific frequency range channel band width The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the instrument settings can be changed later For details on the settings of span resolution bandwidth video bandwidth detector and trace averaging see chapter 6 4 15 Optimized Settings for CP ACLR Test Param eters on page 196 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet on page 301 CCDF Starts the measurement of the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function and the Crest factor Also opens the CCDF submenu containing the following softkeys Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 251 Res BW CCDF Opens an edit dialog box to set the resolution bandwidth directly Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements For correct measurement of the signal statistics the resolution bandwidth has to be wider than the signal bandwidth in order to measure the actual peaks of the signal amplitude correctly In order not to influence the peak amplitudes the video bandwidth is automatically set to 10 MHz The sample detector is used for detecting the video voltage Remote command SENSe
432. ue DOWN This keyword decrements the parameter value The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by adding the corresponding keywords to the command They must be entered following the quotation mark Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer MAXimum Returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as result arbitrary block program data This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of a binary data block CALCulate Subsystem The CALCulate subsystem contains commands for converting instrument data trans forming and carrying out corrections These functions are carried out subsequent to data acquisition i e following the SENSe subsystem Note that most commands in the CALCulate subsystem are identical to the base unit only the commands specific to this option are described here CALCulate FEED Subsystem sss nennen nennen 204 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Gubevstem eene 206 CALCulate LIMit PVTime Gubesvsiem nnne 213 Other CALCulate Commands Referenced in this Manual sess 215 CALCulate Subsystem 7 2 4 4 CALCulate DELTamarker saubevetenm eene enne 215 7 2 4 2 CALOulate LIMit subevstem eene nennen nnns 223 7 2 4 3 CALCulate LIMit ESPectrum subevystem eene 230 7 2 4 4 CALCulate PSE aubevstem eene nennen nennen nes 234 7 2 4 5 CALCulate STATistics subsvstem eene 236 7 2 4 6 Other Referenced
433. urement evaluates a single channel over a single slot You can select a specific code and slot with the Select softkey EVM vs Symbol IQ ei Clrw Start Sym 0 8 Sym Stop Sym 95 Fig 6 12 EVM vs Symbol result display Inactive channels can be measured but the result is meaningless since these chan nels do not contain data Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB EVM see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Subsys tem on page 204 Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 46 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 21 EVM vs Symbol on page 327 6 1 3 13 Composite Constellation This result display provides information about the constellation points at chip level For each chip a constellation point is displayed in the diagram The number of chips is between 64 and 1500 It depends on the channel type and in case of Preamble and Data channels on the length of the preamble Refer to chapter 6 4 2 Working with Channel Tables on page 176 for further information The measurement evaluates the total signal over a single slot Composite Constellation 1 Clrw Fig 6 13 Composite Constellation result display Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP COMP CONSt see c
434. us you can trigger an additional device via the external trigger port for example 7 11 7 11 1 Programming Examples Parameters lt PortLevel gt LOW HIGH RST LOW Example OUTP TRIG HIGH Manual operation See Trigger Out on page 172 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate lt State gt In remote control mode this command switches on or off the instrument display If switched on only the diagrams traces and display fields are displayed and updated The best performance is obtained if the display output is switched off during remote control Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SYST DISP UPD ON Programming Examples This chapter provides some examples for typical remote control programs Retrieving Trace Results Gl The example shows the results of a TRACI ing configuration DATA query for 2 channels with the follow PICH 0 16 CC 4 1 7 0 dB DATA 2 4 GG 23 Q 10 0 dB INST SEL MDO Activate 1xEV DO MS implicitly CDP relative is displayed on Screen A and Result Summary is active on Screen B Mapping is set to I INIT CONT OFF Select single sweep CDP MAPP Q Select Q branch CDP ORD HAD Set order to Hadamard INIT WAI Start measurement with synchronization TRAC TRACE1 Read out CDP relative Hadamard Q 4 0 53 3 3 4 1 52 3 0 Code 0 is quasi inactive as PICH is set to I den 254165154 4 3 54 6 0 The DATA channel is distributed between
435. using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 339 Sweep Count Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one Sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the sweep count value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 306 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu for CDA Measurements The following chapter describes all softkeys available in the Trigger menu in 1xEV DO BTS Analysis mode for CDA measurments For RF measurements see the description for the base unit Trigger Source Free Run The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately For further details refer to the Trigger Source field in the IQ Capture Settings dialog box This softkey is available for code domain measurements Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 337
436. ust Ref Lvl Ch Power ACLR Adjusts the reference level to the measured channel power This ensures that the set tings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSV or limiting the dynamic range by a too small S N ratio For details on manual settings see Settings of CP ACLR test parameters in the description of the base unit The reference level is not influenced by the selection of a standard To achieve an opti mum dynamic range the reference level has to be set in a way that places the signal maximum close to the reference level without forcing an overload message Since the measurement bandwidth for channel power measurements is significantly lower than the signal bandwidth the signal path may be overloaded although the trace is still sig nificantly below the reference level Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet RLEVel on page 301 Softkeys and Menus for RF Measurements Spectrum Emission Mask Performs a comparison of the signal power in different carrier offset ranges with the maximum values specified in the 1xEV DO specification Remote command CONFigure CDPower BTS MEASurement on page 251 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 229 Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask Opens a submenu to edit the sweep list and displays the Sweep List dialog box Sweep List dialog box Sweep List Spectrum Emission Mask
437. ut is always a relative value referred to marker 1 or to the reference position reference fixed active To obtain a correct query result a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be performed between the activation of the delta marker and the query of the y value This is only possible in single sweep mode Depending on the unit defined with CALC UNIT POW or on the activated measuring functions the query result is output in the units below 7 2 4 2 CALCulate Subsystem Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only CALCulate LIMit subsystem CAL Culate nzLlMitks ACBowerACHannel AbGolute ecce nnns 223 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel ABSolute STATe seen 224 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel REI ativel esee 224 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel RESUIt essen 225 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel REI ativelSTATe sese 226 CAL Culate nzLlMitcksACbowerAlTemate Channelz ADBGolute noeneen reenen 226 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks AChbower Al Temate chanmnezfREL ativel eneee 227 CALOulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate Channel RELative STATe
438. vel Offset 0 0 dB Trigger Polarity Positive Roll Off Factor 30 02 Preamplifier Off Trigger Offset 0 0s Cut Off Frequency 1 25 MHz Synch Channel Result Display Table Demodulation Configuration Search Mode Auto Search Revision Subtype 0 1 Screen A Result Summary Inactive Threshold 40 0 dB Code Order Hadamard Screen B Result Summary Normalize Off Screen C Composite Const Time Phase Est Off Screen D Channel Table Operation Mode Traffic CDP Average Off Code Power Relative Power Reference Total Pwr close e To change the settings either use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to change the focus to any other block or press one of the following buttons Frontend Settings on page 72 IQ Capture Settings on page 73 Synch Multicarrier Settings on page 93 Channel Table Settings on page 77 Result Demod Settings on page 101 Display Config on page 105 When using the rotary knob or the cursor keys press the ENTER key to open the cor responding dialog box The Settings Overview dialog box always remains open while settings are modified Frontend Settings This softkey opens the Frontend Settings dialog box to modify the following parame ters Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Frequency Settings Center Frequency 15 0 GHz Frequency Offset 0 0 Hz Level Settings Ref Level 10 0 dBm Ref Level Offset 0 0 dB Preamplifier
439. w channel table is set to Copy of SourceChannelTableName The Edit softkey opens the Edit Channel Table dialog box and the corresponding menu In this dialog box you can edit an existing channel table Menu and Softkey Description for CDA Measurements Note that changes are never saved automatically Save your channel tables before ending the application See Save softkey for details The dialog box contains the following items You can modify the white fields as you like The grey fields can not be modified these are automatically calculated by the R amp S FSV Name Description Channel Table Settings DO16QAM 1xEV DO standard table Pilot 0 32 38 4 BPSKI 0 00 MAC 264 192 BPSKI 0 00 MAC 364 192 BPSKI 0 00 MAC A 192 BPSKI 0 00 MAC MAC Modulation 34 60 19 2 BPSKQ 0 00 PRE64 35 64 19 BPSK Q 0 00 88 4 BPSKI 0 00 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 3 32 0 16 768 16QAM 0 00 116 768 16QAM 0 00 2 166 768 16QAM 0 00 316 76 8 16QAM 0 00 416 76 8 16QAM 0 00 516 76 88 16QAM 0 00 616 0 00 0 00 816 0 00 sion ___ 0 00 E seve est _ Table 6 1 Channel table settings Item Description Name Descriptio
440. wer of an ideally generated reference signal To calculate the mean error power the root mean square average of the real and imaginary parts of the signal is used The EVM is shown in The diagram consists of an EVM for each chip Composite Data EVM 1 Clrw Start Chip 0 256 Chips Stop Chip 1023 Fig 6 20 Composite Data EVM result display This measurement result is only available for subtypes 2 or higher The results are dis played for the special composite data channel regardless of which channel is selected Remote control In remote control this display configuration is selected using CALC FEED XTIM CDP SYMB CEVM see chapter 7 2 1 CALCulate FEED Sub system on page 204 To query these results use the command TRACe DATA TRACeX see chap ter 7 9 9 Composite Data EVM MS Mode on page 321 Composite Data Constellation This result display shows the channel constellation of the modulated composite data signal at symbol level Composite Data Constellation el Clirw Fig 6 21 Composite Data Constellation result display ae ee Operating Manual 1176 7632 02 04 58 R amp S FSV K84 K85 Instrument Functions of the 1xEV DO Analysis EE Rp SS EEE EEE EE SE eee ee EEE SS il 6 1 4 9 6 1 4 10 This measurement result is only available for subtypes 2 or higher The results are dis played for the special composite data channel regardless of which channel is selected Remote con
441. xample CALC DELT MAX LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum The cor responding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MAX NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next smaller maximum value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions the delta marker to the current trace maximum If necessary the corresponding delta marker is activated first Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 MAX Sets delta marker 3 to the maximum value of the associated trace CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary CALCulate Subsystem If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 i
442. y Subsystem DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt numeric value the unit depends on the result display RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units for example 10 dB in the Code Domain Power result display Mode CDMA BT EVDO TDS WCDMA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level With the reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 10dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Manual operation See Ref Level on page 72 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFF Set Value This command defines a reference level offset Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt Range 200 to 200 RST 0 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB DISPlay Subsystem Manual operation See Ref Level Offset on page 73 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the position of the re
443. ype including mapping 0 branch 1 Q branch 2 and Q branch lt absolute level gt absolute level of the channel 0 co dBm lt relative level gt relative level of the channel referred to the total or pilot power see SENSe CDPower PREFerence on page 270 dB timing offset Timing offset of the channel referred to the pilot in seconds s lt phase offset gt Phase offset referred to the pilot in rad If the evaluation of the rad timing and phase offset is not active see SENSe CDPower TPMeas on page 274 or more than 50 active channels are in the signal the value 9 is returned For inac tive channels the value 9 is returned All detected active channels are output first followed by the inactive or quasi active channels The channels are sorted in ascending code number order with identical code numbers the branch first followed by the Q branch The unassigned codes are displayed together with code class 4 TRACe DATA Results 7 9 14 Channel Table CTABle BTS Mode The command returns 12 values including 4 reserved values for maximum timing and phase offsets in the following order max time offset in s channel type code number for max time gt code class for max time max phase offset in rad channel type code number for max phase code class for max phase reserved 1 reserved 4 Table 7 2 Return values for par
444. ystem Example POW TRAC 2 Assigns the measurement to trace 2 Manual operation See Select Trace on page 131 SENSe SWEep subsystem SENSe SWEep COUNL ecce teenttenttttenetettt tette tette t test D 306 ISENSe SWEBIEGAT E 307 ISENSeJSWEGDEGATEEIOBDOf icit oce aree eI rende cerunt aeta x aa tna 307 IGENSe Suen EGATe LENGm ttt tette tenente tette tests 307 SENSe SWEep EGATEPOL amp atly EE 308 SENSe SWEep EGATSISOURQGO iiererpenae eee ppen nece apaiia nba ae cn REENEN NENNEN 308 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt COMMEN nennen nennen 308 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACesk gt PERiOd 2 o cce ed ineo teen d aded cue 308 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STARt range isses nere 309 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe k STATe range sse 309 SENSe SWEep E MA ET 310 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe lt k gt GTObeorange z nennen 310 EjSUEI d zen cm 310 IENSeISwWEep TIME tette tette tette tent te tette te tette test nas 311 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO ecectet ttt teet tenente tet teet te tette test 311 SENSe SWEap TYPE ese atte atca DERER Fra pas Eo RA GARA A aaa AS 311 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt NumberSweeps gt This command defines the number of sweeps started with single sweep which are used for calculating the average or maximum value If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed For Power vs Time measurements the command the sets the number

R&S FSV-K84/-K85 1xEV-DO Analysis

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSV-K84/-K85 1xEV-DO Analysis

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSV-K84/-K85 1xEV-DO Analysis